AGFA - Drystar 3000 (Service Manual) PDF

Technical
Documentation
Order no.: DD+DIS084.97E
*11NL351*
1 piece 1NL35 MA 1 AGFA GEVAERT AG
DRYSTAR 3000 Service Support International - Diagnostic Imaging Systems
Tegernseer Landstr. 161
Type 5361
D-81539 Munich
1. Edition
To order spare parts: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3760

Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7455
To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7515
printed in Germany
Agfa Company Confidential

Overview
0. Order list Caution:
1. Pre-installation This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety
regulations.
2. Controls and Connectors These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must
only be performed by qualified technical personnel.
3. Installation
4. Operating instructions
Note:
5. Theory of operation Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a

qualified electrician.
6. Service and maintenance Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a
qualified technician.
7. Reference and Circuit Diagrams
8. Spare Parts List
9. Options
10. Modifications
11. Technical Modifications
12. Maintenance
13. Fieldservice Bulletins
14. Installation Planning
15. Glossary
DD+DIS084.97E Pre-installation
Section 1
List of contents
1 INSPECTION OF PACKING .......................................................................... 1

2 UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................... 2
3 SPACE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 3
4 CHECKING THE ACCESSORY KIT.............................................................. 4
5 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 5
5.1 Environmental requirements.......................................................................................... 5
5.2 Dimensions and weight .................................................................................................. 5
5.3 Power requirements........................................................................................................ 6
5.4 Interface requirements ................................................................................................... 6
6 AGENCY APPROVALS ................................................................................. 7
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / I

1 INSPECTION OF PACKING
Upon arrival, check inventory with the carrier.
• Inspect the packing material for obvious signs of damage such as crushed, punctured,
torn, broken, wet or rattling packages.
• Check the safety indicators on the machine packing.
The machine packing is provided with a "TILTWATCH" indicator and a "SHOCKWATCH"
indicator. They are attached to the outside of the packing material and indicate, if the
printer has been tilted, turned upside down or exposed to shocks during transport.
Figure 1
If the machine was tilted, the circle in If the machine was subjected to shocks the
the arrow head of the TILTWATCH square field in the middle of the "SHOCK-
indicator changes from white to red. WATCH" indicator changes from white to
red.
• If damage is not evident, sign and stamp the bill of loading: conditions of content unknown
- subject to inspection
• If damage is evident, contact your Purchasing Department for action, have the carrier
indicate the damage on the freight bill, and sign all copies of the consignment.
During formal inspection, you should:
• Open all packages within 15 days of receipt for a complete inspection of the consignment.
• Report concealed damage to the carrier within 15 days of receipt or the carrier may not
accept liability.
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / 1

Pre-installation DD+DIS084.97E
2 UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS
For unpacking refer to the unpacking instructions, enclosed inside the

packing, as shown in figure 2 below !
Figure 2
Section 1 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

3 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
For easy access, it is recommended to respect the free space around the unit as shown in the
diagrams below.
Figure 3
Minimum space requirements for operation and servicing

Figure 4
Optimum space requirements for servicing
4 CHECKING THE ACCESSORY KIT

Compare the inventory of the accessory kit with the packing list. The packing list attached to
the shipping carton specifies the exact contents of your accessory kit.

5 SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 Environmental requirements

You should install the printer in a location where the operating conditions are within the limits
specified below.
Conditions Temperature Relative Humidity Air Pressure

Operating +10° C to +35° C 10% - 80% 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Storage -25° C to +55° C 10% - 100% 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Working-Mode Noise level Heat emission Max. permissible magn.

field in the room
Standby 45 dB (A) max. 200 W 30 Gauss
Printing 55 dB (A) max. 650 W 30 Gauss
Throughput Film formats Film loading assembly

capacity
50 films (14 x 17") per hour on 14 x 11" 100
an average 14 x14"
14 x17"
Dust (suspension) 0,2 mg/m³
Dust (sedimentation) 1,5 mg/(m²h)
5.2 Dimensions and weight

Dimensions
Printer With packing Without packing
Length (cm) 89,3 57
Width (cm) 72,4 60
Height (cm) 160 134
Weight
Printer Floor load
With packing (kg) 160 58,4 N/cm² per area
Without packing (kg) 125 58,4 N/cm² per area

5.3 Power requirements

Ensure that adequate AC input is available. The printer’s power requirements are stated on
the serial number identifying label located on the rear panel. A grounded AC outlet, according
to one of the specifications listed below, should be provided in the direct environment of the
printer.
Printer Drystar 3000 5361/100 Tolerance

Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Power input 3 wire (safety ground) single phase
Nominal voltage (V AC) 110 - 120 V AC 110 - 120 V AC +5% / -5% of
rated voltage
Power consumption (W)
Standby: 270
Printing: 700
Fuses
Power supply (A): 15 A f (fixed fuse)
Decurling unit (A): 2 x 8 A ff
Leakage current < 3.5 mA < 3.5 mA
to protective ground to protective ground
Protective conductor < 0.12 W to < 0.12 W to protective
protective ground ground
5.4 Interface requirements

Depending on the printer configuration, the appropriate video input signal or network
connection is to be provided prior to installation as shown in the table below:
Signal Printer configuration

Ethernet network node with Ethernet interface
Analog RGB or B/W video with analog video interface (VSI and SWB II)
Digital with MFRI interface

6 AGENCY APPROVALS
The printer has been tested and found to comply with the following international standards
and regulations:
Safety standards:
• TÜV approval according to: IEC 601-1, IEC 601-1-1, VDE 0750 Part 1 (12.91):
Medical electrical equipment - General requirements for safety (Germany)
• UL approval according to: UL 2601-1:
Medical electrical equipment (USA)
• C-UL approval according to: CSA 22.2 No. 601.1 M90:
Medical electrical equipment (Canada)
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression):
• FCC rules 47 CFR-part 15-subpart B, class A. (emission rules - USA)
• EN60601-1-2 (1993)
• EN55011 class A; emission
• EN61000-3-3; Flicker, short term flicker PST<=1,0
• §N61000-3-2; Harmonic class A
USA regulations:
• FDA 510k requirements
• FDA part 820 Good Manufacturing Practice for Medical Devices requirements

DD+DIS084.97E Controls and connectors
Section 2
List of contents
1 LOCAL KEYPAD ........................................................................................... 1

2 REAR PANEL ................................................................................................ 2
3 VIDEO CONNECTION ................................................................................... 3
4 NETWORK CONNECTION............................................................................ 4
5 EXTERNAL KEYPAD .................................................................................... 5
6 JAM CLEARANCE BUTTON......................................................................... 6

1 LOCAL KEYPAD
Figure 1
1 Power key, switches the printer on and off.
A delay circuit prevents the printer from voltage peaks. It may take up to 3 sec.
between switch-on and start-up of the printer.
2 Error LED, lights up when an error occurs.
Depending on the severity of the error a beeper is switched on, too.
3 Cursor key, to enter the local mode and scroll through the display screens.
4 ESC key, to leave the current display without saving.
5 ENTER key, to confirm the selection in the local keypad display.
6 ONLINE key, to switch the printer online or offline. The LED lights up if the
printer is online.
Online means, the printer is prepared to acquire diagnostic images.
Offline means, the printer cannot acquire diagnostic images. Printing testimages
is possible however.
7 UNLOCK key, to open the front door. The LED lights up if the front door is open.
By pressing the unlock-key, the locking solenoid releases the two lids (front and
top - cover) for about 3 sec.
Note: In case the machine is switched off, the unlock key is disabled. Use a
screwdriver instead to open the lid. Refer to the operation instructions for more
information.

Controls and connectors DD+DIS084.97E
2 REAR PANEL
4 3 5
2
15 9
10
14 13 12 11 536102AM.CDR
Figure 2, Example
1 External Keypad Connectors, see page 5.
2* Network Connection (10B2, Twisted pair, MAU), see page 4.
3* Video Connection. See page 3.
4* Video external Sync. See page 3.
5* Video Sync Selection Receiver. See page 3.
6 Floppy drive To read and write 3,5“ DOS formatted floppies.
7* RS232 or RS422 control port, optional. Used for host control connection.
8*
9*
10 Interground Bolt To be connected to the host device if necessary. See section 6.1.
11 Service Port. RS232 (Sub-D 25 pin female) Connector for service PC.
12 Decurl Fuse Holder. It keeps two fuses for the decurl unit heater.
13 Mains Connector
14 Supplementary protective earth connector
15* Connector plate for MFRI. 37 pin interface connector.
* optional
3 VIDEO CONNECTION

7
8
9
1
2
536102OM.CDR
3
4
5
6
Figure 3
1 Video inputs 1, 2 and 3. Fibre optic connector. Receives the video signal.
2
3
4 Sync 1, 2 and 3 input. Only used in case an external sync (synchronization)
5 connection is necessary.
6
7 Sync Selector 1, 2 and 3 input. Only used in case of an external sync
8 (synchronization) connection in combination with a VIDCOM III transmitter
box.
9

4 NETWORK CONNECTION
1
2
3
535802EM.CDR
Figure 4
1 AUI Ethernet (Sub-D 15 pin female) connection to an external transceiver.*

2 10B2 50 Ω connection to coax cable Thin Ethernet.*
3 TP Thin Ethernet Twisted Pair connection.*
*Remark: No automatic „type of connection“ recognition. Jumpersetting is necessary
according to the connection.

5 EXTERNAL KEYPAD
FIGURE 5
Item Keyname Screen Function of the key

1 ESC All Returns to the previous screen without changes
2 HELP All NOT YET IMPLEMENTED
3 QUEUE Exam Group, Set, To access destination(s) and queue(s)
F1 Work, Destination
4 INFO Work, Destination To view the destination specifications
F2
5 B&W/COL Work Toggles between B/W and color acquisition
F3
6 UP/DOWN If applicable Scrolls or moves up/down
7 RIGHT/LEFT If applicable Moves left/right or page up/down
8 SET UP Exam Group, Set To access the set-up screen
9 FORMAT Work , Patient ID To select a film format or to enter alphanumeric
characters
10 ERASE Work Deletes the last captured, previous or selected
Patient ID image
Work + Copy (13) Deletes the last character
Queue Deletes the predefined number of copies
Deletes the selected print job
11 PRINT Work Prints the current film and displays a new one
12 EXAM Work Closes an Exam folder
13 COPY Work To change the number of copies
Patient ID To enter the selected character
Destination Toggles the destination selection on/off
14 STORE COL If applicable Expose key or saves the entered color
information
15 STORE B&W If applicable Expose key or saves the entered B&W
information
16 – – Connector for foot switch
17 PLUS Work, Queue Toggles emergency priority on/off
18 – – Intensity of LCD display

6 JAM CLEARANCE BUTTON
536102NM.CDR
Figure 5
The button, located under the top cover at the left side of the printer, can be used to clear a
jam. The decurl motor M2 and the main drive motor M1 are started simultaneously.
The decurl motor M2 drives the jammed film towards the decurl exit.
The main drive motor M1 drives the jammed film towards the film loading assembly.
Remark: These two actions always are executed the same way, no matter whether the left or
right part of the button is hit.

DD+DIS170.99E Installation /Machine Start-up
Section 3
List of contents
1 PRE-CHECK ................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Site inspection ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Installation checklist ................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Scope of delivery......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 Removing the transport protection ........................................................................................... 3
1.5 Mounting the flat belt of the main drive .................................................................................... 3
2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Technical installation.................................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 Standard delivery.......................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Mains connection.......................................................................................................... 3
2.1.3 Switch on device........................................................................................................... 3
2.1.4 Loading films ................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.5 Print SMPTE test image from local keypad .................................................................. 4
2.1.6 Check the configuration of the device (IMOS) .............................................................. 5
2.1.7 Check Time and Date................................................................................................... 6
2.1.8 Fill out Site Info............................................................................................................. 7
2.1.9 Set the installation date ................................................................................................ 7
2.1.10 Positioning of the printer............................................................................................... 7
2.2 Connectivity................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2.1 External cabling ............................................................................................................ 8
2.2.2 Autolock of VSI........................................................................................................... 10
3 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Destination/Network.................................................................................................................. 10
3.2 Example for a simple Network ................................................................................................. 11
3.3 Connect the service host (optional) ........................................................................................ 12
4 APPLICATION ............................................................................................................... 12
4.1 Introduction: Customization / NVE .......................................................................................... 12
4.2 Application / Customization Overview .................................................................................... 13
4.3 Language.................................................................................................................................... 14
4.4 Disk Space Quotas .................................................................................................................... 14
4.5 Edit keypads .............................................................................................................................. 15
4.6 Print a diagnostic image........................................................................................................... 17
5 KICK OFF ..................................................................................................................... 18

5.1 Backup........................................................................................................................................ 18
6 ADDENDUM A: REMOVING THE TRANSPORT PROTECTION ............................................... 19

7 ADDENDUM B: MOUNTING THE DETACHED FLAT BELT OF THE MAIN DRIVE
(LEFT HAND MACHINE SIDE)........................................................................................... 23
7.1 Attachment of the flat belt on the flat belt pulley ................................................................... 23
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 3 / I

Installation /Machine Start-up DD+DIS221.98E
1 Pre-Check
1.1 Site inspection
Take care that you have performed the necessary steps of the site inspection. A specific
readiness checklist concerning the site inspection topics is included in the installation planning
section of this documentation (section 14). It is intended that you send the filled out readiness
checklist to the NSO in advance.
Thus, to your own advantage, it is ensured, that all necessary preparation work is done before
delivery and installation.
1.2 Installation checklist
The following order of listed tasks is mandatory !
Task See
Action Code section
1 Pre - Check INS
Ensure site inspection items 14
Unpack the printer 1
Check scope of delivery 1.3
Remove transport protection elements Add:A
The following order of listed tasks is not mandatory !
Task See
Action Code section
2 Installation INS 2.1
Technical installation
Connect mains cable
Switch on
Load film
Print test image from local keypad
Check the configuration of the device (IMOS)
Compare with the delivered OGT file
Check time and date
Fill out site info
Set the installation date
Position the printer at its final location
Connectivity INS 2.2

Perform external connection (cables)
Perform autolock (in case of VSI installed)
print diagnostic image from the host
3 System integration SIC 3.
Adjust network parameters (ART-Parameters)
Connect service host (optional)
Section 3 / 2 5361 09.01.00

4 Application APP 4
Adapt disk space quotas
Edit keypads
Print diagnostic image
5 Kick off OTR 5
Backup
Train the user
1.3 Scope of delivery

Check the scope of delivery by means of the packing list, attached to the printer.
1.4 Removing the transport protection

To remove the transport protection elements refer to the addendum A of this section.
1.5 Mounting the flat belt of the main drive

For the mounting procedure of the main drive flat belt refer to Addendum B of this section.
Do not connect the printer to the mains outlet before you finished all
actions described in the above mentioned Addenda A and B (refer to
item 1.4) !
2 Installation
The installation sequence described in this part has been designed to make the installation as
easy as possible. The procedure below outlines the recommended installation steps.
All printers are configured at production site as defined by marketing.
2.1 Technical installation

2.1.1 Standard delivery
The printer is provided with an auto switching power supply. For this reason there are no
adaptations to perform to align to local line voltages or frequencies. There are no voltage-
specific fuses to install.
default language is: - English
2.1.2 Mains connection

• Mains cable
Install the printer to the same ground as the host system for safety reasons. If this is not
possible see section 6.1 for solutions
• Supplementary protective earth cable
This cable is plugged onto the supplementary earth connector (not included, has to be
ordered separately under ABC-Code: 79K67)
Apply this cable only in case the printer is connected to other non IEC 601 conforming
equipment.
2.1.3 Switch on device

Switch on the device with the power switch in front of the printer.
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 3

2.1.4 Loading films

Refer to the user manual to perform the correct action for
loading films.
You also can see the sequence of handling by imprinted
icons on top of the film loading assembly. To see these
icons, open the top cover and the cover of the film loading
compartment (see Figure 1).
Figure 1
2.1.5 Print SMPTE test image from local keypad
When all requirements in the previous paragraphs are fulfilled, a first test image has to be
printed to verify the mechanical operation of the printer.
• Print an SMPTE testimage:
? ESC
ERROR
1
ENTER
3x
? ESC
ERROR
2
ENTER
? ESC
ERROR
3
ENTER
? ESC
ERROR
4
ENTER
1x
536103AZ.CDR ? ESC
ERROR
Figure 2: SMPTE testimage 5

ENTER
wait ca. 2 minutes

3x
? ESC
ERROR
6
ENTER
536110AB.CDR
Figure 3: Print SMPTE testimage at

the local keypad.
Section 3 / 4 5361 09.01.00

2.1.6 Check the configuration of the device (IMOS)

2.1.6.1 Starting the IMOS Drystar 3000 service software
For to check the configuration of the printer, perform the following steps to enter the IMOS
Drystar 3000 service program:
• Connect your service PC locally to the printer
• Switch on your service PC.
• Switch on the printer.
• Select the Drystar 3000-Icon.
Figure 4
• The IMOS Drystar 3000 service program shows up with in a separate window as shown
below.
Figure 5
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 5

2.1.6.2 Check configuration

In general, the delivered printer unit is preconfigured, with all interfaces installed according to
the order at OSD in Belgium. For this reason there is no further configuration
necessary !
Configuration at production site affects the following items:

- 3 inputs analog: VSI and switchboard 2 + opt. SSR1 (ext. sync.)
digital: MFRI + 3M (P 952)
USP (SPC 1)
AMDI
- 1 output Drystar 3000
- 1 network APIP / DICOM* / Postscript*
*) optional
Figure 6
The window above shows a listing of a specific configuration. You may ensure the correctness
of the configuration via the IMOS Drystar 3000 service program. In order to do this, compare
the attached OGT file (part of the delivery) with the actual configuration entries.
In case of discrepancies you have to reconfigure the Drystar 3000. Refer to section 6.2 or 9
2.1.7 Check Time and Date

Check time and date in the IMOS Drystar 3000 application menu and adjust if necessary.
Note: Time and Date influences

• Patient ID: e.g. 804241430 = year 1998 Month 04
Day 24 Hour 14 Min 30
• The logbook time stamping
• The installation date
Figure 7: IMOS Window for time and date adjustment
Section 3 / 6 5361 09.01.00

2.1.8 Fill out Site Info

• In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to "Install → Installation Report".
• Select "Site Info"
• Fill out the site specific information. This will be part of the infocounter header.
Figure 8: Site info (Example)

2.1.9 Set the installation date
• In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to "Install → Installation Report".
• Select "date of installation": Now automatically the current date is set as device
installation date.
Note: The date of installation can only be set once.
Figure 9: Installation Date
2.1.10 Positioning of the printer

When positioning the printer at ist final location, please ensure that the stoppers at the wheels
are locked.
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 7

2.2 Connectivity
2.2.1 External cabling
• Refer to the corresponding interface release document available on DIGIMAIL (+49 89
6207 7777 analog / +49 89 69370160 ISDN), download area „interfaces / connectivity“ or
http://medical.agfa.com (AGFA Medical Homepage).
2.2.1.1 Video Connection. Monitor in the video chain

75 Ohm Terminator AGF
A
VIDEO OUT
3000
R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT

STA
DRY
A A
VIDEO IN
(Fibre)
VIDCOM
HOST MONITOR
536103SZ.CDR
Figure 10
2.2.1.2 Video Connection: Monitor at the end of the video chain

A
AGF
3000
R
STA
DRY
VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN

A
75 Ohm
VIDCOM Terminator
VIDEO IN
(Fibre)
A
Host VIDEO OUT MONITOR

536103RZ.cdr
Figure 11
• Make sure that the BNC-coax cables (A) used in the video chain are as short as
possible. For video signals above 100 MHz the coax-cables should not be longer
than 5 m.
• optical cables can have a length of up to 350m.
• For jumper settings of the VSI board refer to IMOS Drystar 3000: REPAIR → VME
Boards
Section 3 / 8 5361 09.01.00

2.2.1.3 Example for VIDCOM and VSI connection (here: color input)
Figure 12
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 9

2.2.2 Autolock of VSI
Autolock is only needed for analog connections
The autolock procedure is described in section 9, VSI.
Figure 13
3 System integration
3.1 Destination/Network
Figure 14
• The Destination Network List shows every configured Network Node with its corresponding
parameters.
• To edit a new Network Node, press <ADD NEW>
Section 3 / 10 5361 09.01.00

3.2 Example for a simple Network
0
R 300
TA
YS
DR
536103LZ.CDR
ART ENTRY 1 (in Drystar 3000) ART ENTRY 2 (in Drystar 3000)
Destination name: DRY_3000 Destination name: DRY_2000
Host name: dry_3000 (= AOS shell prompt) Host name: dry_2000 (= AOS shell prompt)
IP Address: 192.9.200.201 IP Address: 192.9.200.202
Port: 3027 Port: 3027
Type: Drystar 3000 (Typ 53614) Type: Drystar 2000 (Typ 5358)
Availability: Enabled Availability: Enabled
Input/Output: Local Printer Input/Output: Remote Printer
ART ENTRY 1 = ART ENTRY 2 =

Capture images at Drystar 3000 Capture images at Drystar 3000
Print images at Drystar 3000 Print images at Drystar 2000
Note 1 For ART0 settings see screen in previous page (ART 0 = ART 1)
Note 2 In case images captured on Drystar 2000 shall be printed on the Drystar 3000, too, the
Drystar 2000 settings have to be made accordingly.
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 11

3.3 Connect the service host (optional)

• In case a service host (see Figure 15) was ordered with the device
(refer to OGT file, delivered with the device), make the connections as
described in the installation instructions delivered with the service host.
• Pass the corresponding RSC or GSC (RSC = Regonial Support
Center, GSC = Global Support Center) the network parameters as
described in the service host installation instructions.
Figure 15
4 Application
4.1 Introduction: Customization / NVE
Application can also be called Customization. Customization is the adaptation of the printer to
the customers need. IMOS offers for most customization steps comfortable shells.
Figure 16
Note: Name/Value Edit is a fast alternative for the advanced user,

to adjust specific parameters of the printer directly.
For an overview of all important parameters see document

DD+DIS115.98E, NVF parameters MG3000 and Drystar.
Figure 17
Section 3 / 12 5361 09.01.00

4.2 Application / Customization Overview

Customization is the adaptation of the system to the customers needs. Following parts of the system
are concerned:
• The user display
• The harddisk
• The film
Enclosed a graphical overview of the most important customization items.
See next page for explanation of figures 1 to 11
User Display Harddisk Drystar 3000
ESC HELP QUEUE INFO B&W/COL F4

3
F1 F2 F3
Drystar 3000 US Room 2

<1> Dr. Miller
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
STORE STORE
Partition F:
SET UP FORMAT ERASE PRINT EXAM COPY
COL B&W
9 2
US Room 2 Dr. Miller 11 10

B&W Image
<1> 1/0 Kidn. pos.
5
Dr. Miller
8x10 1/0 Kidn. Pos
IF 220 Pt: US802041430 1
IS 80 Copies: 1
IA 3 To: DRY_2000
Queue: 12/16
536103JZ.CDR
Figure 18
Table with recommended adjustments during customization see next page
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 13

Table with recommended adjustments during customization
Adjustment Where to find

1 Time and Date Time and date (section 2.1.7)
2 Disk Space Quota Disk Space Quota (section 4.4)
3 Hospital Name and Location* Edit Keypad (section 4.5)
4 Exam group names* Edit Keypad (section 4.5)
5 Exam Set ID`s* Edit Keypad (section 4.5)
6 Black & White Layouts* Edit Keypad (section 4.5)
7 Contrast B&W* Edit Keypad (section 4.5) Edit Films
8 Interpolation (Sharpness)* Edit Keypad (section 4.5) Edit Sources
9 Film recovery after power failure Name Value Edit: MNU: parameter
b_cftbl_usr[1].no_recovery **
10 Set ICON for film reduction Name Value Edit: DSP: parameter icon_pos **
11 Activate annotations Name Value Edit: MNU: parameter annotation **
* To make these parameters active, no reset required. Simply confirm with <ok>, leave the
current keypad screen and re-enter it.
**see DD+DIS115.98E; NVF Parameters
grey fields mean optional, i.e. not mandatory
4.3 Language
At the time being only English
4.4 Disk Space Quotas
Adapt the disk space quotas according to the input image size and workload of the inputs.
Note: Input 4 is the local keypad. Do not adjust input 2 below 10 MB
Figure 19
Section 3 / 14 5361 09.01.00

4.5 Edit keypads
• Select the Keypad, you wish to customize.
Figure 20
• Select the desired exam set
Figure 21
• Select the next action to be performed via the 3 edit buttons at the bottom of the above
shown screen.
• Change the values for interpolation and taste look up table (and eventually other settings,
too) as described in section 5, application.
• Use <DELETE ALL> to delete all examination groups at once.
Selection: <Copy Exam Set>

• To shorten the amount of time for the customization you can copy specific completed
examination sets. After that you only have to modify a few remaining parameters.
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 15

Figure 22
Selection: <EDIT SOURCES>
Figure 23
Selectio: <EDIT IMAGES>
Figure 24
Section 3 / 16 5361 09.01.00

Selection: <EDIT FILMS>
Figure 25
The actions described above, which have to be performed for each keypad are identical for
each keypad.
4.6 Print a diagnostic image

• Print a diagnostic image from all connected host systems.
• Discuss the image quality with the customer
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 17

5 Kick off
5.1 Backup
• In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to "Install" → "Backup".
• Select the destination and filename for the backup.
Figure 26
• Explain the operation of the device to the customer.
Section 3 / 18 5361 09.01.00

6 Addendum A: Removing the transport protection

1. This document informs you what should be done after Drystar 3000 is unpacked.
Do not connect the printer to the mains outlet before you finished all
handling described in this document !
• Take the long screw driver attached to the

accessories (see scope of delivery).
• Unlock the top cover and the cover of the
film loading compartment by inserting the
screw driver in the hole betweeen the grips
of these covers
• Open the top cover first
• Open the cover of the film loading
compartment
• At the inside- right hand side - there is a

floppy holder
• Remove the tape but leave the floppies in
the holder as you normally do not need
these floppies during installation
536103AM.BMP
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 19

• With the top cover opened you get access

to the unlocking screws of the side covers
• Turn the screws on top of the left and right
side covers 90 degrees counter clock wise
using a coin or a screw driver
• Lift the covers a few centimeters and then
remove them.
536103BM.BMP
• Cut the plastic strip that secures the film

guiding plate and remove it.
536103CM.BMP
• Cut the 2 plastic strips that secure the

decurl unit and remove them
536103DM.BMP
Section 3 / 20 5361 09.01.00

• Cut the 2 plastic strips that secure the shaft

above the film loading compartment and
remove them.
536103EM.BMP
• Open the film loading compartment and

remove the buffer, which lies where
normally the film is put. (not shown on this
picture)
536103FM.BMP
• At the right side of the printer there is a

locking plate on the densitometer module.
• Loose the screw and then remove the plate
Option: Mobile Kit

At the right hand side of the printer with a
mobile kit installed there is a black teflon ring
on the densitometer module.
Do not remove this ring!
536103GM.BMP
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 21

• On the left and right side there is a square

hole.
• In that hole there is on both sides a red
coloured blocking plate holding the thermal
head compartment against the chassis
• Remove on each side the hexagonal screw
and remove the red blocking plate
• Open the thermal head compartment.
536103HM.BMP
• Remove the hexagonal screws on both

sides.
• Close the thermal head compartment and
lock it by turning the 2 screws with the ring
90 degrees clock wise.
536103IM.BMP
• Deposit the screw driver of the accessory-

Kit in the prepared holder at the left side.
• Install the side covers (take care that the

bottom of the side covers is well positioned
over the positioning pins).
• Proceed with the installation.
536103JM.BMP
Section 3 / 22 5361 09.01.00

7 Addendum B:
Mounting the detached flat belt of the main drive
(left hand machine side)
Reason: If the printer is out of operation for a longer time period (about 6 weeks), the flat
belt of the main drive may suffer permanent pressure marks due to the belt
tension.
These pressure marks on the flat belt result in irregularities of the film transport
system, and thus also in image artefacts (horizontal lines at a spacing of approx.
13 cm).
Therefore, at the production line, the flat belt is detached again after the printer
has been calibrated and the belt tension has been mounted at the belt pulley,
(see figure 1).
For first operation of the machine the flat belt must be mounted again.
flat belt pulley
detached flat belt
Figure 1 (Addendum B)
7.1 Attachment of the flat belt on the flat belt pulley
• Undo the upper screw in the left side cover (by quarter rotation).
• Lift the cover and remove it.
• Place the detached belt on the running face of the pulley, by slowly turning the flat belt
pulley by hand.
When the flat belt pulley is turned in order to mount the belt, the motor
reacts like a generator.
Therefore turn the flat belt pulley only slowly to keep the generator
effect as low as possible.
• Carefully keep the flat belt pulley turning by hand, thus moving the belt to the centre of the
pulley running face.
Subsequent adjustment of the belt tension or calibration of the printer

is not necessary.
09.01.00 5361 Section 3 / 23

DD+DIS103.02E Theory of operation
Section 5
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 1
2 FUNCTIONAL SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 4
2.1 Sequence of functions after switching on: SW component startup ................................................4
2.2 Sequence of functions during operation ............................................................................................5
2.2.1 Overall block diagram ......................................................................................................................5
2.2.2 Image Data Flow..............................................................................................................................6
2.3 Sequence of functions during the print cycle.....................................................................................7
3 DESCRIPTION OF THE PRINT PROCESS ..................................................................... 8
3.1 The principle of thermographic printing .............................................................................................8
3.1.1 General principles of image formation in the printer ........................................................................8
3.2 Thermal head .........................................................................................................................................8
3.2.1 Necessity of the TH-position adjustment .........................................................................................9
3.2.2 Necessity of the TH-pressure adjustment......................................................................................10
3.3 Compensation ......................................................................................................................................11
3.4 Monomed films ....................................................................................................................................12
4 COMPONENTS............................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Thermal Head Assembly .....................................................................................................................13
4.2 Film Loading Assembly.......................................................................................................................14
4.3 Description of the friction clutches ...................................................................................................15
4.4 Horizontal Film Alignment ..................................................................................................................16
4.5 Main Drive.............................................................................................................................................17
4.6 Macrodensitometer (MDM)) ................................................................................................................19
4.6.1 Film to film Dmax calibration..........................................................................................................20
4.6.2 Film type detection.........................................................................................................................20
4.6.3 Film calibrations at software version 1.7X and 1.9X......................................................................21
4.7 Decurl Unit............................................................................................................................................22
5 HARDWARE OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 23
5.1 Overall Hardware Model......................................................................................................................23
5.2 VME Bus ...............................................................................................................................................24
5.2.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................24
5.2.2 VME BUS Overview.......................................................................................................................24
5.3 ROCAN bus ..........................................................................................................................................26
5.3.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................26
5.3.2 Boards............................................................................................................................................26
5.4 Harddisk / Print queue.........................................................................................................................28
5.4.1 Organization of the harddisk ..........................................................................................................28
5.4.2 Organization of the print queue......................................................................................................28
6 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE....................................................................................... 29
7 FILE STRUCTURE / AOS SHELL .................................................................................. 30
8 APPLICATION ................................................................................................................ 32
8.1 Overview of all steps of image processing.......................................................................................32
Revision 32 Type 5361 Chapter 5 / I

Theory of operation DD+DIS103.02E
8.2 Taste look up table. Combination with Sensolut..............................................................................32

8.3 Window level ........................................................................................................................................33
8.4 INTERPOLATION..................................................................................................................................34
8.5 Printing Areas.......................................................................................................................................36
9 NETWORKING: GENERAL INTRODUCTION ............................................................... 37
9.1 APIP .......................................................................................................................................................39
9.2 DICOM ...................................................................................................................................................39
9.2.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................39
9.2.2 DICOM in Combination with APIP..................................................................................................40
9.3 Postscript..............................................................................................................................................42
Chapter 5 / II Type 5361 Revision 32

1 INTRODUCTION
The printer is used to produce films (hard copies) for medical diagnostics. The printer is a dry,
black&white thermo hard-copy system for monomed films. Blue, clear and opaque films can be
handled. Possible film formats are 14 x 17“, 14 x 14“ and 14 x 11“
The printer consists of two functional blocks: A
controller and a print engine.
The controller captures the incoming analog or
digital data via an input interface and stores them
onto a hard disk, composes the different images
and generates the appropriate print engine
control signals.
The print engine receives the image data from
the controller, drives the film through the device
and makes black/white prints.
Drystar 3000: It can be divided in Controller (VME Compartment) and Print Engine
• The printer can be

equipped with an analog
video input (VSI) or a
digital image input (MFRI).
• It can be host controlled
for printing. It is able to
understand the host
control programs AMDI
(AGFA), USP (Siemens),
MMM (3M) and TCT
(Toshiba.
• In addition, the printer can
be integrated in a
network. Possible
network protocols can be
APIP (AGFA) or DICOM.
Sending images via
network in postscript
description is possible too.
A lot of other image
formats, like sunraster or
TIF via E-mail are also
supported.
System Overview Drystar 3000. Example for a network connection.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 1

Table with possible inputs and corresponding image interfaces

Signal Interface Max. number
Analog video VSI 3 x B&W or Color*
Digital according to 3M specs MFRI 3*
Ethernet SW interfaces: APIP, Theoretically number of inputs without
DICOM, FTP, PAP limit**
and LP
*The maximum number of local inputs is limited to 3, analog or digital.
**In case of DICOM inputs, where to every input a certain configuration has to be assigned, the
maximum number of inputs is limited to 4.
Decurl Unit • An internal keypad is provided

for command entry, to set up
Top Cover the printer, and to display user
Filmrun
and error messages. Up to
three external keypads, one
Drum Thermal Head
per local input, can be
connected.
Film Loading Assembly • The system is based on an
automatic sheet handling
VME Compartment
system. Films can be loaded
in full daylight.
• The film path through the
printer is shown in the sketch
53615003.cdr beneath.
Filmrun of the printer
Section 5 / 2 Type 5361 09.01.00

Technical data of the printer Drystar 3000 in comparison with other AGFA printers:
Drystar 3000 Drystar 2000 LR5200

Weight 125 kg 70 kg 475 kg
Power 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz; 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz; 1120 300 W to 3 kW,
Requirements 920 W W depending on S or P
Version
Throughput: 50/h to 70/h (14x17“)
Density: <0,25 (0,17)......>3.0 <0,25 (0,17).......>3.0 O.D. <0,1......>3,4 O.D.
O.D.
Printing principle: Direct thermal Direct Thermal / Dye Photochemical via red
diffusion laser beam
Calibration: Automatic - manual or semi automatic
Resolution: 320 dpi 300 dpi 320 to 600 dpi
Grey levels 256 out of 4096 256 out of 4096 256 or 4096 out of 65535
Warm-up time: 5 minutes 5 minutes 1 up to approx. 20 min.
with processor
Lifetime of > 30000 films > 30000 print passes Laser tube > 20.000 h
printhead:
Film Shelf life: 18 months 18 months 24 months
Archivability 30 years 30 years 30 years
Nr. of Inputs 3+x (APIP/DICOM/PS) 1+x (APIP/DICOM/PS) 3+x (APIP/DICOM/PS)
Access time in min. approx. 1 approx. 3 (color) to 1 (b&w) approx. 1
Film formats 14x17, 14x14, 14x11 8x10 8x10, 11x14, 14x14,
14x17
Max. number of 4256 x 5174 (14x17") 2730 x 2048 (8x10") 8512 x 10348 (10x17"
image pixels on a → 22,02 MB → 5,59 MB x 3 colors = high res)
film and → 88, 08MB
corresponding 16,77 MB
image information
Number of film 1 (other formats have 1 1 or 2
formats used to be installed; 30 min.
simultaneously required)
Applications All medical US, NM All medical applications.
applications High quality images
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 3

2 Functional sequence
2.1 Sequence of functions after switching on: SW component startup
Description:
The monitor EPROM, located on the GEMINI CPU starts up the
MONITOR shell.
It looks on the harddisk for the operating system (BSP.PRG).
The program BSP.PRG executes the AUTOEXEC.BAT script,
which spawns the SYS (SYStem) program.
This is the base for all the drivers that are necessary for image
processing and film transport.
When all the drivers are loaded, the bootup is finished.
This whole bootup takes about 3 minutes.
Bootup Sequence
Section 5 / 4 Type 5361 09.01.00

2.2 Sequence of functions during operation
2.2.1 Overall block diagram
Functions of the controller: Functions of the Print engine

• capturing of images a) an image should be rendered independent of
• buffering in image queue • time, history
• image is processed as define by the user • place on the film
• neighbour pixels...
b) TH compensations
• control of engine mechanics
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 5

2.2.2 Image Data Flow
Acquisition Buffering Composition and Communication
add convert to
image
acquisition data set internal
input
parameters format
queue's on HD (F)
add defaults image
queue dest.1 image to
for image image composition
print
undefined processing composition map on HD
queue dest. 2 engine
parameters (E)
53615039.cdr
add convert to
image
acquisition data set internal
input convert to convert to
parameters format
internal external
format format
image from & to

netwerk
Acquisition
• ACQ (ACQuisition), acquires images, from one of the inputs
• converts to internal format (=APIP), using MNU data set parameters like image and film
parameters, ACOM (Accumulation Common Object Module API for image conversion to the
internal format)
Buffering
BMD:
• controls input queues and disk quota for ‘users’,
• images are stored in a folder (film based or study based) and queued (FIFO) on the hard-disk
partition F
• one queue for every destination (local printer, network printer)
• recovery of unfinished folders at startup
• each image is put in a 1/0 layout or is deleted (configurable)
Composition & Communication
a) DSP (DiSPatcher),
• reads out and decodes the control and images information from the queue
• adds defaults (dbmin, dbmax, layout, background...) for undefined fields
• organizes the image processing
b) NIP for image processing
c) ‘Image Composition on Disk’ manager uses ICI, to compose the film-layout and stores it in the
ICM (Image composition map) on disk partition E
d) By CPD images are sent to COS
Section 5 / 6 Type 5361 09.01.00

2.3 Sequence of functions during the print cycle
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 7

3 DESCRIPTION OF THE PRINT PROCESS
3.1 The principle of thermographic printing

• The film is pressed to the print drum
by the TH
• The drum is rotated causing the film to
move along the TH
• Pixel values of the image are converted
into heating pulses in the thermal
elements of the TH
• The heating pulses are causing the
gray pixels rendering on the thermal
sensitive sheet
• The higher the temperature and the
longer the time an elementary part
(area) of the sheet is heated, the
higher will be the resulting optical
density of that part
3.1.1 General principles of image formation in the printer

• The image formation in the print engine is based on the completely dry direct thermal technology.
Thermal because the image information is transferred to the TM-film by means of heat and direct
because the heat producing component - the thermal head(TH) is in direct contact with the TM-
film.
• The heat is generated in the heating elements of the thermal printhead. These heating elements
are arranged in a 14" wide one dimensional area with a spatial frequency of 320 elements per
inch. The elements can be activated individually.
• During printing, the heating elements are activated pixel by pixel and the thermal printhead is
brought into contact with the transported TM-film.
3.2 Thermal head

The thermal print head is manufactured using a
"thin film" technology and consists of the following
components:
• array of 4352 individual resistor elements on
one line, 14 inch, 320 elements per inch
• placed on a glaze bulb
• ceramic substrate supports the glaze bulb
• rigid base plate adds extra mechanical
strength
• electronic circuits for controlling the heating
of each individual resistor
• TH is mounted on a heat-sink for dissipating
heat to the environment, so that the excess of
heat does not distort the printed image
Section 5 / 8 Type 5361 09.01.00

3.2.1 Necessity of the TH-position adjustment

The TH position influences the image
quality. Image artifacts like "woodiness",
transport and friction shocks and artifacts
caused by very small (< 10 µ!)
irregularities in the drum surface can be
noticed. The drawing beneath shows two
different TH positions:
Attention: TH position is determined by two pins and adjusted already in production.

The position adjustment from pin position to pin position is 0,2 mm (see drawing below)
TH position adjustment
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 9

3.2.2 Necessity of the TH-pressure adjustment
• In the Drystar3000 printer, the image information is transferred to the film by means of heat which
is generated in the heating elements of the thermal printhead. Therefore, in order to guarantee a
reliable information transfer, a good thermal contact between the TH and the film is required.
• Since the heaterline of a TH is not perfectly flat (see figure below), a good thermal contact along
the thermal head is only possible if the TH is pressed hard enough against the film and the drum.
• During production, the “TH-pressure” is adjusted to 300 g/cm (≈ 2.5 g/element). It cannot be
adjusted in the field.
• If on the other hand the pressure between the TH and the film becomes too high, the TH’s
passivation layer can be damaged by mechanical wear or by the passage of a dust particle
between the TH and the film. A too high pressure therefore can lead to the early appearance of
TH-defects (like e.g. broken resistors).
mounted TH
unmounted TH
0,45
0,40
Flatness (mm)
0,35
120µm
0,30
0,25
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
53615015.cdr Position along TH
Section 5 / 10 Type 5361 09.01.00

3.3 Compensation
During printing, the print engine must continuously compensate for a number of external (= non data
related) influences that otherwise would introduce density changes (and image artifacts).
There is e.g. a very close and

strong relationship between the
system sensitometry and different
temperatures around the print head
(drawing see beneath).
The most important compensations are:

• The microdensitometer compensation which compensates for the differences in heat
production of different resistor elements in the thermal printhead. The scanning is done
with a resolution of 2000 dpi. Like that the obtained density for each resistor element is
known.
• The temperature compensation which compensates for the changes in ambient and
heatsink temperature and for the heat accumulation in the thermal printhead during
printing (see drawing above).
• The sensitometric compensation which compensates for the differences in sensitometric
behaviour between different TM-production batches.
• The voltage drop compensation.
• The previous and neighbour compensation
• The copy-to-copy Dmax compensation.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 11

3.4 Monomed films

A cross section through a monomed sheet is represented below:
The image forming layer of AgOS is heat sensitive but not light sensitive.
By influence of heat (100° - 200° C) the silver (Ag) is reduced from AgOS:
heat (100°-200° C)
AgOS + reduction è Ag + (image information).......
Section 5 / 12 Type 5361 09.01.00

4 Components
4.1 Thermal Head Assembly
Function:
• Guarantee steady and continuous pressure of the TH towards the film
• Film transport
Adjustments:
TH pressure adjustment
Note:
We distinguish 3 TH positions. In preprint
position the TH rollers are not yet leading
the film. As soon, as the film is in
position of the TH rollers, they press the
film towards the drum and the following
film guide (sheet metal).
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 13

4.2 Film Loading Assembly
Function:
• Film separation
• Driving film to TH
• Horizontal film alignment (together with motor M8)è Motor M8 drives film towards stop in input
tray. See drawing beneath.
Adjustments: Vertical film alignment (position the stop further up / down).
Note: For the function of the clutch see description below: Function of the friction clutches.
Section 5 / 14 Type 5361 09.01.00

4.3 Description of the friction clutches
Friction Clutches: Example of function in input tray
• Altogether 3 friction clutches are built in (film loading assembly; vertical film alignment, sheet take
over motor).
• Function 1: Opening of the rollers if motor drives backward.
• Function 2: Guarantee a fixed torque of 6 Ncm
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 15

4.4 Horizontal Film Alignment
Functions:
• Horizontal film alignment
Adjustments:
After exchange of this unit, the horizontal position of the horizontal film alignment has to be adjusted.
Note: For the function of the clutch see description below: Function of the friction clutches.
Section 5 / 16 Type 5361 09.01.00

4.5 Main Drive
Functions:
• The maindrive drives the drum in constant speed.
• It calibrates after switch on (only if switch off time > 15 min.) or if the machine was idle for more
than 1 hour
• It also calibrates the drum speed during printing
• Optical position encoder (3000 pulses per revolution) controls main drive motor
• Closed loop control
Adjustments: none
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 17

Maindrive Control Principle
Section 5 / 18 Type 5361 09.01.00

4.6 Macrodensitometer (MDM))

A Macro Density Measurement system (MDM) is built-in to allow for constant image quality
concerning Dmin, Dmax, sensitometry and vertical banding.
Functions:
· Automatic film to film Dmax calibration (refer to 4.6.1, page 20)
· Automatic film type detection (after the printout!) (refer to 4.6.2, page 20)
· Film calibrations of the printer (refer to 4.6.3, page 21)
· reduction of the vertical macro density banding (density variation along the width of a TH)
(refer to 4.6.3, page 21)
· calibrating the MDM to an external density-meter, by means of a 'reference' film (refer to
4.6.3, page 21)
Adjustments:
No mechanical adjustments. For calibrations Refer to section 6.6, calibrations and adjustments.
Note: Details of the functions mentioned above depend on the SW release (SW Rel. 1.7X or 1.9X).
Refer to the table in section 4.6.3.
Revision 32 Type 5361 Chapter 5 / 19

4.6.1 Film to film Dmax calibration

· The 'film-to-film Dmax calibration' is automatically
performed after every print, if it is switched on. The
filmrun stops, the MDM carriage moves towards the film
and measures the maximum density at position 12 mm
from the right and 90 mm from the bottom.
· At SW Rel. 1.7X the film-to-film calibration is switched on
by default, at SW Rel. 1.9X it is switched off by default.
Refer to section 6.6 calibrations for more information.
· It keeps the 'border density' (from film to film) equal to a
'reference density' during printing.
· Every 'max.-density calibration' defines a new 'reference
~12
~ mm Film to film density' (= new start point)
536105AE.CDR
Dmax · The 'reference density' is defined by the average border

calibration density of the first 5 printouts after the last max.-density
~90
~ mm measurement calibration
· The film to film calibration reduces the average of a
'gradual density variation' over more than 5 print-
outs
4.6.2 Film type detection

· With SW Rel. 1.7X the 'film type detection' is
automatically performed after every print. The filmrun
stops, the MDM carriage moves towards the film and
measures the fog level at position approx. 5 from the right
and 90 mm from the bottom.
· Like that after every print the film type blue base or clear
base is automatically detected.
· At SW Rel. 1.7X the film type detection is switched on by
default, at SW Rel. 1.9X it is switched off by default. This
cannot be altered with software parameters.
~5 mm
~ Film type
536105AF.CDR
detection
~90 mm
~ measurement
Chapter 5 / 20 Type 5361 Revision 32

4.6.3 Film calibrations at software version 1.7X and 1.9X
Calibration Purpose When to be performed How to be performed How to be performed Remarks reg. SW Rel. 1.9X
in SW Rel. 1.7X in SW Rel. 1.9X
Registration * Reduces the mechanical mis- · whenever a TH profile calibration is not satisfying · via local keypad · via IMOS Drystar 3000 · At printers equipped with SW Rel. 1.9X the registration
registration of the MDM carriage during calibration can only be performed via IMOS Drystar 3000.
· first calibration in case of MDM exchange · via IMOS Drystar 3000
a film scan
536110AO.CDR
Reference film To determine new reference values for · when the printer to printer density variation has to · via local keypad · via IMOS Drystar 3000 · At printers equipped with SW Rel. 1.9X the reference film
the MDM. This is done via an external be kept small (has to be done at both printers!) calibration can only be performed via IMOS Drystar 3000.
· via IMOS Drystar 3000
densitometer.
· when an absolute density accuracy is important
536110AK.CDR
The default reference film density (compensate for deviations of the reference film)
setting obtained at production is used in
· when the system should be calibrated to the „user
case this adjustment is not performed.
densitometer“.
Density Meter * Calibrate the MDM. Compensate its · at the maintenance, i.e. at least once a year · via local keypad · via IMOS Drystar 3000 · At printers equipped with SW Rel. 1.9X the MDM calibration
long term drift. The MDM step wedge can only be performed via IMOS Drystar 3000.
reference film delivered with the printer
536110AK.CDR
has to be entered and will be measured.
TH profile * To reduce vertical macro banding · at the maintenance, i.e. at least once a year · via local keypad · via local keypad · In SW Rel. 1.9X automatic thermal head calibration is active
(vertical density irregularities). Only (by default). Requested every 5000 prints by means of a
· whenever the vertical banding is not acceptable · via IMOS Drystar 3000 · via IMOS Drystar 3000
macro density compensation is possible warning message on the local display (i.e. it's only semi-
anymore.
(in opposite to micro compensation in automatic, as the customer has to initiate it)..
production) due to the measurement · whenever the max. density variations of a
"maximum density test film" are > 0.2 O.D. · Additionally, the user is able to perform a manual calibration.
resolution of about 5 pixels.
536110AI.CDR
· The automatic calibration cycle can only be altered or

switched off via NVF parameter.
Maximum density Set the Dmax of the printer to its default · With SW REL. 1.7X: After insertion of a new film · via local keypad · via IMOS Drystar 3000 · In SW Rel. 1.9X the Dmax calibration is combined with
(default = 3.0 O.D.). The lowest density batch (new emulsion number) when the Dmax of sensito calibration,. The target Dmax is 3.1.
value of a test film has to be entered. 3.0 O.D. cannot be reached after 5 films · In SW Rel. 1.9X it still can be performed via IMOS Drystar
The printer will automatically correct its · With SW REL. 1.7X: Before every film sensito 3000, it is however not required anymore.
thermal energy to reach Dmax = 3.0. calibration.
It also can be used for calibration of
536166AP.CDR
opaque film (no internal densitometer

functionality available for opaque)
Film Sensito * To measure the film sensitometry and · Whenever a new filmbatch was inserted · via local keypad · via local keypad · In SW Rel. 1.9X the sensitometry is automatically initiated
to use these values for internal after insertion of a new film package. This can be de-
· via IMOS Drystar 3000 · via IMOS Drystar 3000
reference, so that the printer behaves activated at the local display or via NVF parameter.
linear regarding density reproduction.
· In SW Rel. 1.9X, in case the reached Dmax level after a film
sensito calibration is below the target Dmax
(target Dmax = 3.10), a warning message is displayed
536110AE.CDR
'Dmax= X.YZ'. In this case a new film sensito calibration is

recommended. In case the target Dmax cannot be reached,
printing can continue nevertheless.
*Note: These calibrations are made by a full width scan at about 15 mm from the bottom. Dust on the film will influence the result.
Revision 32 Type 5361 Chapter 5 / 21

4.7 Decurl Unit
Function:
· Decurl of the film.
· Heating element 450 W
· Remote temperature sensor
· Temperature = 90°C
Adjustments: none
Decurl Temperature Control Principle:
Chapter 5 / 22 Type 5361 Revision 32

5 Hardware overview
5.1 Overall Hardware Model
Description: The hardware components can be split up in

• VME BUS and
• ROCAN Bus.
The Gemini CPU is the main CPU. The BER interface, located on the Gemini CPU is the interface
between VME Bus and ROCAN Bus.
The VME interfaces are responsible for image acquisition (VSI / MFRI) and image processing (COS).
The ROCAN interfaces are responsible for the filmrun.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 23

5.2 VME Bus
5.2.1 Introduction
• Versa Module Eurocard Bus • Widely used in industrial, military, industrial
• 32 bit BUS applications
• Developed by Motorola, Signetics, Mostek and • Supply voltage: 5 V Boards
Thompson CSF
5.2.2 VME BUS Overview
Board Description
Gemini CPU board • 68040 microprocessor, 25 MHz
• Up to 128MB RAM (32 MB default)
• Real time clock
• SCSI bus interface
• VME bus controller
• Socket for 2 nd 68040 microprocessor
• NIP board installed by default
NIP Neuron Image • Gemini CPU plug-on board
Processor. Image • Performs the image scaling (reduction / magnification)
Interpolation
BER Basic Ethernet and • Gemini CPU plug-on board
ROCAN Interface • drives internal hard disk 2 Gbyte
• drives external floppy
• drives external ethernet
• has the function of the rocan interface to the VME
• drives external serial port (2x)
RAM 24MB-DRAM- • Gemini CPU plug-on board
Section 5 / 24 Type 5361 09.01.00

Memory • Keeps the program

• Buffer between image interface an harddisk
COS1 Compensation • Performs the compensations for the TH
and Superslicing. Cable connections:
Compensation for TH
− VME interface (backplane) → COS1
− COS1 50 pins flatcable →AIC1
− AIC1 64 pin flatcable →TH
VSI Video Synapsis • AFR converts fiber optical (analog) data to analog data
Interface with SWB2 • SWB multiplexes up to 4 analog sources (e.g. 3 x color + 1 b&w) to the
SWB2 Switchboard2. VSI
and AFR Analog Fibre
Receiver • The VSI converts the analog date to raw, digital image data
• The VSI is a selfadjusting video interface
MFRI Multi format • Captures digital images and converts them to raw, digital image data
receiver interface • Has a built in RS422 interface for host control connection
according to 3M Specs
SCN2 Serial control • Interface for host control connection.
interface (node) RS232 / • RS232 used for connections up to 18 m
RS422. Host control
interface. • RS422 used for distances up to 1000 m
GPCI Generic Parallel • Interface for host control connection.
Control Interface. Host • By a host specific EPROM the host control signals are converted to
control interface. APIP
MAU2 Media access • Ethernet interface
unit. Part2 of Ethernet • Jumper setting necessary to switch from 10B2 connection to twisted
Interface (BER!) pair.
Backplane • VME interconnection board
• Distributes the 5V to the different VME boards
BIO3* • Global wiring board for optional interfaces: (SCN, GPCI, MAU)
Basic Input / Output • VME fan control, shut down when temp 50° C (warning when 45°C)
• Reset logic for rocan interface
• Power supply remote voltage control thermal head
• Power supply remote voltage decurl unit
Power supply* • Switch mode power supply
• Autorange 110 - 240 V / 50 - 60 Hz
• Output voltages: +5V / 36 A; +12 V / 4A; -12V / 2A; +24V / 6A; 60V /
400 W (decurl), Vth from 17 till 22 V / 25 A max; 8,5V / 2A (ext. keypad
+ ROCAN)
DTS* • Contains thermal sensor to measure temperature around drum and
VME rack. Two of these boards built in altogether.
*These boards cannot be assigned to the VME Bus explicitely. They are part of the ROCAN Bus, too.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 25

5.3 ROCAN bus
5.3.1 Introduction
ROCAN = ROAM (AGFA R&D Department) Controller Area Network
General Purpose: Data communication in distributed systems
CAN technical aspects:
• max. speed 1MBs/40m
• Mail oriented protocol: Every node sends and receives mails. Mails can have Priorities.
• Multimaster: Every node is a bus master.
• max. dataframe=8byte
• Systemwide data consistency
• Applications: Production, cars, buildings, engines
5.3.2 Boards
PMC1
BIO3
KEY3
Power
to VME
BER 53615037.cdr
MDM1 DSH1 AIC1
Board Description
PMC1 Precision Motor • Drum motor control, optical position encoder, quadrature decoding,
Control Board calibration, compensation of gear ration
• Decurl motor control, decurl temperature control, active/passive
protection, decurl heater element control through power supply
• Pick up motor control, input feeder control
• Sheet take over motor control, sheet alignment solenoid
• Vertical alignment motor
• Cover locking solenoid
• Thermal head fan control, cooling
• Thermal head position control, home, print, preprint
• Al input sensors, paper position, empty cassette
• 3 external user keypads
• Safety circuit, cover switch, decurl overtemperature switch
Section 5 / 26 Type 5361 09.01.00

KEY3 Internal Keypad • LCD display with LED backlight

• 4 lines, 20 characters/line
• Remote power on/off switch standby
• 4 cursors
• 4 control keys (ESC, ENTER, ONLINE, UNLOCK)
• 3 yellow LED's
• 1 green power on LED
• buzzer
AIC1 Analog Interface with • Thermal head voltage control, Vth measurement
ROCAN • Thermal head heatsink temperature sensors (5x) reading
• thermal head resistance measurement
• Drum environment temperature measurement
• Data interface between COS and TH. Converts differential data to
single ended. Data multiplexing.
MDM1 Macrodensitometer • DSH board: lamp control, light measurement system (integrator),
with DSH1. interface with MDM board
• MDM board: Stepper motor control, AD converter, ROCAN bus
interface
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 27

5.4 Harddisk / Print queue
5.4.1 Organization of the harddisk
5.4.2 Organization of the print queue
The organization of the print queue works with the FIFO principle: first job in the queue is the first job
out. In a network, every destination has its own queue. In the queue there are always several output
jobs activated at the same time. The queue is located on the F: partition.
Job status
P Defines printable jobs that are: ready for printing or
currently printed
W Stands for warning which means that the respective output station is not ready, e.g. because of
wrong setting. The job can be converted into P jobs as soon as the output is ready.
E Means that there was an error during the processing. The job cannot be completed. The data is
lost and can be deleted.
R Means that this is a remote job, sent via ethernet from another user. This job can only be deleted
from the user it was sent from.
Emergency (+)
Normally, films are always added to the end of a queue waiting for the output. If there is an
emergency film which requires immediate exposure of a film, this can be moved up to the first
position of the queue by pressing the emergency key on the keypad. Further emergency films are
positioned behind the former emergency film. The active jobs in the queue, (P-jobs) however, remain
active and will be processed before the first emergency film.
Job owner
- <Space> self
- 1;2;or 3 one of the other inputs (not self)
- N network
Film type
b = blue based, i. e. blue acceptor should be inserted
c = clear based, idem for clear
o= opaque, idem for opaque
Section 5 / 28 Type 5361 09.01.00

6 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
Drystar 3000 Software Architecture
PE util
TI3
MEGA options
MEGA util PE comp
DICOM
AUTOLOCK Postscript CAN
(MPS / MNR) DR3
PE util
MEGA MEGA comp T14
utilities CANTST
ABC PAT
SHERR
disk operation system BAS util
BSP (portex) toolbox
monitor (EPROM)
MON
Device Floppy Set
BAS AOS
CAD
ECU
DCM
DI30
MPS
MNR
53615042.cdr
MON (monitor) Flash EPROM on Gemini,

Disk Operation System AOS shell (Adonis Operation System). Corresponding device floppy:
Either the BAS floppy (if installing from scratch) and the AOS floppy or
only the AOS floppy.
BAS (basic) utilities. The BAS utilities run direct on MON shell. They are used to install the
Toolbox. device SW from monitor level. Corresponding device floppy: BAS. It
corresponds to a boot floppy we know from the DOS shell.
MeGa Components Software to run the system software of the controller. Corresponding
(MeGa = Medical device floppies: AOS and ECU
Gateway)
MeGa Utilities All kinds of utilities to test, service and configure the controller.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 29

Corresponding device floppies: AOS and ECU

PE Comp (Print Engine All kinds of test programs for the print engine part of the device: T3I, print
Components) and PE engine monitor (subset of T14) and ROCAN driver for ROCAN Bus. DR3
Util (Print Engine utilities) print engine component (device driver).
Corresponding device floppy: DI30
MeGa Options: DCM Optional network components. Installed separately by different IMOS
(Dicom), MPS (MeGa applications. Corresponding device floppies: IMOS DCM / IMOS MPS /
Postscript), MNR (MeGa IMOS MNR
Network Reader)
7 File structure / AOS shell

The operating system of the printer is the AOS, the Adonis Operating System. It manages and
controls the flow of data to and from the target system (internal hard disk, interface or external
device). AOS commands (see section 6.2) are similar to DOS commands.
The AOS provides several layers of software which the printer application software can use to
interact with the underlying hardware.
The printer system software uses different file types: 1. Program files; *.PRG
2. Name Value Files; NVF
3. Log files; *.log
4. Batch program files; *.BAT
a) Program files
Program files with the extension ".PRG" on the C:\ partition are responsible for the functional
sequence in the application software, they include also the default settings for the application. The
program file works together with the NVF parameters.
b) Name Value Files
The so-called Name Value Files (NVF) are used for the adaptation of the software to the
customer's requirements and host systems. The settings in the NVF files overwrite the default or
standard settings in the program files.
Read sequence of NVF-files
Remark: The last two digits in the extension indicates the version of the NVF files. A higher
version has a higher priority this means lower versions will be overruled.
Section 5 / 30 Type 5361 09.01.00

Example for read sequence
c) Log files (on D:\Partition)

The system software writes a logbook, which is called the AOS.LOG. During operation a lot of
status messages are written into the logbook. The current log file contains e.g. error codes, and
further detailed information for the research and development department (R&D). The AOS log
file is a ring buffer (first in first out) with a size of approx. 2 MB. The 2 MB are sufficient for
approx. 10 minutes protocol logging. The AOS.log is a binary file and cannot be read by an
editor. The translation between the binary AOS log file and a readable text file is made via REM
(Record Manager). In the REM several filters can be used to filter out special messages of the
AOS log file. During a system startup D:\AOS:LOG is crunched into D:\*.SES files (maximum 6
files).
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 31

d) Batch program files

Batch program files on the C:\partition are unformatted text files containing AOS commands.
They always have the file extension .BAT. The most important batch file is the AUTOEXEC.BAT
which defines special tasks by programs that should be automatically executed during a system
startup.
The execution of the autoexec.bat process can be cancelled by pressing any key
immediately after the message "AOS started" at the boot screen (terminal emulation). By
stopping the system after the AOS shell started, i.e. by not executing the autoexec.bat, no
actions are performed anymore. The system is halted. The C: partition is not write protected. No
selfreset will be made. No bus crash caused by wrong configuration parameter can occur.
Not to execute the autoexec.bat is necessary for:
• crunching the AOS logfile
• not to execute the selfreset command in case of a bus error
• to format F: partition
8 Application
8.1 Overview of all steps of image processing
8.2 Taste look up table. Combination with Sensolut

The advantage of digital imaging is that every pixel grey level can be manipulated electronically to a
desired value. This is very useful because the human eye reacts differently to the various density
differences. For example, the eye is able to see density differences if the density of the background is
very low. The other way round, the eye is not very sensitive for density differences if the density of
the background is very high.
One result of this fact is the Kanamori taste look up table (LUT). Kanamori determined a correction
curve by experiments. The curve, that is combined with the Sens-o-LUT, to implement this effect, is
called "Kanamori". It is because it adapts the appearance of the image to the "taste" of the eye. The
Kanamori taste LUT is one of several possible taste look up tables. Other supported taste LUT's are:
– "linear", i.e. no transformation
– "Kanamori like", i.e. similar to Kanamori, but to alter with a sub ID
– "OEM defined", i.e. something "hand-crafted"
The sensitometric curve is stored in the CPU. The controller sends for every image the Taste-LUT.
The combination between Sens-o-LUT and Taste-LUT is made in the CPU.
How the combination of the Taste-LUT with the Sens-o-LUT in the CPU works is shown in the
following diagram:
Section 5 / 32 Type 5361 09.01.00

Combination Taste-LUT and

Sens-o-LUT
The whole combination is done mathematically by linking the two LUT's. But in principle it works like
this: the controller sends a grey level for a pixel (e.g. 255). By the Kanamori-Taste-LUT the density
belonging to this grey level, (e.g. 2.8) is allocated. With this allocated grey level one looks into the
Sens-o-LUT. In the Sens-o-LUT a grey level of 2.8 means a special value for controlling the thermal
head. With this value the thermal head gets controlled for printing.
This means that in the LUT an allocation or output table is stored, that allocates the pixel grey level to
the corresponding thermal head-control value.
As Dmax for this output table the lowest Dmax (defined in MNU) and as Dmin the highest Dmin (also
defined in MNU) is taken.
8.3 Window level
Window / Level only
should be used in some
rare exceptions:
It is only adviced to use it
in case of an analog
input, where text has a
higher amplitude than the
image information.
Attention: With
Window/Level you cut off
image information and
you introduce
"landscaping" (also called
"contouring").
Example: 0 is white. 255 is black. Level 20 / Window 80 means cutting off 20% of the white side
of the image. Level 20 / Window 60 means cutting off 20% of the white and 20% of the black
side.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 33

8.4 INTERPOLATION
If a host system sends e.g. an image with pixel matrix 512x512 pixels and this image should be
printed on a 14x17" film of a printer with pixel matrix 4256x5174, the image has to be magnified by
approximately factor 8.
This means that in this special case to every existing pixel, 7 new ones are created on the film.
The calculation of the grey level of these new pixels is called interpolation. Base of the calculation is
always the grey level of the surrounding pixels.
The printer interpolates via the NIP board. The kind of interpolation, also called "magnification type" is
determined by the menu parameter "magnif_type".
The number representing the magnification type correlates to the number of pixels taken into account
for calculation (see table below).
Four different interpolation methods can be distinguished:
Interpolation MNU-NVF: Number of pixels taken in account for

magnif_type calculation in the calculation matrix
Replication 0 20 x 20 = 1
Linear 1 21 x 21 = 4
Cubic Spline 2 22 x 22 = 16
Cubic Spline High Resolution 2 22 x 22 = 16
The following examples explain the different interpolation methods.

Replication
Replication (replica = exact copy) is the easiest interpolation algorithm. It is also known under
"nearest neighbour algorithm", where each pixel is given the value of the sample which is closest to it.
The image is thereby convolved with a rectangle function.
The impression is very sharp but "pixely".
Interpolation method "replication" is a perfect method to judge video images during installation.
Interpolation method replication

0 and 255 are the original pixels.
0' and 255' are the new calculated
pixels.
Linear
A slightly more complicated function to calculate is the linear interpolation algorithm. Linear
interpolation amounts to convolution of the sampled image by a triangle function.
Linear interpolation is the smoothest interpolation method.
Section 5 / 34 Type 5361 09.01.00

Interpolation method linear

Pixels with "'" are the new calculated
pixels.
Cubic Spline
Cubic interpolation is a third order function:
f (x) = ax3 + abx2 + acx + da.
Cubic interpolation
Pixels with "'" are the new calculated
pixels.
Depending on the factor "a" the impression could be between quite sharp (not as sharp as replicate)
and very smooth (not as smooth as linear).
Factor a is determined by smooth factor in MNU. See table of different smooth factors below.
Cubic Spline High Resolution
Cubic spline high resolution is a special kind of cubic interpolation. It is characterized by a high
sharpness with very clear characters.
Cubic spline high resolution is chosen with a smooth factor between 137 and 150.
The following smooth factors are defined:
Smooth factor Meaning Comment
0 cubic B-spline Very smooth. But less smooth than
linear
137 … 150 cubic spline high 137 means very sharp
resolution 150 means smooth
256 … 299 cubic bell spline 256 means sharp
299 means smooth
In general:
– Use magnification type 0 (replicate) for checking video images
– Use magnification type 2 (cubic) with smooth factor 256 … 299 for noisy CT images
– Use magnification type 2 (cubic) with smooth factor 137 ... 150 for all other applications.
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 35

8.5 Printing Areas

LR3300 Drystar 3000
DPI (pixels/mm) 314.96 (12.4) 319.899 (12.59446)
film format (inch) 14” x 17” 14” x 14” 14” x 11” 14” x 17” 14” x 14” 14” x 11”
film size (mm) 354 x 429.7 354 x354 354 x 278.6 354 x 429.7 354 x 354 354 x 278.6
film size (pixels) 4409 x 5354 4409 x 4409 4409 x 3465 4458 x 5412 4458 x 4458 4458 x 3509
borders - - - transparent transparent transparent
top pixels (mm) - - - 57 (4.526) 57 (4.526) 47 (3.732)
bottom pixels - - - 57 (4.526) 57 (4.526) 44 (3.494)
(mm)
left pixels (mm) - - - 53 (4.208) 53 (4.208) 53 (4.208)
right pixels (mm) - - - 53 (4.208) 53 (4.208) 53 (4.208)
printable area of 4409 x 5354 4409 x 4409 4409 x 3465 4352 x 5298 4352 x 4344 4352 x 3418
writing syst.
borders black black black - - -
top pixels (mm) 100 (8.065) 100 (8.065) 100 (8.065) - - -
bottom pixels 80 (6.452) 77 (6.210) 65 (5.242) - - -
(mm)
left pixels (mm) 76 (6.129) 76 (6.129) 76 (6.129) - - -
right pixels (mm) 77 (6.210) 77 (6.210) 77 (6.210) - - -
area for controller 4256 x 5174 4256 x 4232 4256 x 3300 4352 x 5298 4352 x 4344 4352 x 3418
none diagnostic - - - black black black
band
top pixels (mm) - - - 124 (9.846) 112 (8.893) 118 (9.369)
calibration - - - black black black
borders (left &
right)
left pixels (mm) - - - 48 (3.811) 48 (3.811) 48 (3.811)
right pixels (mm) - - - 48 (3.811) 48 (3.811) 48 (3.811)
layout area for 4256 x 5174 4256 x 4232 4256 x 3300 4256 x 5174 4256 x 4232 4256 x 3300
controller
none diagnostic black black black - - -
band
top pixels (mm) 50 (4.032) 50 (4.032) 50 (4.032) - - -
bottom pixels 50 (4.032) 50 (4.032) 50 (4.032) - - -
(mm)
final diagnostic 4256 x 5074 4256 x 4132 4256 x 3200 4256 x 5174 4256 x 4226 4256 x 3300
image area
Section 5 / 36 Type 5361 09.01.00

9 Networking: General Introduction
Meanwhile we have a lot of different configurators for configuration of the different pins of the
MG3000, Drystar 2000 or Drystar 3000.
What is a pin? A pin is an input or an output, locally or via network. It is a piece of software, that can
be connected to a piece of hardware, e.g. a VSI interface or a network interface (BEN + MAU).
Theoretically, from software point of view, we could configure pin 1 to 10 as inputs, pin 11 to 20 as
outputs (always only pin 11 is used!) and pin 21 to 30 as network input/output.
The max. number of inputs is limited to 9.
Input Output
1 11
2 12
Drystar 3000
3 13
21 22 23 24
53615050.cdr
Network
Pin Assignments on MG3000 / Drystar 2000 / Drystar 3000
**Drystar 3000 Input Pin Assignmet

Pin # Used for...
1 VSI or MFRI Interface
4 Local Keypad (TIF driver)
Pins 1 to 4 as well as 11 and 21 (=APIP by convention) are configured by MeGaCon

Pins 22 to 30 are configured via the IMOS DICOM, MPS or TMX configurator.
***MPS = MeGa Postscript

****TMX = Tiff Mail Extension
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 37

Which image formats and protocols can be configured with the different configurators shows the next
sketch:
File Formats and Protocols for Image Transmission
lp / lpr / ftp / pap / SMTP Postscript / TIFF / Sunraster
APIP APIP DICOM DICOM
MG
Drystar
3000 DICOM Workstation
Modality
53615052.cdr
The file formats and network protocols for image transmission
The following table shall give an overview, which configurator is used for what network image format
and network protocol:
Configurator Pin Network Image Format
Protocol
MeGaCON 21 APIP APIP
DICOM 22 to 27 DICOM DICOM
MPS with MPSXXX.ZIP 22 to 27 LP/LPR AGFA Postscript or
floppy FTP Picker Postscript
PAP
MPS with MNRXXX.ZIP 22 to 27 FTP TIFF or
floppy LPR SUNRASTER
TMX 22 to 27 SMTP TIFF
All configurators except MeGaCON are explained later on. For a description of MeGaCON see the
corresponding IMOS MeGaCON Windows Helpfile.
Section 5 / 38 Type 5361 09.01.00

9.1 APIP
APIP (Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol) is the standard
APIP network language. It is used for communication
between AGFA devices via network. It is normally
configured on pin 21 (see drawing).
MG
Drystar
3000
53615053.cdr
9.2 DICOM
9.2.1 Introduction
DICOM is an abbreviation for ,,DIGITAL IMAGING AND COMMUNICATION IN MEDICINE". Since 1983 the
American College of Radiology- ACR- and the National Electrical Manufacturers- NEMA- try to create
a standard for transmission of photos and added information in-between digital systems. AGFA is an
active member of this team. The third version of this standard is called DICOM.
Difference between user and provider of a certain function

Function Ability as user Ability as provider
Query Call up a database Ability to receive image data
from an external system
Retrieve External call up of the own database At a query it is possible to
transmit image data to an
external system
Storage Transmission of image data to an external Storage of image data on a
system for storage specified database
Print Transmission of picture data to an external Provides for others to print out
Management system to print out on the own or associated
system
DICOM functions are devided in different so called "service functions".

The most important are →to store
→to print
A DICOM device can be a "provider" or a "user" of a function.

In more understandable words: A user is e.g. a DICOM CT sending images and print related info (or
in other words: a film session) to the DICOM print provider MG3000. This means the MG3000 is a
"print provider".
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 39

9.2.2 DICOM in Combination with APIP

The DICOM configurator is able to configure pin 22 to 25 for DICOM. For configuration of APIP,
MeGaCON is used.
APIP DICOM
MG
Drystar
3000 DICOM
Modality
53615056.cdr
APIP and DICOM in a network
APIP DICOM
MG
Drystar
3000 DICOM DICOM DICOM
Modality 1 Modality 2 Modality 3
53615058.cdr
Three DICOM modalities in a network.
Section 5 / 40 Type 5361 09.01.00

Difference between one or more DICOM PMS Associations. Example: 3 DICOM Modalities
connected to a Drystar 3000
One Association 2 Associations for 3 3 Associations for 3
for all 3 DICOM DICOM PMS DICOM PMS
PMS Modalities Modlities Modlities
Which pins are 22 22 and 23 22 and 23 and 24
used:
Advantage Less memory At least 2 of 3 All 3 modalities can
usage in Drystar modalities can have have access to the
3000 access to the Drystar Drystar 3000
3000 whenever it is whenever it is needed.
needed.
Disadvantage If one modality More memory usage in Even more memory
makes an Drystar 3000 usage in Drystar 3000
association, the
others have to wait
until it is released
Which E:\acq5.......PMS22 E:\acq5.......PMS22 E:\acq5.......PMS22
subdirectories E:\acq6.......PMS23 E:\acq6.......PMS23
are created on
E:\acq7.......PMS24
E:
Input Output Input Output Input Output
Sketch 1 11 1 11 1 11
2 Drystar 3000 2 Drystar3000 2 Drystar3000
3 3 3
4 4 4
APIP (ETH) DICOM (PMS) 1 Association DICOM (PMS) 2 Associations APIP (ETH)
APIP (ETH)
21 22
53615a59.cdr
53615059.cdr 21 22 23 53615b59.cdr 21 22 23 24
Network Network DICOM (PMS) 3 Associations
Network
09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 5 / 41

9.3 Postscript
The postscript configurator is able to configure postscript, TIFF or Sunraster image format as network
input. As network protocol lp/lpr, ftp or pap can be used.
File Formats and Protocols for Image Transmission

Postscript / TIFF / Sunraster
lp / lpr / ftp / pap / SMTP
Drystar
3000 Workstation
53615a52.cdr
Depending on the floppy, that is inserted in the PC or device floppy drive, different network modules
can be installed:
IMOS
MG3000
MPS2.33
a:\winstall
1/2
Attention:
SW Versions are subject
to change.
See DIGIMAIL* for updates.
*DIGIMAIL = Bulletin Board MG3000.
Modem no. +49 89 6207 7777
MPS32935
MG3000 MNR32925
MG3000
MPS32941
1/1 1/1
Image Formats:
AGFA + Picker Postscript Image Formats: TIFF + Sunraster
Protocols: PAP + lp/lpr + FTP Protocols: lp/lpr + FTP
53615a63.cdr
For more information see the corresponding connectivity release document, available on DIGIMAIL.
Section 5 / 42 Type 5361 09.01.00

DD+DIS084.97E Repair and Service
Safety Instructions
Section 6 - 1
List of contents
1 Safety Instructions ..............................................................................................................1

1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Safety instruction regarding the decurl unit ............................................................................. 1
1.3 Safety instructions regarding the power supply....................................................................... 2
1.4 Instructions for handling PCBs.................................................................................................. 2
1.5 Supplementary protective earth connector............................................................................... 3
1.6 EMI/EMC measures ..................................................................................................................... 3

1.6.1 Ground potential differences ...................................................................................................... 4
1.6.2 Intergrounding ............................................................................................................................ 4
1.7 Service PC connection................................................................................................................ 5
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.1 / I

Safety Instructions
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Introduction
When servicing the printer or carrying out a replacement, the following points should be taken
into account:
• Always make sure that the printer is switched off and that the power plug has been
disconnected from the wall outlet. Before switching off the printer, make sure that no
images are being acquired or processed.
• When opening the top cover, be aware of the high temperature of the de-curl unit.
• The printer should not be operated when any parts have been removed. In case you have
to operate the printer while covers are removed, take care that your clothing isn't caught
by one of the revolving parts.
• Make sure to use the original screws during re-assembly.
• Electrical components such as fuses should only be replaced by components of the same
size and ratings.
1.2 Safety instruction regarding the decurl unit

The decurl unit gets extremely hot during the operation. Avoid contact, there is a risk of
burning. Watch the corresponding label on the decurl unit.
536161AM.CDR
Figure 1
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.1 / 1

Repair and Service DD+DIS084.97E
Safety instructions
1.3 Safety instructions regarding the power supply
Figure 2
The machine has three safety switches to ensure the customer's safety. They are located on
the covers that the customer can open. (top cover, film feeder cover, thermal head cover).
The voltage for all motors (execept the decurl motor M2 and the sheet take over motor M5),
clutches, TH and de-curl unit is interrupted if one of the covers is opened.
For service purposes this function can be overridden with a service key.
However, be careful since there is a risk of injury by moving mechanical
parts or electrical parts.
Remove the service key before closing the printer. The actuator of the cover switch may be
destroyed.
1.4 Instructions for handling PCBs

When handling PCBs the following points should be taken into account:
• Always unplug the power plug from the wall outlet before disconnecting or connecting
print jacks from or to the PCBs.
• PCBs must never be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Follow the standard ESD (electrostatic discharge) precautions when handling PCBs or
other internal components.
• PCBs should always be kept in their protective bags.
• When it is absolutely necessary to remove a PCB from its protective bag, it should
be protected against static electricity by placing it on its conductive mat.
• Never touch the pins of an IC with bare hands.
• When it is necessary to touch ICs or other electrical components on a PCB, always
ground your body by wearing a wrist strap (grounding tape) which is connected to e.g. the
intergrounding connection.
Section 6.1 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Safety Instructions
• Right after removal of an electrical component, place it into an anti static bag. Do not walk
across a carpet or vinyl floor carrying an unprotected board.
• Handle PCBs by their edges only. Never touch the pins of the ICs or the conductive
pattern of the PCB.
• Do not check ICs directly using a multimeter. Always check the connectors on the
corresponding PCB.
• Never create a closed circuit across the pins of an IC by using a metal tool.
1.5 Supplementary protective earth connector

In general a supplementary protective earth cable is NOT required for the printer to fullfill
IEC601, even if is positioned in the patient room. There are however 2 exeptions:
1. The printer is located in the patient room AND it is connected to a non IEC601 compliant
device.
2. The printer is located in the patient room and an intergrounding cable is applied.
Only in these two cases it is neccessary to apply the supplementary protective earth cable to
the connector found on the back of the printer.
2
(The supplementary earth cable is a green/yellow cable of 4mm and NOT included in the
standard delivery.)
(EN 60 601-1)
Figure 3
1.6 EMI/EMC measures

Before a service intervention is started an inventory should be made of all connections from
the outside to the printer, especially inter grounding and earth connections. Before leaving, the
service engineer should verify that all those connections are established again in their original
situation. Otherwise, the proper operation of the printer and other equipment in its
neighbourhood can be disturbed.
EMI = Electromagnetic interference
EMC = Electromagnetic compatibility
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.1 / 3

Safety instructions
1.6.1 Ground potential differences

We recommend not to install a printer at a mains where the ground potential difference
between printer and host is higher than 5 Volts (Make sure that the host system console is
switched on during measurement):
Figure 4
If higher than 5 Volts try to use the same mains for both the host system and the printer. (See
also 1.6.2 Intergrounding next page)
1.6.2 Intergrounding
If quality problems occur, during the transmission of image data from the host , which can
possibly be caused by potential differences of the power supply, an intergrounding cable might
help to solve the problems. The cable should be connected at the intergrounding bolt of the
printer.The cable must be positioned very closed to the image data cables to avoid a possible
ground loop.
If the intergrounding cable is used, it is mandatory to use the supplementary protective
earth cable to keep IEC601 compliance.
Figure 5
Section 6.1 / 4 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Safety Instructions
1.7 Service PC connection

When a non complying EN60601-1 equipment (as most of the service PC, connected to the
mains are) is connected to the printer, the latter is not complying anymore with the safety
standard. If the service PC is not connected to the mains but is powered by its own (low
voltage) battery the printer is still complying with the safety standard.
So if you are servicing the printer with a service PC it is recommended that it is powered by its
battery. If this is not possible make sure that nobody (patient, medical staff) touches the host
device if it is still connected to the printer (except for the hosts that are connected via fiber
optic link).
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.1 / 5

Tools
Section 6 - 2
List of contents
1 TOOLS ......................................................................................................................1
1.1 Minimum service PC requirements....................................................................................... 1
1.2 Recommended service PC requirements ............................................................................. 2
2 SERVICE SOFTWARE.................................................................................................3
2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Printer software and service software.................................................................................. 3
2.3 How to install and start the service program......................................................................... 4
2.3.1 Install the printer service tools on the service PC .............................................................. 4
2.4 Imos file structure................................................................................................................. 5
2.5 Connecting the service PC to the printer .............................................................................. 5
2.6 Start of the service program ................................................................................................. 6
2.7 Working on AOS shell level.................................................................................................. 6
2.7.1 Important Comands on AOS shell level............................................................................. 6
2.8 Modem connection: Remote service .................................................................................. 11
2.8.1 Basic remote configuration.............................................................................................. 11
2.8.2 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 11
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / I

Tools
1 TOOLS
In addition to the conventional service tools which every technician has in his toolbox, the
following tools are required to service the printer:
Tool Spare part number Usage

Service PC (see 1.1 and 1.2) see „PC requirements“ below For set up and service of the printer.
Serial interface cable RS 232 CM+7.9820.0141.0 For connection of the service PC to

the printer (modem).
Service software CM+7.9997.0964.0 on floppies * For servicing the printer (installation,

calibrations, etc.)
RS232 adapter plug 9 pin/25 pin CM+9.9999.0955.0 For connection of the service PC in
case it has a 9-pin serial interface
connector.
RS232 Gender changer m/m; f/f Commercially available –
Wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0 To be worn when handling PCB's and

other internal components (ESD
precautions).
Service key for the cover-switch CM+9.9999.0907.0 For functional checks
"T"-connector 75 Ω CM+7.8966.0559.0 For ext. synch. termination and scope
measurements.
Termination-resistor 75 Ω CM+7.8966.0560.0 For termination of the video outputs.
Alcohol CM+9.9999.9254.0 For cleaning TH
*Consult the latest Newsletter, DIS-Info or DIGIMAIL for the recent release.
1.1 Minimum service PC requirements
The following absolute minimum configuration of the PC. Service will take a long time:
Type : Laptop
Display : EGA/VGA compatible
Mouse : Built in
CPU : At least 80486, 25 MHz
RAM : At least 8 Mbytes
Hard Disk : At least 120 Mbytes
Floppy drive : 3,5 " - 1,44 Mbytes
Serial port : COM1 or COM2 available
Operating system : DOS 6.0 or higher
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / 1

Tools
1.2 Recommended service PC requirements

The following configuration of the PC is recommended if you get a new system:
Type : Laptop
Display : Colour LCD
Mouse : Yes
CPU : At least Pentium 133 MHz
RAM : At least 16 Mbytes
Hard Disk : At least 1 Gbytes
Drive : Floppy drive 3,5 "; CD ROM drive
Serial port : 2x RS232, 1 COM port
Operating system : DOS 6.0 or higher
Section 6.2 / 2 Drystar 3000 17.03.98

Tools
2 SERVICE SOFTWARE
2.1 Introduction
The software is divided in three parts. The first set contains the application software for the
printer. The second set consists of the service software for the service PC. The third set is an
optional set which contains the DICOM software (option) that will be partially installed on the
PC and partially on the printer.
2.2 Printer software and service software
Example:
Printer / Application software Service software
0
300
TAR
YS
DR
Hard
disk IMOS Start
3.4.7
OEMMGxxx
IMOS
Drystar MG3000
MEGACON
IMOS
MGC01910
IMOS
MG3000
DICOM
IMOS
MG3000
MPS
a:\winstall a:\winstall a:\winstall a:\winstall a:\winstall
1/1 1/2 1/2 1/2
1/2
only for network

IMOS
MG3000
MEGACON
OEM32910
a:\winstall
1/2
or CD-ROM
IMOS
MG3000
MEGACON
Database
SDK 2.10
Insert when promted 536162AM.CDR
by OEM 1/2
536162BM.CDR
Drystar
MG3000 Drystar
MG3000 Figure 2
Release 1.0 Release 1.1
BAS Upgrade
1/5 1/1
Figure 1
Example:
Application software (basic floppy set)
disk number label type remark

1/5 BAS3 2P05 * printer basic SW
2/5 AOS 32925 * printer ADONIS operating system
3/5 CAD 32926 * printer compact acquisition device
4/5 ECU 32927 * printer embedded composition unit
5/5 DI30 1P24 * printer print engine SW
* Figures are subject to change
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / 3

Tools
Service tools
disk number label type remark

1/2, 2/2 START 3.4.3 * PC IMOS start application
1/2, 2/2 DI3S0P03 * PC DI3000 Service tools
1/4, 2/4 MGC01836 * PC MEGACON (MEGA CONfigurator)
3/4, 4/4 OEM31833 * PC OEM database, ODBC drivers
* Figure are subject to change.
Software options
1 DICOM software
2 MPS (Postscript)
3 MNR (Network Reader)
4 TMX (TIFF Mail Extension)
2.3 How to install and start the service program
2.3.1 Install the printer service tools on the service PC

• Insert floppy IMOS Start rev. xxx into the floppy drive of your service PC or
Insert CD-ROM
• Execute command a:\winstall or d:\winstall in case drive d. is the CD ROM drive
and follow the instructions
The following four steps are not necessary if you install via CD ROM
• Insert floppy IMOS Drystar 3000 into the floppy drive of your service PC
• Execute command a:\winstall and follow the instructions
• Insert floppy IMOS Megacon MGCxxxxx into your floppy drive of your service PC
• Execute command a:\winstall and follow the instructions
• Following screen will appear after succesfull installation:
Section 6.2 / 4 Drystar 3000 17.03.98

Tools
2.4 Imos file structure
2.5 Connecting the service PC to the printer

• Switch off the service PC and the
printer.
• Connect the female 9 pin end of the
serial interface cable to COM1 of the
service PC.
• Connect the male 25-pin end of the
interface cable to the service PC
connector (1) at the rear of the printer
(see section 2).
Note: When you connect a PC to the
printer, the printer is not IEC 601
anymore because there is no
galvanic separation in the PC
interface.
You should verify that the printer is
disconnected from all other
equipment or verify that all
equipment involved is removed from
the direct environment of the
patient.
Use 25 male/ 9 female - pole-adapter (spare part number see page 1) to
connect an unique 25-pole cable to the service PC side or use a 25-pole
mal to 9 pole female cable. Otherwise apply a gender-changer, to adapt
male and female plugs.
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / 5

Tools
2.6 Start of the service program

• Click on one of these icons for following function
Option
IMOS start menu IMOS DryStar 3000 IMOS MEGACON IMOS DICOM
and Post Script
• establish a modem • establish a direct • configures the input, • configures DICOM
connection connection to the output and network and Post Script
printer for the printer with
RS232 cable between
PC and printer (Direct
configuration)
• provide a setup utility • switches • configures the input,
for COM port, modem automatically to output and network
and tools Megacon for the printer without
(Configuration) RS232 cable between
PC and printer
(Offline configuration)
• providing a network • shows error
device list for messages, VME
connecting to any diagram, help (Offline
device in a network function)
2.7 Working on AOS shell level

How to get on AOS shell level: Connect service PC. Press "xt" in directory C:\ or
function Terminal
How to leave AOS shell level: Press Alt + X or Ctrl + V
Warning: The commands on AOS shell level are powerful, make sure you know what you
are doing. You get the following overview also by pressing "he" like help on AOS
shell level:
2.7.1 Important Comands on AOS shell level

For additional AOS shell comands please enter DRYSTAR_C:\> he
AOS shell commands
CD Change directory FIND FIND file
CHDIR Change directory HE Display help info
CHKDSK Check disk MON RES Execute moitor command
COPY Copy file MOUNT Mount the specific volume
DEL*ETE Delete a file PROTECT Protect volume
DIR Show directory REN*AME Rename a file
DISMOUNT Dismount volume TYPE Show file
EJECT Eject floppy UNPROTect Unprotect the C volume
EXIT Exit from shell XT Transfer data
Section 6.2 / 6 Drystar 3000 17.03.98

Tools
Utilities on AOS shell:
AP Switch to application PAF Print APIP file (2)
shell
FORMAT Format hard disk PING Send "ping" to host (3)
FTP File transfer protocol (1) PROT Switch to CHM protocol
LPQ Show queue REPAIR Repair hard disk
NIPTST Perform test of NIP board TELNET Terminal emulation via network
(4)
Table 1: commands on AOS shell level

commands (1) to (4) are explained on the following pages.
The most important commands are marked gray. *If the table is longer than the screen stop
with Ctrl+S.
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / 7

Tools
Explanation of specific commands:

Remark: for some commands help information is available. Type "<command> -h"
syntax may change from one SW version to another.
command (1) FTP To transmit / receive files via network
syntax ftp [inet_addr] or
ftp [hostname]
example How to start ftp
DRYSTAR_C:\> ftp MG3
---> 220 MG3 FTP server ready!
ftp> user nics
(The user name "nics" has to be used, otherwise a password will be asked
for)
---> 230 USER nics logged in.
ftp>
How to transfer e.g. the file SUNSET.TIF from the partition D: of the local
printer to the remote one, also partition D:
ftp> lcd d:\ (change local directory to d:\)
ftp> cd d:\ (change remote directory to d:\)
---> 250 CWD TO d:\
ftp> put sunset.tif (send the file to the remote station)
---> 200 PORT Command OK!
---> 150 About to open data connection.
---> 226 Closing data connection.
local: sunset.tif remote: sunset.tif
1427050 bytes sent in 11 seconds (130 Kbytes/s)
ftp>
How to transfer all TIF files from the remote station to the local one.
ftp> binary (set type of file)
---> 200 TYPE image OK!
ftp> prompt (switch off the interactive mode)
Interactive mode off.
ftp> mget *.tif (receive all tif files - mget=multiple get)
Now all the available TIF files are being transferred.
ftp>
ftp> close
---> 221 QUIT Goodbye!
ftp> q
DRYSTAR_C:\>
Section 6.2 / 8 Drystar 3000 17.03.98

Tools
command (2) paf To display APIP file

syntax paf infile -pixels
Display MG3000 APIP files with extensions:
for control files : .ctl,
for image files : .img, .gry, .red, .grn, .blu,
plain acr-nema files : .acr, .spi
example DRYSTAR_E:\ACQ1\STDY0001> paf ctl00001.ctl
STUDY HEAD
----------
no_of_images : 1
no_of_reports : 0
emergency : NO
STUDY INFO
----------
source_id : 1
dest_id : 1
study_type : 0
study_kind : 2
study_id : 1
DCG HEAD
--------
command_group_length : 282
hardcopy_par_length : 1050
no_layouts : 1
folder_do_length : 436
total_image_length : 442938
no_images : 1
next_file_index : 0
and so on...........
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / 9

Tools
command (3) ping To test communication to other network node(s)

syntax ping [inet_addr or hostname] [timeout]
host can either be an Internet address in dot notation,
or an ascii name.
example DRYSTAR_C:\> ping 192.9.200.119
192.9.200.119
192.9.200.119 is alive: time=10 ms
DRYSTAR_C:\>
Error example:
DRYSTAR_C:\> ping MG3
PING MG3 (192.9.200.120)
MG3 does not respond
DRYSTAR_C:\>
command (4) telnet
Terminal emulation via network - to log-in to another network node. Enables
to service network nodes from one place remotely. The Service PC is
connected to one MG3000 via the RS232 and can login into any other
available network node via Ethernet.
syntax telnet [inet_addr] or
telnet [hostname]
Remark: To close the network login the keys "Ctrl" + "]" have to be pressed
or "exit" has to be entered. The entry of the hostname is case sensitive.
To quit telnet press "q"
example DRYSTAR_C:\> telnet MG3
Trying 192.9.200.120 ...
Connected to MG3
Escape character is '^]'
Welcome to MG3000 Telnet server

MG3_C:\>
....
....
MG3_C:\>exit
telnet> q
DRYSTAR_C:\>
Section 6.2 / 10 Drystar 3000 17.03.98

Tools
2.8 Modem connection: Remote service
2.8.1 Basic remote configuration.
Figure 3: Basic remote service configuration:
Necessary conditions:
− Service PC with installed Service Software
− External or internal modem for the PC
− RS232 cable
− Null modem adapter
− External modem for the printer
− Two telephone lines (one for final connection, other for testing at the office)
− Printer with installed software
2.8.2 Settings
The current documentation to modem settings and settings at printer service port are
available on DIGIMAIL. (File download area MG3000. Filename modems XY.exe)
17.03.98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 6.2 / 11

Repair and Service
DD+DIS175.05E Troubleshooting
Section 6 - 3
List of contents
1 Troubleshooting: General ........................................................................... 2

2 Symptom: Printer does not start up properly............................................ 3
3 Symptom: An error message is displayed on the internal or external
display........................................................................................................... 4
4 Symptom: An error message as text is displayed on the internal
display........................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Symptom: "Remove output jam": Film jam or film running askew in the decurl
unit .............................................................................................................................5
5 Symptom: Drystar 3000 does not print. No error message is displayed. 9
6 Symptoms: Image fault...............................................................................11
6.1 Contrast and density reproduction faults ............................................................11
6.1.1 Dmin too high ...........................................................................................................12
6.1.2 Dmax too high or too low..........................................................................................12
6.1.3 Density reproduction / Optimal perceivable not okay ...............................................14
6.1.4 Contouring visible; 'Landscaping' .............................................................................16
6.2 Line artifacts in transport direction ......................................................................17
6.2.1 Dust stripes...............................................................................................................17
6.2.2 Line artifacts < 1mm .................................................................................................21
6.2.3 Line artifacts > 1mm .................................................................................................24
6.2.4 Wide bands with lower density at the left and/or right hand side of the film .............31
6.3 Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction..................................................33
6.4 Line artifacts diagonal to the transport direction................................................35
6.5 Point artifacts..........................................................................................................36
6.5.1 Pinholes....................................................................................................................36
6.5.2 Bubbles.....................................................................................................................37
6.5.3 Dust particles on the printdrum.................................................................................38
6.5.4 Dust particles in the film ...........................................................................................39
6.6 Surface artifacts .....................................................................................................40
6.7 Position of the image on the film not centered ...................................................41
7 Symptom: Hard disk doesn’t work ............................................................43
7.1 Software Installation / Configuration from Scratch.............................................43
7.1.1 Software Installation from Scratch............................................................................43
7.1.2 Configuration from Scratch.......................................................................................43
8 Troubleshooting Ethernet failures.............................................................44
9 Bus error......................................................................................................45
9.1 Bus crash caused by COS board..........................................................................45
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
Revision 40 Type 5361 Section 6.3 / I
2005-07-20 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
Troubleshooting DD+DIS175.05E
1 Troubleshooting: General
In case of troubles with the Drystar3000 we can distinguish between different symptoms.
Enclosed a list of typical symptoms that may occur
# Symptom Description Reason Refer to

1 Printer does not start up. Either nothing on the AOS shell not booted up 2
internal display or "Drystar 3000 initialisation, completely
please wait" forever (> 5 min.)
2 An error message is displayed on the internal or Problem during printer 3

external display operation: Printer SW / HW
problem.
3 An error message as text is displayed on the Problem during printer 4

internal display operation:
A user intervention is
?
ERROR Remove required.
536163XX.CDR
Output Jam
4 Drystar 3000 does not print. No error message is Either the image does not 5
displayed. get to the printer (network)
or printer configuration
mismatch
5 Image fault: Monitor at console and image Either problem of image 6

printed at Drystar3000 are different processing (Software /
Hardware) or problem of
the host system

Section 6.3 /2 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Revision 40
Agfa Company Confidential 2005-07-20
Repair and Service
2 Symptom: Printer does not start up properly

Either nothing on the internal display or
"Drystar 3000 initialisation, please wait"
forever (> 5 min.)
Reason:
AOS shell not booted up completely
Cure:
• Start IMOS Drystar3000 (If you do not get access to the Drystar 3000, the hard disk may be
defective. See section 7: Symptom: Hard disk doesn’t work
• Enter Menu „Application - Customization - Name/Value Edit“
• Look to the complete list:
• The list of different components stops somewhere before CMNXXX21 (see example)
In this example, the MFRI driver is the last one that booted up completely. Most likely the
MFRI is not jumpered correctly or a configuration mismatch exists.
⇒ General Proceeding in such a case: Check whether the VME hardware interfaces are
really installed as shown in the configuration screen. Check jumpersetting of the VME
interface.
⇒ In case the problem is originated from SW problems during SW installation or
configuration, a configuration from scratch is recommended (see section 7.1.2).

Revision 40 Type 5361 Section 6.3 / 3
Repair and Service
Note: If the NVE list stops with ARTXXX00, the reason is either, that the system is halted
(make a reset in this case) or that a VME bus crash occurred. See also section 9, Bus
error.
3 Symptom: An error message is displayed on the internal or external display
Reason:
Problem during printer operation: Printer SW / HW problem.
Cure:
• Start IMOS Drystar3000
• Select „Repair - Error Messages“ and enter the fault to get an explanation.
Note: Error messages are always created according to the "father-son" principle. I.e. there is
always a basic error creating another one and so on.
How to see the current error messages:
• They are either displayed on the local keypad or the LCD user keypad. If errors are
displayed as text, select menu 10 on the local keypad: Print Engine - Error Details to view
the corresponding error code.
Additionally, the error messages are logged in the logbook:
• Select "Logbook" in the main menu "Repair" in IMOS.
• Select „detailed“ to get the explanation of the errors, too.
Attention: Always look to the error chain. If it ends with „0000“ the error was repaired
internally.
How to get the explanation to error messages:
• Select „Error messages“ in the IMOS Drystar 3000 main menu „Repair“.

Repair and Service
4 Symptom: An error message as text is displayed on the internal display
?
ERROR Remove
536163XX.CDR
Output Jam
Reason:
Problem during printer operation: A user intervention is required.
Cure:
• First perform the action as required on the internal display (e.g. remove filmjam)
• Then select menu 10 on the local keypad „Print Engine“ - „Error Details“. Two errors will be
displayed.*
• Select „Repair“ - „Error Messages“ and enter the two faults to get an explanation. Normally
the first error message points to the problem.
• In case the problem persists after resetting the device and the following filmrun,
troubleshoot as described in the error explanation.
4.1 Symptom: "Remove output jam": Film jam or film running askew in the decurl unit
Symptom: Film runs askew through the decurl unit

or
Display "remove output jam" in combination with the error message "6C4E6
or 6C4BF" (see local keypad, menu 10, print engine - error details)
Reason 1: Loose screws or several screws missing on the decurl roller flange, (see
Figure 1 and Figure 2)
- Due to the missing screws the flange may shift and then the rollers are no
longer parallel to the film transport level.
This happens mainly in machines manufactured prior to October 1998.
Cure 1: Check, if the screws are fully tightened and if they are complete
The screws are visible after removal of the decurl heat protection cover and the
corresponding decurl side panels.
- If the screws have not been fully tightened:
• Tighten the screws:
On the left-hand side of the decurl unit the wiring of the heater must be
removed as well.
• Replace the decurl unit at the next occasion.
- If one or more screws are missing:

• Replace the decurl unit.

Repair and Service
Figure 1: left hand view (without decurl Figure 2: right hand view (without
top and side cover) decurl top and side cover)
The causes an remedies described here refer to the decurl unit with part
number CM+309911.1
The decurl unit CM+309913.0 has been introduced in year 2001 as a remedy in the
series production. (to be recognized at sticker "A309913.0")
Reason 2: Transport roller shaft of the film take over no longer parallel.
- If the shaft is not parallel, the film may enter the decurl unit at an angle or
even fail to reach the decurl unit.
This may be the result of e.g. to much force on the opened film take over
unit.
Cure 2: Check, if the film take over unit transports the film straight (parallel).
- Roller pressure on the film must be uniform,
• insert a film in the film take over

unit.
• Close the film take-over unit.
• Lift the shaft slightly on the drive

side of the horizontal film
alignment.

Repair and Service
• Check the pressure on the film on

both rollers.
- In case of pressure differences:

• align the shaft in parallel,
or
• replace the film take over unit.
Symptom: Film runs askew through the decurl unit

or
Display "remove output jam" in combination with the error message "6C4C0"
(see local keypad, menu 10, print engine - error details)
Reason: Twisting of one of the bearing blocks for the decurl rollers.
- This may happen on each side, right or left, when a film has been pulled out
of the decurl unit with excessive force.
The last decurl roller is then no longer parallel – the film runs askew.
Cure: Correct positioning of the bearing block.
• Lift the shaft by means of a screwdriver, as shown in Fig. (see arrow "lift
axle"), and turn the bearing block back to its correct position, either
manually or with a screwdriver.

Repair and Service
bearing
Okay Not Okay
Figure 3
Or
• If this is not a permanent solution for the problem:

replace the decurl unit by the latest revison of the decurl unit.

Repair and Service
5 Symptom: Drystar 3000 does not print. No error message is displayed.
Reason:
Either the image does not get to the printer (network problem) or printer configuration
mismatch
Cure:
• Enter Menu „Application - Customization - Name/Value Edit“
• Look to the drivers with extension „11“: The list of these components should look like
displayed here
• In case it does not look like that, reconfigure the output of the printer as Drystar 3000.
Select „force pin“ in the configuration screen.
• In case the drivers for the print engine are okay, have a closer look to the drivers for
networking:
Note: In the example below only the driver for APIP has been loaded. If the Drystar 3000 is
connected to a host modality via DICOM, lp, pap or ftp, different drivers may be loaded.

Repair and Service
Network Protocol Drivers

APIP CMNXXX21
ETHXXX21
DICOM CMNXXX22 (or higher)
PMSXXX22 (or higher)
FTP CMNXXX?? (?? > 21)
LP CMNXXX?? (?? > 21)
PAP CMNXXX?? (?? > 21)
PAPXXX?? (?? > 21)
For further information see section 8 „Troubleshooting Ethernet failures“
• In case the driver is not installed, use the proper network configurator to reconfigure the
network connection:
- IMOS Megacon for APIP connection
- IMOS DCM for DICOM connection
- IMOS MPS for postscript connection

Repair and Service
6 Symptom: Image faults
The list of artifacts on the film is divided in following types of artifacts:
# Artifact Example Refer to

1. Contrast and density Dmax 2.7 instead of 6.1
reproduction faults 3.0 O.D.
2. Line artifacts in transport Bright lines in transport direction 6.2
direction
3. Line artifacts vertical to the 'Banding' vertical to transport direction 6.3
transport direction (parallel to print drum)
4. Line artifacts diagonal to the Moiree pattern 6.4
transport direction
5. Point artifacts Very small white dots 6.5
6. Surface artifacts Scratches 6.6
7. Position of the image on the Only fits half of the image is printed 6.7
film not centered
6.1 Contrast and density reproduction faults

The customer will usually complain about
• Image overall too dark
• Image overall too bright
• On the monitor the image looks better than on the film. Refer to remark below.
• Image not sharp enough
Enclosed a table which divides the symptoms mentioned above in 5 different symptoms:
# Artifact Refer to
1. Dmin too high 6.1.1
2. Dmax too high or too low 6.1.2
3. Optimal perceivable levels not okay 6.1.3
4. Contouring visible; 'Landscaping' 6.1.4

Repair and Service
6.1.1 Dmin too high

Symptom The minimum density on the clinical (white areas, e.g. text) and test
images (white areas, e.g. 100% field of SMPTE test pattern) is more than
0.02 density units higher than before printing.
Example:
Fog level before printing 0.20 O.D.
Fog level after printing 0.25 O.D.
This fault can best be observed in the 100% square of the SMPTE test
image
Reason • Film calibration not performed and/or
• MDM needs re-calibration
Cure (1) Perform a film calibration. Refer to chapter 6.6

(2) Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 100% square
(3) If Dmin is still not OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film
calibration. Refer to chapter 6.6.
6.1.2 Dmax too high or too low

Symptom The maximum density on the clinical (black areas, e.g. frame around the
image) and test images (black areas, e.g. 0% field of SMPTE test pattern)
is more than 0.1 density units lower or higher than the target Dmax
(= Blue based film 3.1 O.D / Clear based film 2.95 O.D.).
Refer to note below regarding density measurement.
Example:
Dmax = 2.7 O.D.
This fault can best be observed in the 0% square of the SMPTE test
image

Repair and Service
Density measurement of Drystar films:

• For density measurement of Drystar films a calibrated densitometer
MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or
Gretag D200-2 is required.
• The reference densitometer for Drystar 3000 is the MacBeth TR-
924 densitometer. The aperture of the spot is 3 mm and a visual
filter must be used.
• In the field the MacBeth TR-924 is not available. Normally, other
densitometers can only be used provided that an approved
recalculation table or recalculation function for the used
densitometer is available.
• Recalculation tables are available for X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341, X-Rite
310 and Gretag D200-2. Refer to MEDNET, GSO library.
• The densitometers must be calibrated with the calibration wedge of
the supplier according to the instructions of the supplier.

• MDM needs re-calibration and/or
• TPH profile needs to be calibrated

(3) If Dmax is still not OK, use another filmbatch (other emulsion
number)
(4) Perform a film calibration
(5) If Dmax is still not OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a
film calibration. Refer to chapter 6.6
(7) If Dmax is still not OK perform a Printhead profile calibration.
Refer to chapter 6.6.
(8) Perform a film calibration.
(9) Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 0% square.
(10) If Dmax is still not OK, order new film with other emulsion
number.

Repair and Service
6.1.3 Density reproduction / Optimal perceivable not okay

Symptom Customer complains about 'on the monitor the image looks better than on
the film'
Testimage This fault can best be observed in the 'ktbwd2n.tif test image. Refer to
Figure 5 page 15.
Each square differs from its neighbor by 2 density value (2 of 256). Each
square has inside a small square which is 2 density units darker than the
outside square.)
• MDM needs re-calibration and/or
• TPH profile needs to be calibrated

(2) Print the image ktbwd2n.tif and check at the lightbox whether all
small squares are visible in the big squares.
(3) If not all small squares are visible, perform an MDM calibration
followed by a film calibration. Refer to chapter 6.6
(5) If still not all small squares are visible, perform a Printhead profile
calibration. Refer to chapter 6.6
(6) Perform a film calibration.
small squares are visible in the big squares. See also note next
page.
In case the customer complains about

'on the monitor the image looks better
than on the film' it is advised to check
the monitor calibration.
This can be done by loading a

SMPTE test image on the monitor,
and checking whether the 5% and
95% fields are visible.
Figure 4

Repair and Service
Figure 5: ktbwd2n.tif test image
All small squares inside the big squares are only visible in case of
• proper printer calibration
• proper viewing conditions at the lightbox.
Refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual, available in the "Harcopy -
General Hardcopy Info" section on the MEDNET GSO Library.

Repair and Service
6.1.4 Contouring visible; 'Landscaping'
Symptom
Figure 6
Gray shaded areas do not show a continuous grey shading but show
visible, hard grey steps (also called 'landscaping', i.e. it looks like contour
lines in a hiking map)
This fault can best be observed in a clinical image or the 'ktbwd2n.tif test
image. Refer to Figure 5 page 15.
Each square differs from its neighbor by 2 density value (2 of 256). Each
square has inside a small square which is 2 density units darker than the
outside square.)
Reason • Sensitometry far away from the real film characteristics; calibration
not performed and/or
• Printhead profile needs to be calibrated
Cure (1) Perform a film calibration
(3) If not all small squares are visible, perform an MDM calibration
followed by a film calibration
(5) If not all small squares are visible perform a Printhead profile
calibration

Repair and Service
6.2 Line artifacts in transport direction

Enclosed a table which divides the line artifacts in 4 different symptoms:
# Artifact Refer to
1. Dust stripes 6.2.1
2. Line artifacts < 1mm 6.2.2
3. Line artifacts > 1mm 6.2.3
4. Wide bands of lower density at the left and/or right hand side of the 6.2.4
film
6.2.1 Dust stripes
Symptom
536433SA.CDR
Figure 7
Dust stripes are most often white, sometimes dark lines, and mostly
ragged and not sharp. Are always in the transport direction, and are from
a few cms long up to the total length of the film.
This fault can best be observed in the flat3001.bla test image.
Reason 1 Dust on the film. The dust particle stays on the thermal head for a
certain time. This leads to less heat on the film as long as the dust
particle stays between the thermal head and the film.
Cure 1 Normally okay after next film, otherwise clean the thermal head.
For cleaning instructions refer to section 6.2.1.1, page 21

Repair and Service
6.2.1.1 Check of Film for Dust Stripes and/or Scratches
o TH screw driver
o Ink eraser
o Service PC with IMOS Drystar 3000
(1) In IMOS Drystar 3000 select
Repair
PrintEngine
Print Testpage
flat3001.bla
to print a flatfield with 1.0 O.D.
(2) Check the "flat3001.bla" test image for dust stripes and scratches.
- If dust stripes and/or scratches are visible follow the TH cleaning
procedure as described in Figure 8: TH cleaning procedure.
Basic Rules for the TH Cleaning Procedure

• Use the correct cleaning material.
1. Wet cleaning: Use a lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl -
alcohol or a cleaning tissue.
2. Dry cleaning: Use the blue side of an ink eraser. Make a linear
cleaning movement, parallel to the resistor line. Refer to Figure 9.
3. For the last wet cleaning action observe the rule: The last cleaning
action must be carried out in one way!
• For the Isopropyl alcohol observe the rule: As less water is in the alcohol
as better. Water can damage the TH. We recommend using a 90%
Isopropyl alcohol.

Repair and Service
TH cleaning
Dry TH cleaning
procedure
procedure
Print flat3001.bla*and
**medical.tif test image
Dismount TH
vertical stripes No Clean TH with

Okay Isopropyl alcohol
visible ?
(”wet” cleaning)
Yes or in doubt
Use ink eraser
Clean TH with for cleaning.
Isopropyl alcohol Refer to figure next page.
Clean TH with
Print flat3001.bla *
Isopropyl alcohol
test image
additional Mount TH
Yes
vertical stripes
visible ?
Clean TH with
No Isopropyl alcohol
Previous Stripes No
Okay
still visible ?
Print flat3001.bla*test image
Yes
Perform Dry TH
Cleaning Procedure
New vertical Yes
536363mm.cdr stripes visible ?
No
Vertical No
stripes visible ? Okay
Yes
Perform TH ***
* Local keypad: Print Diskette - Image Selection - medical.tif profile calibration.
** In IMOS select: Repair - PrintEngine - Print Testpage - flat3001.bla

Stripes visible in No
medical_image test Okay
*** In IMOS select: Repair - PrintEngine - Modules -
MDM Calibration - Calibrate TH - Profile image ?
Yes
Observe TH cleaning rules
described next page Replace TH
Figure 8: TH cleaning procedure

Repair and Service
• Before dry cleaning with an ink eraser to remove print stripes dismount
the thermal head: The Drystar 3000 is quite dust sensitive.
• During cleaning do not push on the IC cover of the Thermal Head.
• The Thermal Head has a printed circuit board integrated. This means, that
the same ESD (electromagnetic discharge) guidelines apply for the
Thermal Head than for printed circuit boards.
• The aluminum surface, on which the Thermal Head is mounted, may not
be scratched during dismounting of the Thermal Head. Possible scratches
have to be removed with a sand paper or a file, to prevent uneven
pressure of the Thermal Head on the film.
• When replacing or cleaning the Thermal Head take care not to damage
the Thermal Head: Too high pressure on the TH film guide can lead to
the failure of single heating elements. Be aware, that the Thermal Head
is a very sensitive part and has to be treated very cautiously
TH resistor line
TH cross section
TH top view
Blue side
Ink eraser
e.g. Pelican
type BR40 536410cd.cdr
linear cleaning movement

parallel to TH resistor line
Figure 9: Usage of ink eraser for TH cleaning
Instruct the customer, not to fill the input tray with dropped films or films
coming from jam clearances:
• These re-inserted films can be contaminated with dust and fingerprints
which can result in image artifacts or a defective thermal head.
• If the film is inserted the wrong way, the thermal head gets heavily
contaminated, what makes a service intervention necessary.

Repair and Service
6.2.2 Line artifacts < 1mm
Symptom
536433SB.CDR
Figure 10
Dark line(s) in print direction.

• Width can be< 1mm (Sub mm TPH banding) or 0.05 mm (one pixel
line).
• Can be one or more lines.
• Line can be intermittent.
• Can be a combination of dark and white lines.
Reason • One or more defective resistors of the TH (sharp lines).

• Shift of the resistor values of the resistor elements (unsharp lines).
• Deposits on the TH
Cure (1) Clean the thermal head. For cleaning instructions refer to section
6.2.1.1, page 21.
(2) If this does not help exchange the thermal head.

Repair and Service
Symptom
536113AO.CDR
Figure 11
Vertical bright lines
• Thin vertical bright lines across the complete film.
Reason 1 • Software problem on the COS Board revision E.

COS board rev. E is installed in machines with SN < 2177 (except SN
2171; 2172; 2173)
Cure 1 • Installation of the Software Version ≥ 1.73.
During the software installation there is an automatic update of the
firmware of the COS Board to rev. F.
- as an alternative -
• Installation of the COS Board rev. F (EB+53610593)
Reason 2 • Hardware problem on the AIC1 Board
Cure 2 • Replacement of the AIC1 by a AIC1 Board, Rev. F (EB+53611092).

The THP1 Board previously mounted on the modified data cables is
now integrated on AIC1 Board, rev. F and is thus no longer necessary.

Repair and Service
Symptom
536433SC.CDR
Figure 12
White or bright line(s) in print direction.

• Width can be < 1mm (Sub mm TPH banding) or 0.05 mm (one
pixel line).
• Can be one or more lines.
• Line can be intermittent.
• Can be a combination of dark and white lines.
Reason • One or more defective resistors of the TH (sharp lines).

• Shift of the resistor values of the resistor elements (unsharp lines).
• Scratches
o Film moves along a sharp mechanical part inside the printer
o Contamination of the TH
Cure (1) Clean the thermal head. For cleaning instructions refer to section
6.2.1.1, page 21
(2) If the fault is still visible, check the film for scratches: Print Testfilm
„artifac2.bla“ and check whether the scratch corresponds to a
mechanical part which is printed on the film. See also section 6.6,
Surface artifacts
(3) In case the fault is still visible exchange the thermal head.

Repair and Service
6.2.3 Line artifacts > 1mm
Symptom
536433SQ.CDR
Figure 13
• Bright vertical lines over the whole film length.
• The stripes can be very small
(< 1 mm) to quite wide ( > 2 mm)
• The distance from line to line is irregular
• By keeping the film horizontally with light in the background small
scratches can be seen on the emulsion side of the film.
Reason Film backing layer deposits on the TH after printing the film on the wrong
side.
Cure Clean the thermal head For cleaning instructions refer to section 6.2.1.1,
page 21.

Repair and Service
Symptom
536433SE.CDR
Figure 14
Narrow (between 1 and 5 mm) to wide (> 5 mm) lines in print direction.
Lines can be brighter or darker. This fault is named "mm TPH banding" (1
to 5 mm) or "Macro TPH banding" (> 5 mm)
Reason • Dirt on the TH.

• Dirt on the print drum
• TH resistor drift
• TH driver defective. See also example images next page
Cure (1) Check the print drum for conatmination
(2) Clean the thermal head. For cleaning instructions refer to section
6.2.1.1, page 21.
(3) Print a flat3001.bla test image .
(4) If problem is still visible, perform a printhead calibration. Refer to
chapter 6.6, Calibrations

Repair and Service
Symptom
Figure 15
Wide, dark, regular vertical stripes. The stripes correspond to the shape of
the decurl rollers.
Note: The example, shown here, is the print of a flat3001.bla" test image.
In the clinical image the stripes are mixed with the image information. The
stripes must not necessarily be symmetric. Probably they are only visible
on one side.

To confirm the fault proceed as follows:
(1) Print Testfilm „artifac2.bla“
(2) Put the film „artifac2.bla“ on the flat3001.bla test image film
(3) Put them on the lightbox.
(4) In case the problem is really originated by the decurl-rollers, you will
see the fault-pattern on the displayed decurl rollers on the„artifac2.bla“
film.
Reason 1 Most likely dirt on the infrared sensor
Because of the dirt the temperature sensor measures a lower temperature

which then results in a higher decurl temperature.
Cure 1 Clean the IR sensor or replace the decurl unit. Refer to note below,

Repair and Service
In all machines manufactured up to mid-October 98 the decurl unit must

be replaced to replace the IR sensor, since the IR sensor is hardly
accessible (see Figure 16 ),
In machines with a separately mounted IR sensor (see Figure 17)
remove the IR sensor and clean it. Do not open the adjusting nut. These
must only be loosened for replacement of the temperature sensor.
531130a.CDR
Figure 16: Decurl unit with fixed IR Figure 17: Decurl unit with separately mounted
sensor IR sensor
Reason 2 IR sensor defective
Cure 2 Replace the IR sensor
Reason 3 PMC1 board defective
Cure 3 Replace the PMC1 board
Pollution of the Printer:

When removing the decurl unit, please consider the following points to avoid pollution
of the printer:
• Never use compressed air to remove them since this would distribute the
particles all over the machine and its surroundings.
• If there are any light particles / dust in the machine, remove them with a
vacuum cleaner.

Repair and Service
Symptom
10,16 mm
or 5,08 mm
or 2,54 mm
536163km.cdr
Figure 18
Persistent dark line in print direction. The width of the dark line is 2.54 or
5.08 or 10.16 mm.
In comparison to TPH banding (see previous symptom) the dark line is
more pronounced.
This fault is called "TH driver banding"
Reason TH driver defective
Cure Replace the Thermal Head

Repair and Service
Symptom
10,16 mm
or 5,08 mm
or 2,54 mm
536163kl.cdr
Figure 19
Persistent blank line in print direction. The width of the blank line is 2.54
or 5.08 or 10.16 mm
This fault is called "TH driver drop"

Repair and Service
Symptom
10,16 mm
or 5,08 mm
or 2,54 mm
536133SM.CDR
Figure 20
Intermittent white line in print direction. The width of the blank is 2.54 or
5.08 or 10.16 mm This fault is called "Intermittent TH driver drop"

Repair and Service
6.2.4 Wide bands with lower density at the left and/or right hand side of the film
Symptom
536433SH.CDR
Figure 21
Uneven density at the right and/or left hand side of the image. Density is
too low compared to the middle part of the image.
The reason for this fault is

• bad TPH pressure or
• aged print drum (changed elasticity of the rubber of the drum)
Indications to distinguish between bad TPH pressure and an aged print

drum:
Bad TPH pressure (refer to reason 3 below):
o the uneven density is more pronounced
o the Dmax decreases to a very low level, sometimes to zero.
o the uneven density most often shows up right after the
installation of a thermal head
Aged print drum (refer to reason 2 below)
o the Dmax decrease is less pronounced compared to bad TPH
pressure.
o uneven density related to an aged print drum will come up after
a certain number of films. With a drum life time of 100.000
prints the uneven density is probably caused by drum ageing.

Repair and Service
Reason 1 • After exchange of the print drum the Printhead profile was not
executed
Cure 1 • Perform a Printhead profile calibration.
Reason 2 • Aging of the print drum: Different elasticity of the print drum rubber
over the drum width.
Cure 2 • Perform a Printhead profile calibration.

• In case this does not help, exchange the print drum.
Reason 3 • After replacing or dismounting the TH, the pressure of the film against
the thermal print head may be uneven.
• Due to age related reduction of the spring force, the pressure of the
film against the thermal print head is uneven.
Cure 3 • Adjust the pressure of the film against the thermal head again and
use the adjustment kit with the order no. EB+53611750 TOOLKIT TO
ADJUST TH PRESSURE
Reason 4 • Heat conducting material of thermal head not homogeneous anymore
(should only happen for devices with SN<1895).
Cure 4 • Only for devices with SN<1895: Perform a Printhead profile

calibration.
• In case this does not help, exchange the TH

Repair and Service
6.3 Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction
Symptom
536433SD.CDR
Figure 22
Regular line structure 90° to print direction, also called 'banding' or

'transport shocks'. Usually only visible in areas, where the density is
constant.
Reason Irregularities in the film transport system (mechanical problem).

Depending on the distance of the banding lines, following parts can
cause such a banding:
• 128 mm distance: (= image length for 1 rotation of the flat belt):

object on flat belt; printer out of operation for a long time
(pressure marks on flat belt)
• 111 mm distance (= image length for 1 rotation of the drum):
drum error, object on flat belt pulley, drum bearings worn out.
• 17 mm distance: (= image length for 1 rotation of the toothed
belt): object on toothed belt
• 15 mm distance: (= image length for 1 rotation of the encoder
reduction gear): Worn out bearings of the encoder; contact
problem of encoder cable
• 2,6 mm (= image length for 1 rotation of the drum motor axle):
Drum drive motor bearings worn out, tension of the toothed belt
too high
• < 1 mm: Defective encoder
• Irregular distance: Bad TH data cable connection or defective TH
data cable

Repair and Service
Cure Check the complete print drum drive (motor bearings, drum, belt pulleys,
belt tension).
Cure depends on the distance of the lines.
Symptom
536163AY.CDR
Figure 23
One (or more) thin horizontal dark line in the image. Initially sporadic,
later on it might even be in every image. Eventually a bright line is visible
above the dark one.
Reason Most likely rust on the shaft assembly bushing. As this bushing is one of
3 supports of the TH in print position, it is possible, that a non-defined
support position can lead to small slipping down of the TH during
printing.
Cure Dismount the shaft assembly and grease the bushing (for instrcutions
see section 13, FSBs, DD+DIS013.99M).
Note 1: In all devices with SN > 1916 (+ additional SN1911) the bushing
is greased already.
Note 2: This greasing has to be done only once in a lifetime.

Repair and Service
6.4 Line artifacts diagonal to the transport direction
Symptom
Figure 24
Moiré pattern: Dots or lines, appearing in regular distance over the

whole film. Sporadic (intermittent contact) or most often persistent.
Appearance depends on frequency of the video signal (i.e. may differ
from one to another installation).
Reason Interrupted ground connection between the AFR2 Board rev. A and the
housing
• Possibility 1: Provide the missing ground connection between PCB
Cure
and housing by soldering a solder tag. These solder tags are
available in packages of 100 including the instructions
(EB+44022720).
• Possibility 2: Installation of the AFR2 Board, Rev C, available as
spare part. (EB+44022622).

Repair and Service
6.5 Point artifacts

Enclosed a table which divides the point artifacts in 4 different symptoms:
# Artifact Refer to
1. Pinholes 6.5.1
2. Bubbles 6.5.2
3. Dust particles on the printdrum 6.5.3
4. Dust particles in the film 6.5.4
6.5.1 Pinholes
Symptom
536163SD.CDR
Figure 25
These errors show as small transparent and isolated dots,

typically < 0.2mm.
Reason • Pinholes are present in the film before printing
Cure • Pinholes must be regarded as a film problem (which cannot be

avoided).

Repair and Service
6.5.2 Bubbles
Symptom
536163SE.CDR
Figure 26
Bubbles show up as clusters of small pinholes, usually in the Dmax
area of the film.
Bubbles must be evaluated with a magnifying glass.
Reason • Drum position (= adjustment of the eccentric drum) not optimized.
Cure (1) Perform a film calibration

(2) Print the image tpa_v1.tif and check for bubbles
(3) If the bubbles are still present perform an MDM calibration
followed by a film calibration.
(5) If the bubbles are still present, adjust the drum position according
to the procedure ‘adjustment of the eccentric drum’. Refer to
chapter 6.6, Adjustments
(8) If the bubbles are still present, use film with different emulsion
number, if possible.

Repair and Service
6.5.3 Dust particles on the printdrum
Symptom
approx. 111 mm
approx. 111 mm
approx. 111 mm
approx. 111 mm
536163SF.CDR
Figure 27
Oval or round spot with a lower (or higher) density. There is sometimes a
zone of higher density in the center of this area. The error is repeated a
few times on the film.
Distance between errors equals the drum circumference (= 111 mm)
Reason • Dust/dirt on the print drum. Drum errors are easy to detect since the
circumference of the drum is small compared to the length of the film.
This results in the same drum error a number of times on the same
printed film having a distance between errors equal to the drum
circumference (= 111 mm)
Cure (1) Print the flat3001.bla test image

(2) Clean the print drum with a cleaning tissue soaked in water
(3) Print again the flat3001.bla test image.

Repair and Service
6.5.4 Dust particles in the film
Symptom
536163SG.CDR
Figure 28
Transparent spots, usually a black particle can be seen in the middle of
the transparent spot.
Reason • Dust particles or aggregates in the top layer of the film
Cure • Dust particles in the film are a general film problem (which cannot be
avoided 100%).

Repair and Service
6.6 Surface artifacts
Symptom
536433SC.CDR
Figure 29
Scratches: Scratches appear as one or more bright line over the whole
length of the film.
To judge whether a bright line is caused by a scratch, take the film from
the light box and check the surface at both sides of the film by keeping it
horizontally with light in the background. In addition scratches can be felt
with the finger nail.
Reason • Most likely contamination of the TH

• Mechanical part inside the printer (unlikely)
Cure (1) Clean the TH. For cleaning instructions refer to section 6.2.1.1,
page 18.
(2) In case this does not improve the stripes, print the image
‘ARTIF*.BLA’ (IMOS Drystar 3000 - Repair - Print Engine - Print
Testpage)
The mechanical part which possibly causes the line artifact will be
indicated by the scratch on the film.
• In case the mechanical part which causes the scratch(es) cannot be
detected, most likely persistent deposits on the TH are the cause of
the scratches. In this case replace the TH.

Repair and Service
6.7 Position of the image on the film not centered
Symptom
Figure 30
The image information is not in parallel with the film edges
This fault can be observed in the any image.
Reason Vertical alignment incorrect: The stops in the input tray are not on the
same level.
Perform a vertical alignment procedure. refer to chapter 6.6, Adjustments.
Cure

Repair and Service
Symptom
Figure 31
The upper and the lower edge of the image information do not have the
same distance to the film edge (D1 and D2). The vertical adjustment of
the image is not correct.
This fault can be observed in the any image.

Reason Vertical alignment out of adjustment: The stops in the input tray are too
high or too low.
Cure Perform a vertical alignment procedure. refer to chapter 6.6, Adjustments.

Repair and Service
7 Symptom: Hard disk doesn’t work
Symptom Hard disk doesn’t work
The end of the boot message looks as follows:
Wait until disk HD0 is ready

1 (Can not select [11])
** Error, Drive C: not ready
mon>
The cursor at the keypad is blinking; the red CPU LED lights up
Reason • Wrong SCSI address coding (only for new installed hard disk!).
• Bad contacts of cable connector.
• Possibly missing power supply for hard disk
• defective hard disk.
Cure • Type "dos" on monitor level (Drystar_C:\mon <enter>; Mon>DOS

<enter>) to be able to execute dos commands on monitor level. The
command "dir" should in any case give you the contents of the hard
disk if the connection can be achieved.
Type "he" to get more information on the "mondos" tool. Type "quit" to
leave the mondos level.
• If command "dir" doesn`t work check cable connection to the hard disk
and power supply.
• Replace hard disk or CPU if necessary
7.1 Software Installation / Configuration from Scratch
In case of troubles during installation or repair, it is required in certain cases to reconfigure the
printer or to install the software from scratch.
Enclosed a brief instruction:
7.1.1 Software Installation from Scratch
Tools needed: Laptop; IMOS Drystar 3000; Device SW (e.g. rel 1.95)
Proceeding:
• Start IMOS Drystar 3000
• Make a backup
• Select INSTALL SW: Reinstall System (see HELP IMOS Drystar 3000 for more information)
• Insert the floppies as requested
• Make a restore of the TH data only
• Make a new configuration (see next topic)
7.1.2 Configuration from Scratch

Repair and Service
Tools needed: Laptop, IMOS Megacon; possibly IMOS DICOM and / or MPS
Proceeding:
• Deletet all .a00, .c00 and .u00 files on the C: and D: partition
• Start IMOS Megacon
• Select for input / output / network the required modules. Choose "force pin" at the
different inputs/outputs.
• Use IMOS DCM or MPS to configure other network connections if required.
• Either make a selective restore of the LCD and MNU .U00 parameters or make a new
customisation of the printer, if required.
8 Troubleshooting Ethernet failures

Symptom: No printing via Ethernet
Reason:
HARDWARE
• Cabling (Coax not RG-58; short circuit; not connected, not terminated by 50 Ohm
terminator)
• BER board defective
• MAU (see green LED = power. Off means BEN or MAU problem) defective
• Drop cable, internal Drystar 3000 Ethernet cable. defective
SOFTWARE
• Ethernet not configured
• Problem in ART table (mismatch of small/capital letters; typing error)
• mismatch of apip_dest_names.
• Not enough diskspace for the network user 4 (or 5 to 9) in the printer where you want to
print the image.
Tools for troubleshooting:

TROUBLESHOOTING HARDWARE
⇒ Make a reset of the printer. Start "rem" (logbook) on terminal level. Type "go" and have a
look to the first page of information. You should get something like:
TNX ethernet address 00-66-00-27-6f-00 (=BEN ethernet adddress)
TNX selftest MAC okay (=one function of BEN SONIC chip)
TNX selftest ENDEC okay (=encoder/decoder function of SONIC chip)
TNX selftest cable okay (=check of fuse and cable)
TROUBLESHOOTING SOFTWARE
• look to the whole customization list: type NVE at the AOS shell prompt. You have to get
ETHXXX21 driver at the end. Otherwise it seems that Ethernet is disabled.
• type "adv" to get the whole list of all Ethernet nodes in your network ("adv" means
"advertise").

Repair and Service
9 Bus error
• Start IMOS Drystar 3000. No connection will be established. Select "Terminal"
Possible message: "RC" or "mon"*
• Perform a reset on the VME CPU or type "res"
• Stop the system boot up before the application SW will be started: Press ENTER key as
soon as the "AOS started" message appears.
• Remove all VME interfaces except the CPU
• Perform a reset: Now the system should boot up without bus crash. If a bus crash occurs
now, remove the NIP and BER board, too.
• Insert one interface after another. Make a reset in between. Like that the faulty interface
can be detected.
*In case a bus crash register dump is displayed, the following list will help to troubleshoot:
By looking on the "fault address" you can verify in the listing below the "fault" address
Address - Range Device Address - Range Device

00000000 - 07FFFFFF Memory module F7FE8400 - F7FE87FF CPU board
10000000 - 17FFFFFF Memory module F7FE8800 - F7FE880F BER
17800000 - 17FFFFFF LUT NIP F7FE8880 - F7FE888F BER
D0000000 - D7FFFFFF NIP F7FE8900 - F7FE89FF CPU board
E0000000 - E00FFFFF VSI F7FE8A00 - F7FE8AFF BER
EA000000 - EA1FFFFF COS board F7FE8B00 - F7FE8B1F NIP
EA200000 - EB000000 AIC board F7FE8C00 - F7FE8EFF CPU board
EF004000 - EF004800 AIC board F7FE8F00 - F7 FE8F0F BER
F2000000 - F2FFFFFF BER board F7FE8F20 - F7FE8F2F BER
F7FD0000 - F7FDFFFF CPU board F7000000 - FFEFFFFF CPU board
F7FE8001 - F7FE82FF CPU baord
F7FE8300 - F7FE83FF BER
Remark: When an addressing failure occurs, this might have other causes than a
malfunctioning board on the corresponding address. E g. a - malfunctioning - board
that responds to an addressing cycle of another board.
9.1 Bus crash caused by COS board

COS boards < rev. E in a few rare circumstances (e.g. at very low temperature) can cause a
sporadic buscrash. The printer will automatically reset as long as the buscrash exists. A logfile
(IMOS Drystar 3000 → TOOLS → terminal; "log to file") will show
BUS ERROR at addr ea000000 (or from EA000000 to EA1FFFFF respectively).
It is recommended to install SW release 1.7 or higher in this case. Software rel. 1.7 contains a
software upgrade for the COS board. In case the problem is not solved with this measure,
replace the COS1 board to a board with rev. F or higher.

Electrical and mechanical codings, fuses
Section 6 - 4
List of contents
1 Electrical and mechanical codings, fuses.................................................................... 1

1.1 Jumper and switch settings ................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 SCN2...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 MAU ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 COS1 ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.4 Gemini.................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.5 Key300 ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Fuses ....................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 LED's........................................................................................................................................ 3
06.11.98 5361 Section 6.4 / I

1 Electrical and mechanical codings, fuses

1.1 Jumper and switch settings
For detailed layouts of the boards, see section 7
1.1.1 SCN2
J4 J4
J1 J1
for DTE: for DCE:
J3 J3
J2 J2
Figure 1
1.1.2 MAU
J7
J7
UTP Ethernet: Thin Ethernet:
(Twisted Pair)
J6
J6
J5
J5
J4
J4
J3
J3
J2
J2
J1
J1
In the AUI interface, the jumpers are being removed.
Figure 2
1.1.3 COS1
Reset switch see Figure 3.
The reset switch resets all on board devices.
1.1.4 Gemini
Reset and abort switch see Figure 4
The reset switch resets all on board devices, including the CPU. The abort switch is enabled just
before the first monitor prompt appears on the debug terminal. Some situation exist in which the
09.01.00 5361 Section 6.4 / 1

VIC chip does not process the incoming interrupts, especially during CPU hangup. This prevents
the ABORT interrupt from reaching the CPU.
1.1.5 Key300
At the key300 pcb a jumper has to be set to distinguish between mobile and normal application.
1.2 Fuses
Destination Fuse Value Protected voltage
PMC1 F1 500 mA, F, Microfuse 8,5 V, external keypad 1
SCN2 F1 250 mA, Microfuse + 12 V, power supply RS232/422
SCN2 F2 250 mA, Microfuse - 12 V, power supply RS232/422
Power supply - 8AFF + 60 V, Quartz lamp decurl unit
Power supply - 8AFF + 60 V, Quartz lamp decurl unit
Remark
The +/-12 V power supply for the RS232/422 on SCN2 is normally (90%) taken from the
host machine.
Section 6.4 / 2 5361 05.11.1998

1.3 LED's
Destination LED Status Function
PMC1 L1 off selftest failed
on selftest OK
flashing selftest busy
PMC1 L2 off decurl temp off
on decurl temp on, temperature is not within window
flashing decurl temp off, temperature is within window
PMC1 L3 off rocan bus idle
on rocan bus busy, object received
PMC1 L4 off gear ratio adjustment sensor S8 not home
on gear ratio adjustment sensor S8 home, will be
activated for at least 5 sec.
PMC1 L5 off DSP<->592 communication idle
on DSP<->592 communication busy, must flash at least
5 times/sec.
PMC1 L6 flashing optical encoder running, channel B
on/off optical encoder not running, channel B
PMC1 L7 on PWM—signal drum motor. Led intensity is modulated
off PWM—signal drum motor is 0%
PMC1 Heater on PWM—signal heater decurl unit. Led intensity is
off modulated
PWM—signal heater decurl unit is 0%
PMC1 +5V on +5V supply voltage present
off +5V failure
off +8V failure
off +12V failure
PMC1 -12V on -12V supply voltage present
off -12V failure
off +24V failure
09.01.00 5361 Section 6.4 / 3


AIC1 Led1 off rocan bus idle
on rocan bus busy,object received
AIC1 Led2 off TH resistance measurement idle
on TH resistance measurement busy
AIC1 Led3 off selftest failed
on selftest OK
AIC1 VCC off +5V supply voltage failure
on +5V supply voltage present
AIC1 -Vs off -12V supply voltage failure
on -12V supply voltage present
AIC1 +Vs off +12V supply voltage failure
on +12V supply voltage present
AIC1 Vth off TH voltage failure
on TH voltage present
AIC1 PWM off TH voltage control passive
on TH voltage control active
MDM1 PIC off <Not used>
(D12) on
MDM1 MDMST off selftest error DSH
AT (D1) on selftest OK
MDM1 MDMST off selftest error STM
MDM1 MDMST off selftest error MDM
MDM1 LMP off lamp off
(D2) on lamp on
MDM1 CAN off rocan bus idle
(D10) on rocan bus busy, object received
MDM1 SAM off MDM standby
(D6) on MDM sampling
MDM1 PHA off STM standby
(D11) on STM sampling
MDM1 -8V off failure
(D8) on -8V supply voltage present
MDM1 +8V off failure
(D7) on +8V supply voltage present
Section 6.4 / 4 5361 05.11.1998


COS D4 off
(yellow) on configuration busy, if it stays continuously on ->
configuration failure
COS D5 off
(red) on configuration busy, if it stays continuously on ->
COS D6 off
(red) on configuration busy, if it stays continuously on ->
COS D7 off
(yellow) on configuration busy, if it stays continuously on ->
External LED's on COS board.
BCD coding
2
G Y R 2
1
G Y R 2
0
G Y R 2
SW RESET
Figure 3
The green (G) LED's are hardware controlled, the yellow (Y) and red (R) are software controlled.
Green LED Status Function

Upper on Strobe active
Middle on Line sync active
Lower on data transfer from VME to COS DRAM
The yellow and red LED'S are BCD coded (7 all on, 1 only lower on)
Yellow LED's During power up Normal functioning

1 idle (selftest OK) idle
2 checksum test filling pixelmemory
3 not implemented command interface active
4 black counter test not implemented
5 memory test not implemented
6 FIFO test reading of image data from data FIFO
7 checksum test not implemented
09.01.00 5361 Section 6.4 / 5

The yellow and red LED'S are BCD coded (7 all on, 1 only lower on)
Red LED's During power up Normal functioning

2 checksum test compensation calculation busy
3 SRAM test VME command interface active
4 extended DRAM test data FIFO filling with image data
5 short DRAM test TSL command interface active
6 FIFO test not implemented
External LED's on GEMINI board.
RESET SW
ABORT SW
1 G Y R
2 G Y R
3 G Y R
4 G Y R
Figure 4
Blocks 1 and 3 are driven by the Slave CPU in socket 19 and blockd 2 and 4 by the Main CPU in
socket U20.
LED Status Function

1 Green Slave CPU Idle
(Software Yellow Slave CPU Busy
controlled) Red Slave CPU FLWR, 12V supply to flash EPROM during
programming cycles
2 Green Main CPU Idle
(Software Yellow Main CPU Busy
controlled) Red Main CPU Fail
3 Green Slave CPU Run (CPU accesses external device: DRAM or Local
(Hardware Yellow Bus)
controlled) Red Slave CPU Configfail, if contin. on FPGA configuration failed
Slave CPU Halted
4 Green Main CPU Run (CPU accesses external device: DRAM or Local
(Hardware Bus)
controlled) Yellow Main CPU slave of external master (Local Bus or VME)
Red Main CPU Halted
Section 6.4 / 6 5361 05.11.1998

The yellow and red LED's are BCD coded (7 all on, 1 only lower on)
Yellow LED's During power up Normal functioning

2 checksum test filling pixelmemory
3 not implemented command interface active
4 black counter test not implemented
5 memory test not implemented
6 FIFO test reading of image data from data FIFO
The yellow and red LED's are BCD coded (7 all on, 1 only lower on)
Red LED's During power up Normal functioning

2 checksum test compensation calculation busy
3 SRAM test VME command interface active
4 extended DRAM test data FIFO filling with image data
5 short DRAM test TSL command interface active
6 FIFO test not implemented
09.01.00 5361 Section 6.4 / 7

Replacements
Section 6 - 5
List of contents
1 REPLACEMENTS.......................................................................................................1
1.1 Covers and panels .............................................................................................................. 1

1.1.1 Removal of the left or right cover ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Film loading assembly........................................................................................................ 1
1.2.1 Removal of the film loading assembly ................................................................................................ 1
1.2.2 Removal of the film feeding unit .......................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2.1 Removal of the transport rollers in the film feeding unit .......................................................................... 2
1.2.3 Removal of the sensors S4 and S12.................................................................................................... 3
1.2.4 Removal of the motor M4...................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.5 Replacement of the horizontal alignment assembly.......................................................................... 3
1.2.6 Replacement of the vertical alignment assembly motor M8 ............................................................. 3
1.3 Rear section ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.3.1 Removal of the VME rack PCBs (DTS1, COS1, BIO3, CPU, BER, NIP, RAM)................................... 5
1.3.2 Removal of the VME fan........................................................................................................................ 6
1.3.3 Removal of the BIO PCB....................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.4 Removal of the hard disk...................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.5 Removal of the entire VME rack........................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Drum section ....................................................................................................................... 8
1.4.1 Removal of the drum motor M1............................................................................................................ 8
1.4.2 Removal of the drum............................................................................................................................. 8
1.4.3 Removal of the main driving assembly ............................................................................................... 9
1.5 Thermal head section ......................................................................................................... 9
1.5.1 Removal of the sensor S1, S2, S3 ........................................................................................................ 9
1.5.2 Removal of the TH ............................................................................................................................... 10
1.5.3 Removal of the AIC1 PCB ................................................................................................................... 12
1.5.4 Removal of the film positioning unit assembly................................................................................ 12
1.5.5 Removal of the thermal head fan assembly...................................................................................... 13
1.6 Upper section .................................................................................................................... 13
1.6.1 Removal sensor S7 (output detection, decurl exit).......................................................................... 13
1.6.2 Removal sensor S11 (output detection, decurl entry) ..................................................................... 14
1.6.3 Removal of the heating element ........................................................................................................ 14
1.6.4 Removal of the decurl unit ................................................................................................................. 15
1.6.5 Replacing the IR-temperature sensor................................................................................................ 16
1.6.6 Removal of the power supply............................................................................................................. 17
1.6.7 Removal of the power supply EB+53610531 (new version) ............................................................ 19
1.7 Right hand side ................................................................................................................. 20
1.7.1 Exchange of the macrodensitometer ................................................................................................ 20
1.7.2 Exchange of the MDM halogen lamp ................................................................................................. 22
1.8 Supplemented removal and fitting instructions ............................................................. 23
1.8.1 Film feed unit: Replacement of the hinges ....................................................................................... 23
Revision 28 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Section 6.5 / I

Replacements
1 REPLACEMENTS
• Before replacing any part, switch off the printer and unplug the power
cord from the wall outlet.
• Protect the inner parts of the printer to avoid screws or washers to fall
in (eventually use a dry dust-free cloth as a cover).
• Tighten screws gradually !
NOTE: All references to direction (left, right, rear, front) are seen from the film loading
assembly side (= front). The abbreviations CW (ClockWise), CCW
(CounterClockWise), L (Left) and R (Right) are used.
1.1 Covers and panels
1.1.1 Removal of the left or right cover

• Open the top cover.
• Loosen the top screw (quarter turn fastener) of the left or right cover.
• Lift the cover up to remove it completely.
Figure 1
When remounting the cover, be careful not to damage switch SW5.
1.2 Film loading assembly
1.2.1 Removal of the film loading assembly

• Open the film loading assembly.
• Remove the left side cover and disconnect the connector of the film loading assembly.
• Remove the 3 screws of the slide bar on the left and right side of the cover.(figure 2)
• Unlock the gas spring with a screw driver. Support the cover !
• Gently open the cover further until you can loosen the screws (4) of the hinges. Put
something under the cover to avoid damage to the hinges !
Check the proper functioning of safety switch SW3 after

replacement.
19.11.01 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Section 6.5 / 1

Replacements
Figure 2
After replacement of the assembly follow the procedure Vertical alignment

as described in section 6-6..
1.2.2 Removal of the film feeding unit

• Remove the cover plate with the icons (4 screws).
• Disconnect the connector of M4 (located under the plate that holds the motor) and cut the
wire wrap around M4.
• Disconnect the connector of sensor S12.
• Loosen the screws of the assembly (2L/2R) and remove it.
Figure 3
When mounting the cover plate with the icons, make sure to turn the
retaining washer with their opening upwards, otherwise the cover plate
will not fit well (see fig. 3 item 1).
1.2.2.1 Removal of the transport rollers in the film feeding unit

• Remove the film feeding unit as described in 1.2.2
• Loosen both retaining washers using a suitable pair of pliers or a screw driver.
• Remove the complete transport roller unit.
• Installation in reverse order.
Section 6.5 / 2 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
1.2.3 Removal of the sensors S4 and S12

• Remove the sensors as follows:
• S4: disconnect the connector, push the sensor out of its seating and replace
• S12: remove the separation unit as described in 1.2.2 and replace the sensor.
1.2.4 Removal of the motor M4

• Remove the separation unit as described in 1.2.2.
• Remove the retaining washer on the motor shaft.
• Remove the gear wheel on the motor shaft.
• Loosen the screws (2) and remove the motor.
• Mount in reverse order.
The spare part contains two gear wheels because the part can be used on
different locations. Here you need the gear with 36 teeth (largest one)
1.2.5 Replacement of the horizontal alignment assembly

• Loosen the two sealed screws at both sides of the unit.
• Rename the assembly through the hole in the chassis plate.
• After replacement carry out the horizontal alignment procedure as described in section 6.6.
1.2.6 Replacement of the vertical alignment assembly motor M8
Open the top cover.
Remove the left and right cover of the printer (See 1.1).
Disconnect the following connectors:
the flatcable connector to the MDM PCB (1), the flatcable connector to the densitometer (2),
the sensor S5 connector (3) and the power supply connector of motor M6 (4) (See Figure 4).
Figure 4

• Remove the flat cable sheet (2 screws from front, 2 screws at the right side).
• Push the densitometer gently towards the middle position on its shaft.
• Remove the densitometer assembly (3 screws M4).
• Remove the PMC cover (6 screws M4) and disconnect the P7 (drum motor) connector on
the PMC PCB.

Replacements
• Remove the motor cable from the PMC housing along the left side of the printer until the
drum motor. Remove the coil.
• Remove the bushing and pull the cable through the hole.
• Remove the set screw of the flange at the front side of the printer.
• Remove the 4 screws of the main driving assembly (see Figure 10), remove the timing belt
to the drum and remove the complete driving assembly (put it on a chair).
• Remove the drum motor pulley .
When removing the pulley, a small pin can fall out of the shaft. Do not
loose it.
• Disconnect sensor S10 and DTS1 PCB.

• Pull the S10 cable through the bushing of the sensor sheet.
• Remove the sensor sheet (4 screws M4).
• Remove the retaining washer of the gear of M8 and slide the gear off the shaft.
• Disconnect motor M8.
• Remove motor M8. (2 or 3 screws)
Remark: Concerning the reassembly of the components refer to section 6.6 / 1.2.1.2
Figure 5
1.3 Rear section

On the rear section three covers can be removed.
• the PMC cover (upper, 6 screws),
• the TH cover (middle) + lever, fan cover (8 screws + 2 quick locks)
• the VME rack (lower, 10 screws),
Follow the instructions on handling PCBs described earlier in this section

!
Section 6.5 / 4 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
1.3.1 Removal of the VME rack PCBs (DTS1, COS1, BIO3, CPU, BER, NIP, RAM)
• Disconnect the power cable.
• Loosen the 10 screws of the VME rack. Slide the VME rack out of the printer. Use the
handle to pull the VME rack out.
Figure 6
COS1
• Remove the TH flat cable and loosen two screws, remove the PCB and mount the new one
in reverse order.
CPU assembly (CPU, RAM, BER, NIP)

• Remove the service cable, loosen 4 screws and remove the CPU assembly. The CPU
assembly contains the CPU, on top of it the BER and RAM PCB's and on top of the RAM
PCB the NIP PCB is located (see Figure 7). To remove PCB's from the CPU, loosen the
appropriate screw and pull the PCB off the CPU.
Figure 7
• Use IMOS to restore the data in the Battery RAM of the CPU: Repair --> PrintEngine -->
Modules --> Battery RAM --> Update BRAM
DTS1
• Remove the CPU assembly, loosen the 2 screws of the DTS1 PCB, disconnect the
connector and replace the PCB.

Replacements
1.3.2 Removal of the VME fan

• Necessary tools: Allen wrench, size 3 (figure 8)
• Slide the VME rack out as described in paragraph 1.3.1 step 1 to 2.
• Remove the flatcable on top of the fan housing. Remove the fan connector.
• Remove the 4 screws on top of the fan housing with an Allen key.
• Remove the screw at the front side of the VME rack (see arrow on Figure 8). Take the
housing with the fan from the VME rack.
• Slide the fan out of its housing.
• Put a new fan into the housing. Position the fan in such a way that the cable leaves the
housing at the back.
Figure 8
Remark: Mind the blow direction of the fan, the arrow on the fan has to point downwards.
• Mount the housing on the VME rack and fasten the screw at the front side.
• Connect the fan and reposition the flatcable on top of the fan housing.
1.3.3 Removal of the BIO PCB

• Loosen the flat cable clamp (on fan housing).
• Disconnect the Rocan cable.
• Remove the HDD and FDD connections.
• Remove the reset cable.
• Disconnect the power supply connections.
• Lift the VME rack and put it on the ground. Slightly turn the VME rack CCW.
• Remove the VME backplane to BIO3 connections (2 connectors).
• Remove the Ethernet connection.
• Remove the connection to DTS1.
• Remove the fan connection.
• Depending on the configuration other cables to the SCN PCB’s have to be removed.
• Remove the six screws of the BIO3 board.(see figure 9)
Section 6.5 / 6 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
Figure 9
1.3.4 Removal of the hard disk

• Unplug the two cables.
• Loosen the 4 screws.
• After replacement of the hard disk use IMOS to install the data on it:
• First the hard disk has to be formatted (the spare part is formatted, but it might be that
for newer software versions the partition sizes are changed):
Repair --> BasicHardware --> HarddiskFormat --> All
• Then the software has to be installed again:
Install --> Software --> Basic / Application / Options
• Then the specific data for this particular printer has to be restored from its backup
floppy:
Install --> Restore
• Finally the changeable data in the Battery RAM of the CPU has to be put on the hard
disk:
Repair --> PrintEngine --> Modules --> Battery RAM --> Update BRAM mirror
1.3.5 Removal of the entire VME rack

• Remove the power supply connections (7 screws and 2 fast-on clips) of the VME back
plane.
• On the BIO board remove the two cables coming from the power supply, the ROCAN cable
and the flat cables FFD and HDD.
• Remove the flatcable from the COS board.
• Take the VME rack out of the printer.

Replacements
1.4 Drum section
1.4.1 Removal of the drum motor M1

• Remove the PMC cover at the back and loosen the P7 (drum motor) connector on the
PMC board.
• Remove the motor cable from the PMC housing along the left side of the printer until the
drum motor.
• Loosen the 3 screws of the drum motor.
• Remove the belt from the pulley.
• Remove the 3 screws (keep the plastic washers).
• If suitable, remove the timing belt pulley in order to be able to mount the new motor easier.
• After replacement of the motor adjust the tension and the thread of the belts (see Section
6.6 Adjustments).
1.4.2 Removal of the drum

• Remove the left and right cover of the panel, open the TH compartment.
• Mark the position of the main driving assembly on the printer housing.
• Loosen the 4 screws of the main driving assembly.
• Reduce the tension of the belts by releasing the set screw of the flange at the front side of
the printer.
• Remove the timing belt and the pulley.
• Remove the flat belt and the pulley.
When removing the pulley, a small pin can fall out of the shaft. Do not
loose it.
• Remove the 3 screws of the drum flange at the right and left side of the printer and remove
the flanges.
• Remove the drum via the TH opening at the back of the printer.
• Mount in reverse direction.
Figure 10
Remark: Before positioning a new drum into the printer, wrap it into a film to protect it.
When remounting the main driving assembly loosen the screws for a quarter of a
turn before positioning it with the set screw. Once well positioned tighten the
screws gradually.
Check the positioning of the belts on the gears. If necessary adjust the tension,
refer to Section 6.6. Adjustments.
Section 6.5 / 8 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
1.4.3 Removal of the main driving assembly

• Remove the motor and encoder cable from the PMC housing along the left side of the
printer until the drum motor.
• Loosen the 4 screws of the main driving assembly (see Figure 10).
• Reduce the tension of the belts by releasing the set screw of the flange at the front side of
the printer.
• Remove the flat belt.
• Loosen the 4 screws and the set screw to remove the assembly.
• After replacement of the motor adjust the tension and the thread of the belts (see Section
6.6 Adjustments).
1.5 Thermal head section
1.5.1 Removal of the sensor S1, S2, S3

• If necessary bring the TH in home position (S1 high, means notch in cam positioned at
S1).
• Open the TH cover.
• Remove the retaining washer of the cam (1).
• Slide the cam of the shaft.
• Replace the appropriate sensor.
Figure 11
Remark: Mount the cam in the same position as before, when TH in home position -> notch
in cam is positioned at S1.

Replacements
1.5.2 Removal of the TH
Please observe:
In following cases you will get 100% refund for resending a defective thermal
head:
• in case of less than 15000 films printed with this TH. Refer to note 1.
• in case of less than 14 months since date of manufacturing of the TH. Refer to
note 2.
Note 1:
The number of printed films can be seen in the infocounter (IMOS Drystar 3000:
‘Repair’ → ‘Infocounter’ → ‘View Infocounters’).
4.2 Component reliability:
--------------------------------
total: date:
TH replaced: 12188 09-Apr-1998
In this example 12188 films were printed with the currently installed thermal head.
Note 2:
The date of manufacturing can be found on a label at the thermal head:
91-0005
sequential number
Date of manufacturing: Month (1 = Jan, 2 = Feb, ......, X = Oct., Y= Nov., Z = Dec.)

Year (last digit of the year)
In this example the thermal head was manufactured in January 99.
Make sure not to touch the resistor line of the thermal head !
Removal
• Open the TH compartment at the rear side of the printer; turn the two quick action
closures (a) 90 degrees counter-clockwise, lift the handle (b) and pull it towards you.
Figure 12
Section 6.5 / 10 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
• Disconnect the three cables of the thermal head.

• Temporarily put two screws M4x20 in the lowest hole of the thermal head. Do not tighten
them, they are only needed to prevent the head from falling down when all other screws
are loosened. See Figure 13.
Figure 13
• Close the TH compartment. (Do not lock it)

• Loosen the 4 screws (in the order, 4 -> 1, see Figure 12) of the TH cover, use the long
screw driver delivered with the machine (remove the right cover, the screw driver is
positioned at the right bottom side of the printer).
• The screws are equipped with a captive washer, so it is not necessary to remove the
screws completely.
• Open the TH compartment.
• Loosen and remove the 2 temporary screws on the TH.
• Remove the TH by hand, slide it straight up.
• Do not use tools to remove the TH from the casting to avoid damage
Installation
• Placing one hand at each side, gently slide the thermal head into its positioning holes. DO
NOT FORCE the thermal head, push it gently down. Due to the positioning pins on the TH
it can only be fixed in a well defined position as the pins on each side can only fit in one
hole.
• Temporarily put two screws M4x20 in the lowest hole of the thermal head. Do not tighten
them.
• Close the TH compartment. (Do not lock it)
• Tighten the 4 screws, (in numerical order, 1 -> 4, see Figure 12).
• Open the TH compartment.
• Loosen and remove the 2 temporary screws on the TH.
• Connect the connectors to the TH.
• Clean the glass bulb of the thermal head using a lint free wiping tissue moistened with
isopropanol.
• Close the TH compartment and lock the two quick action closures (a) by turning them 90
degrees CW.
• Adjust the maximum density (refer to section 6.6).
• Perform a film sensitometry (refer to section 6.6).

Replacements
1.5.3 Removal of the AIC1 PCB

• Disconnect the different cables which are attached to the PCB.
• Remove the 2 screws of the power supply (see Figure 14).
• Detach the PCB from the eight clips.
Figure 14
Connect the red wire (=Vth) of the power supply to the outside connector.
Take care not to damage the TH.
1.5.4 Removal of the film positioning unit assembly

• Detach the 5 springs (1).
• Remove two retaining washers of the shaft (2).
• Remove the bronze bushings (3).(see figure 15)
• Replace the assembly.
Figure 15
Section 6.5 / 12 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
1.5.5 Removal of the thermal head fan assembly

• Open the two quick action closures.
• Remove the metal plate (8 screws) from the air flow channel on the TH cover.
• Lift the plate up and remove it.
• Remove the six screws of the transverse current fan and remove it.
• Disconnect the cable.
Position the air flow channel plate well before tightening it onto the TH cover.
Figure 16
1.6 Upper section
1.6.1 Removal sensor S7 (output detection, decurl exit)

• Open the top cover. Remove the left and right cover.
• Remove the protective cover of the decurl unit.
• Remove the plate with the electrostatic brush (2 screws, see Figure 17).
• Remove the sensor and disconnect it from its cabling.
Figure 17
When reinstalling the plate with the electrostatic brush, first push the
sensor of the switch downwards otherwise it will be broken.

Replacements
1.6.2 Removal sensor S11 (output detection, decurl entry)

• Remove the plate with the electrostatic brush (2 screws, see Figure 17).
• Remove two screws (see Figure 18) in order to tip the decurl unit backwards.
• Remove the sensor and disconnect it from its cabling.
Figure 18 Figure 19
1.6.3 Removal of the heating element

• Remove two screws in order to tip the decurl unit backwards.
• Take out 2 screws of the fixture on the left side (see Figure 20).
Figure 20
• Unscrew the ceramic protection cap (1) at the left and right side and remove the fixture on
the left side.
• Use a socket wrench to dismount the nut and lock nut (both sides).
DO NOT use the other side of the heating element to lock the shaft !
• Remove the washers and the cable terminal from the shaft.
• Pull out the heating element.
• Clean the new heating element with alcohol and do not touch it with your bare hands.
Section 6.5 / 14 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
Figure 21
Do not forget to re-install ALL washers !

Tighten the nuts well to avoid the burning in of contacts !
When reassembling, put some silicone paste in the ceramic protection
cap and tighten it manually
1.6.4 Removal of the decurl unit
• Remove the PMC panel at the back.
• Disconnect the P6 and P8 connectors at the PMC board, disconnect the motor M2 cabling,
disconnect the power supply connector of the heating element (at the upper right side).
• Remove the right retaining washer on the front shaft of the decurl unit.
Figure 22
• Remove the left retaining washer on the back shaft of the decurl unit (see Figure 23).
• Slide the unit to the right.
• Tip the unit to the back.
• Slide the unit to the left and lift it upwards out of the printer.
Figure 23

Replacements
1.6.5 Replacing the IR-temperature sensor
The replacement of the IR-temperature sensor is only possible on decurl units where the sensor is
mounted on a holderplate of about 29x58mm!
Tools required:
• Philips screwdriver
• standard screwdriver
• adjustment sleeve for sensor (delivered with EB+53610760 IR-TEMP. SENSOR)
Before replacing the sensor power off the printer!
• Remove the rear plate of the PMC board compartment.
• Remove the E-ring from the position shaft for decurl unit (see Figure 24), and turn the decurl unit
in such a way that you can reach the IR-temp. sensor (see Figure 25).
Figure 24 Figure 25
• Disconnect the IR-temp sensor cable from the PMC board, and remove the cable from the holders
and the holes.
• Loosen the 2 screws of the holder plate (see Figure 26) and remove the holder plate from the
decurl unit.
Section 6.5 / 16 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
Figure 26 Figure 27
• Remove the old sensor from the holder plate, and replace it by the new one and fix this one
preliminary.
• Put the adjustment tool on the head of the sensor (see Figure 27) and put the holder plate against
the sensor plate holes.
• Adjust the sensor with nut 1(see Figure 27) and then tighten the sensor (i.e. lock the position) with
nut 2 until the tool hits the drum of the decurl unit.
• Remove the adjustment tool and mount the holder plate on the sensor plate with the 2 screws.
• Put the cable in the holders and connect the cable on the PMC board.
• Close the decurl unit and put the E-ring on the shaft.
• Mount the rear plate of the PMC board compartment.
1.6.6 Removal of the power supply

• Disconnect the power cable.
• Remove the right cover.
• Unplug the 4 connectors on the power supply (see Figure 28).
Figure 28

Replacements
• Remove the grounding strap on the right bolt (see Figure 28).
• Loosen the 3 screws as indicated on the drawing (see Figure 28).
• Loosen the 10 screws of the VME rack.
• Slide the VME rack out of the printer. Use the handle to pull out the VME rack.
Figure 29
1. Remove the two power cables on the BIO board (see Power connections on Figure 9).
2. Remove power cables on the backplane of the VME rack (see Figure 29).
• Disconnect the TH flat cable from the COS board (see Figure 6).
• Now you can remove the VME rack completely out of the printer.
• Disconnect the power cables on floppy drive and hard disk.
• Remove all power cables from their clamps.
• Loosen the 2 screws at the bottom of the power supply to remove it completely. (see Figure
30)
Figure 30
Section 6.5 / 18 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
Remark: After replacement of the power supply, take care that the nuts and rings on the
grounding bolt are exactly mounted as indicated on the pictogram.
1.6.7 Removal of the power supply EB+53610531 (new version)
• Unplug the mains cable.

• Remove the right hand panel.
• Loosen the 4 plug connections at the power supply, (see figure 28).
Figure 31
• Remove the right hand ground stud (see figure 28).

• Loosen the 3 screws as shown in the illustration (see figure 28).
• Loosen the 10 screws of the VME rack.
• Loosen the plug connection of the cable harness between the power supply and the
VME rack.
• Pull the VME rack out of the printer all the way to the stop.
• Unplug the power supply cable of the harddisk and the floppy drive.
• Unplug the ribbon cable of the thermal head on the COS Board (see Figure 6).
• Now the VME rack can be completely removed from the printer.
• Loosen the two screws at the bottom of the power supply to remove it completely (see
figure 29).
Figure 32
• After replacement of the power supply, please make sure that the nuts and
washers on the grounding stud are mounted as shown on the pictogram on the
machine!.

Replacements
1.7 Right hand side
1.7.1 Exchange of the macrodensitometer
• Open the top cover

• Remove the right panel
• Disconnect cable connections 1, 2*
and 3 and unscrew Philips screws 4,
5 and 6. See Figure 34
• Pull out the MDM gently
5 1
2 4
3 6
536165AV.CDR
Figure 33: *Open cable

Figure 34
connection "2" with a small
screwdriver
• Keep the new MDM in the right hand

for insertion. See Figure 35.
Figure 35
Section 6.5 / 20 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
• With the left hand keep the guide of

the MDM and insert the two pins in
the corresponding holes. See Figure
36.
Figure 36
• Take care that the lever at the film

guide is above the MDM cast angle.
See Figure 37
• Now remount the 3 screws and

reconnect the 3 cables.
536165au.cdr
Figure 37

Replacements
1.7.2 Exchange of the MDM halogen lamp
• Remove the MDM as described in section 1.7.1
• slide the MDM out

• remove the 2 screws that fix the
halogen lamp (Figure 38, 1).
• pull the halogen lamp out of its holder
(Figure 38; 2).
• Insert the new halogen lamp. Use a
piece of cloth for this in order not to
put fingerprints on the lamp.
• Fix it again by the 2 screws.
Figure 38:
• Remount the MDM as described in section 1.7.1
Section 6.5 / 22 Type 5361 19.11.01

Replacements
1.8 Supplemented removal and fitting instructions
1.8.1 Film feed unit: Replacement of the hinges

Required tools:
2 x Open-end wrench, size 13
1 x Phillips screwdriver, medium size
1 x support block (polystyrole or similar), approx. 20 cm high
Removal:
• Press the Unlock key A and tilt
the film feed unit B out, rest it
on the support block C.
• Press the Unlock key A and

fold the upper cover D up for
better accessibility.
Figure 39
• Undo the screw connection of
the shock absorber E by
means of two open-end
wrenches (13 mm). (As a
result the film feed unit can be
moved out further which allows
better access to the screw
connections of the hinges.
• Loosen the screws of the
hinges (7 screws / hinges)
Figure 40
• Fit the new hinges in reverse order.
• Mount the shock absorbers again.
• Move the film feed unit back in.
• Check the function of the cover switch.
Revision 28 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Section 6.5 / 23

Calibrations and adjustments
Section 6 - 6
List of contents
1 What to do table..................................................................................................... 1
2 Adjustments........................................................................................................... 2
2.1 Installing thermal head data.........................................................................................2
2.1.1 Preparation of the TH-return procedure ..........................................................................3
2.2 Update BRAM................................................................................................................3
2.3 Adjustment of the eccentric drum ...............................................................................4
2.4 Adjustment of belt tension and belt tread of the main drive assembly ....................7
2.4.1 Belt tension of toothed belt..............................................................................................8
2.4.2 Belt tension of flat belt.....................................................................................................8
2.4.3 Flat belt tension in machines with toothed belt tensioner ..............................................12
2.4.4 Flat belt guide ...............................................................................................................14
2.5 Horizontal and vertical film alignment.......................................................................15
2.6 Changing the film size................................................................................................19
2.7 Thermal head pressure adjustment...........................................................................23
3 Calibrations.......................................................................................................... 27
3.1 Overview of procedures and calibrations Rel. 1.7X .................................................27
3.2 Overview of procedures and calibrations Rel. 1.9X .................................................27
3.3 Overview of keypad and IMOS service software calibration menus in SW Rel.
1.7X and 1.9X ...............................................................................................................28
3.4 Registration Calibration .............................................................................................29
3.5 Reference Film Calibration.........................................................................................30
3.6 Density Meter Calibration...........................................................................................31
3.7 TH profile calibration ..................................................................................................33
3.8 Maximum density calibration.....................................................................................34
3.8.1 Print SMPTE Testimage ...............................................................................................35
3.9 Film Sensito Calibration .............................................................................................36
Revision 32 Type 5361 Chapter 6.6 / I

1 What to do table
Replacement Adjustment / Calibration Refer to
Thermal Head (1) Installing thermal head data 2.1
(2) Adjustment of the eccentric 2.3
drum
(3) Dmax calibration 3.5
(4) Film sensito calibration 3.6
TH cam assembly (1) TH pressure adjustment 2.7
Print Drum (1) Adjustment of the eccentric 2.3
drum
(2) Belt tension and belt tread 2.4
Main drive assembly (1) Belt tension and belt tread 2.4
Drum motor
Film loading assembly (1) Changing the film size* 2.6
(2) Vertical alignment 2.5
Horizontal alignment assembly (1) Horizontal alignment 2.5
Macrodensitometer (1) Registration Calibration 3.1
(2) Density Meter Calibration 3.3
Gemini CPU (1) Update BRAM 2.2
*only in case 11x14" or 14x14" films are in use
Revision 26 Type 5361 Chapter 6.6 / 1

2 Adjustments
2.1 Installing thermal head data
Please observe:
In following cases you will get 100% refund for returning a defective thermal head:
• in case of less than 15000 films printed with this TH. Refer to note 1.
• in case of less than 14 months since date of manufacturing of the TH. Refer to
note 2.
Note 1:
The number of printed films can be seen in the infocounter (IMOS Drystar 3000:
‘Repair’ → ‘Infocounter’ → ‘View Infocounters’).
4.2 Component reliability:
--------------------------------
total: date:
TH replaced: 12188 09-Apr-1998
In this example 12188 films were printed with the currently installed thermal head.
Note 2:
The date of manufacturing can be found on a label at the thermal head:
91-0005
sequential number
Date of manufacturing: Month (1 = Jan, 2 = Feb, ......, X = Oct., Y= Nov., Z = Dec.)

Year (last digit of the year)
In this example the thermal head was manufactured in January 99.
Required for the adjustment:

- IMOS Drystar 3000
- New and old TH floppy.
• Connect a service Notebook to the Drystar 3000 and switch it on
• Start IMOS Drystar 3000.
• Select REPAIR → PRINT ENGINE → MODULES → THERMAL HEAD.
• Click the INSTALL button and follow the instructions.
Note: In case the Thermal Head is less than 14 months old or printed less than 15.000 films,
prepare the TH return procedure as described in 2.1.1.
• further adjustments and calibrations to be carried out as described in "What to do table" on

page 1.
Chapter 6.6 / 2 Type 5361 Revision 26

2.1.1 Preparation of the TH-return procedure

In case the following requirements are fulfilled 100% refund for the TH will be given:
The defective thermal head has been produced since less than 14 months or has
printed less than 15.000 films (refer to 2.1)
The label on the TH is filled out.
A film with the image fault is enclosed

The original thermal head floppy is enclosed
Send the package with the thermal head (label filled out), film with image fault and original
thermal head floppy to:
Agfa – Gevaert AG
LOG - TR
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D-81539 München, Germany
2.2 Update BRAM

• Select in IMOS Drystar 3000: REPAIR → PRINT ENGINE → MODULES → BATTERY RAM.
• Click the UPDATE BRAM button.
• Follow the instructions.

2.3 Adjustment of the eccentric drum

Required tools:
• Service Notebook with IMOS Start and IMOS Drystar 3000 Software
• All the adjustments of eccentric bearings must be made on both sides of the print
drum.
• In every process step two test films are made. For evaluation of the test results,
however, only the second film is taken. The first film is only used for checking the
stability of the printing process.
• Print the test films via the Service Notebook (testfilm = further TF)
• Ensure that both eccentric bearings are in position "0“! (See Figure 1)
Figure 1
• Start the IMOS Service Software on the Service Position 0

Notebook and produce 2 test films of the test image
FLAT3002.bla by entering <Repair>, <Printengine>, 1 2
536166T1.CDR
<Print Test Image>.
= Testfilm 1
• Adjust both eccentric bearings on position "-0.13“. Position -0.13
• Make another 2 films of the test image 1 2

536166T2.CDR
FLAT3002.bla.
= Testfilm 2
• Adjust both eccentric bearings on position "+0.13“. Position +0.13
• Make another 2 films of the test image 1 2

536166T3.CDR
FLAT3002.bla
= Testfilm 3
• Determine which test film (TF 1, TF 2, TF 3) has the least visible stripes and the darkest
image impression.
Homogeneity and highest density have equal priority criteria.

However, evaluation is always a subjective judgement, there are no defined values
for evaluation.

Testfilm 2 Y
= best result 536166TA.CDR
• Set both eccentric bearings on the value "-0.07".

• Make another 2 films of the test image FLAT3002.bla
• Afterwards adjust the eccentric bearings on "-0.2“

Position -0.07 Position -0.2
1 2 1 2
536166T4.CDR
536166T5.CDR
= Testfilm 4 = Testfilm 5
Testfilm 3 Y
= best result 536166TB.CDR
• Set both eccentric bearings on the value "+0.07".

• Afterwards adjust the eccentric bearings on "+0.2“

Position +0.07 Position +0.2
1 2 1 2
536166T6.CDR
536166T7.CDR

Testfilm 1 Y
= best result 536166TC.CDR
• Set both eccentric bearings on the value "+0.07".

• Afterwards adjust eccentric bearings on "-0.07“

Position +0,07 Position -0,07
1 2 1 2
536166T8.CDR
536166T9.CDR
• Always depending on the best position compare:

TF 4 and TF 5 with TF 2
• Adjust the eccentric drum according to the following table:

Best test film Adjustment value for the eccentric drum
TF 1 0
TF 2 - 0.13
TF 3 + 0.13
TF 4 - 0.07
TF 5 - 0.2
TF 6 + 0.07
TF 7 + 0.2
TF 8 + 0.07
TF 9 - 0.07
• Note the adjustment value on the provided sticker on the thermal print head.
• Mount the right hand and left hand panels again.
• Now the modification is completed and the device is ready for operation.

2.4 Adjustment of belt tension and belt tread of the main drive assembly
After replacement of the drum, drum motor, worn belts or any other part of the main drive
assembly it will be necessary to carry out the following adjustments:
Machine serial numbers Adjustment Description in chapter
5750, 5752, 5754 to 5761 • Flat belt tension • 2.4.3

≥ 5763 • Flat belt running askew • 2.4.4
< 5763 (except 5750, 5752, • Toothed belt tension • 2.4.1

5754 to 5761) • Flat belt tension • 2.4.2
• Flat belt running askew • 2.4.4
The slightest modification of one of the three adjustments mentioned

above will automatically influence the other two. As a consequence, it is
recommended to re-check continuously the three adjustments when
modifying one of them.
Drum motor
Drum
Flat belt
Stiffening plate
Bearing bush
Timing belt
Flat belt pulley Timing belt pulley
Figure 2

Tools needed to carry out the adjustments:

• crosshead screwdriver Philips size 2,
• special tool for carrying out the drum torque measurement,
• torque spanner with screw head size 13.
2.4.1 Belt tension of toothed belt
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:

• loosen the 4 screws (see Figure 4) that fix the bearing bush to the stiffening plate as well as
the locking screw (see Figure 3),
Tread adjusting
screw
Bearing bush
Locking screw
Figure 3
• press down slightly the timing belt pulley (see figure 2) with one hand, do not press too hard
in order to avoid the belt tension of being too tight, approx. 1.3 kg,
Do not use a lever to press down the pulley.!
• with the other hand, tighten up the 4 screws of the bearing bush,
• screw tight the locking screw to the stiffening plate, but do not tighten too hard!
2.4.2 Belt tension of flat belt
Required tools:
• Service Notebook with IMOS Start 4.09 (or higher) and IMOS Drystar 3000 Software ≥
rev. 2.19.
Note: In case IMOS Drystar 3000 Software ≥ rev. 2.19 is not available (e.g. usage of IMOS
Drystar 2.05) or the machine has device software < release 1.40 installed, refer to section
2.4.2.1 page 10.

Figure 4
The flat belt tension can be adjusted by turning the reinforcement (stiffening plate) on which
the intermediate shaft of the flat belt pulley is mounted. The stiffening plate can be turned
around one of its fixing points (pivoting point) by loosening or tightening the adjusting screw
(see Figure 4). (The toothed belt pulley is not shown.)
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:

• loosen slightly the 4 screws fixing the stiffening plate just enough to allow the plate to pivot
• Start IMOS Drystar 3000 and connect to the printer. Select REPAIR → PRINT ENGINE →
MODULES → DRUM.
• Perform a measurement of the torque of the drum motor to define the belt tension. To do
so, block the turning of the drum pulley with a screw driver (see Figure 7) press on TORQUE.
In the next window press on START (See Figure 6)
• Turn at the adjusting screw (clockwise corresponds to higher torque), until the value 2.40 ±
0.1 is reached. This value corresponds to the correct torque.

Figure 5 Figure 6
Figure 7
Note: Blocking the belt pulley by means of a screwdriver.
Avoid the motor to run for a longer period than 5 min. at such a low speed
since the temperature of several electronic components on the PMC-print
could become too high.
• Press cancel to leave the adjustment screen

• Tighten the 4 screws for fixing the stiffening plate
2.4.2.1 Adjustment with IMOS Drystar < 2.19 or device SW < rel. 1.40
• loosen slightly the 4 screws fixing the stiffening plate just enough to allow the plate to pivot
• Cut one of the wires of the drum motor and connect the wire again by putting a multimeter
in between so that the current can be measured.
• Start IMOS Drystar 3000 and connect to the printer. Select TOOLS → TERMINAL
• Perform a measurement of the current of the drum motor to define the belt tension. To do
so, start a terminal emulation session via IMOS à Tools à Terminal and type
mon res <Enter>
at message "AOS started" press <ENTER>
T14 <CR>
MS <CR> and wait until the message “Command terminated” is displayed. Then type

M1 <CR> (for activating the drum motor)

1 <CR> (for putting it on)
1 <CR> (for turning backwards)
500 (for a speed of 500µm/s)
DO NOT YET PUSH THE RETURN KEY.
• Block the drum pulley (see Figure 7) and press the RETURN key.
• Measure the current. It should be 2400 +/- 200 mA. If not in this range use the set screw of
the driving assembly to adapt the current value: Turning clockwise corresponds to a higher
current.
• Leave the T14 program (M1 <ENTER>; 0 <ENTER>, quit <ENTER>)
• Remove the multimeter.
• Solder the wire ends of the drum motor and isolate them with isolating tape
• Tighten the 4 screws for fixing the stiffening plate

2.4.3 Flat belt tension in machines with toothed belt tensioner

Required tools:
• Service Notebook with IMOS Start 4.09 (or higher) and IMOS Drystar 3000 Software
≥ Rev. 2.19.
The tension of the flat belt can be adjusted by turning the stiffening plate where the
intermediate shaft of the flat belt pulley is connected. The stiffening plate can turned around
one of its fixing points (pivoting point) by loosening or tightening the adjusting screw (see
Figure 8). The toothed belt pulley is not shown.
Locking screw bearing bush
Hinge point
Stiffening plate
Fixing screw for Fixing screws

flat belt pulley bearing bush
Left main side panel
Adjusting screw for

flat belt tension
Locking screw
bearing bush
Locking screw bearing bush
536166ba.cdr
Figure 8
For the adjustment proceed as follows:

• Slacken the 4 screws fixing the stiffening plate ("locking screw bearing bush" and "hinge
point") slightly, only until the plate is slightly loose.
• Start the IMOS Drystar 3000 and connect the Service Notebook with the printer. Activate
the functions REPAIR → PRINT ENGINE → MODULES → DRUM.
• Measure the drum torque to define the belt tension. To do so, block the turning drum belt
pulley with a screwdriver (see Figure 11)
• Press on TORQUE, and press on START in the next window (see Figure 10)
• Turn the adjusting screw (clockwise turning increases the torque), until the value 2.40 ± 0.1
is obtained. This value corresponds to the correct value.
The motor must not run for more than 5 min in this slow speed since
otherwise the temperature of some electronic components on the PMC
Board increases to far.

Figure 9 Figure 10
Figure 11
Note: Block the belt pulley by means of a screwdriver.
• Press CANCEL to leave the adjustment screen.

• Tighten the 4 screws to fix the position of the stiffening plate.

2.4.4 Flat belt guide
Prior to the adjustment and also during the adjustment of the belt guide check if the belt on the
belt pulley runs off towards the outside or towards the inside. This mist be checked while the
drum motor (M1) runs at printing speed. The guide is adjusted by means of the adjusting
screw at the bearing bush inside the machine (track adjustment) (see Figure 3).
During the adjustment of the flat belt track the belt tension may be influenced. Therefore we
recommend to do this adjustment step by step and always check the belt tension in-between
to make sure it remains constant (correct).
For the adjustment proceed as follows:

• Loosen the 4 screws which fix the stiffening plate (see Figure 8).
• Start the drum motor (M1) with print speed (IMOS à Repair à Print Engine à Modules à
Drum …) and check in which direction the belt runs off.
• Stop the motor again.
• Adjust the track. If the belt runs towards the outside, away from the side panel, then the
track adjustment screw at the bearing bush must be turned to clockwise (see Figure 3).
If the belt runs towards the inside, in the direction of the side panel, place the adjusting
screw on the back of the bearing bush (not visible in Figure 8) and turn it clockwise.
• Tighten the 4 fixing screws of the stiffening plate again.
• Start the drum motor again and use a screwdriver to push the flat belt back into the middle
of the belt pulley.
• Check if the track is now correct. If necessary, repeat the adjustment several times. The
adjustment may be considered correct if the belt runs for approx. 5 min at a distance of
approx. 1 mm of the edge of the belt pulley.
• Check if the tension of the flat belt still corresponds to the value prior to the adjustment.

2.5 Horizontal and vertical film alignment

Horizontal alignment
To position a printed image horizontally on a sheet, the sheet has to be repositioned under the
TH until the correct position has been reached.
The printed image is made by the TH and the TH-position cannot be adjusted in the casting.
Figure 12
The displacement of the sheet under the TH can be done with the horizontal film alignment
assembly. This assembly is adjustable between the two side panels of the printer.

To perform a horizontal (and vertical) alignment, a test print is needed to visualize the
deviation. Before making this proof print, check the sheet feeder and put not more than 5
sheets in the feeder. Measure the margin of the printed image at the first printed rows.
Measure the left and right margin.
Calculate the difference between the measured results. Divide the result by two.
The remaining value gives the necessary displacement of the sheet to obtain a centered
image on the sheet. e.g.:
• Left margin = 6,2; right margin 2,4
• Difference 6,2 - 2,4 = 3,8
• Displacement 3,8 : 2 = 1,9
The sheet has to be displaced 1,9 mm to the right in order to center the image on the sheet.
Figure 13
The notch of the sheet is at the right lower side of the printer. In this example, the sheet has to
be displaced 1,9 mm to the right. This means that the alignment assembly has to be displaced
1,9 mm to the right.

Remove the side covers. To locate the adjusting screw and the securing point of the assembly
on the side panels, refer to Figure 14, item 1.
Figure 14
• First measure the distance (SGD) between the edge of the alignment assembly and the
edge of the fixture with a slide gauge. E.g.:
• In the previous example the assembly had to be displaced 1,9 mm to the right. If the
distance (SGD) is 2 mm (see Figure 15), the distance (SGD) after the adjustment has to be
2 - 1,9 = 0,1 mm.
• Loosen the 2 screws (see figure 8, item 1) and displace the alignment assembly to the right
position.
• Tighten the 2 screws.
• Make a proof print and control the left and right margin.
Figure 15

Vertical alignment
The adjustment mechanism which aligns the front edge of the print with the front edge of the
sheet is located in the sheet feeder. This mechanism allows the displacement/rotation of the
sheet edge with regard to the TH print line (see Figure 19). The adjustment can be made by
means of 2 set screws (see Figure 17), which are located at the left and right side of the load
system.
Figure 16
One turn of the set screw corresponds with a displacement of ± 0,7 mm. When turning the set
screw clockwise the sheet will be adjusted upwards, the white margin at the top of the printed
sheet becomes bigger. Turning counter clockwise lowers the sheet and the white margin at the
top becomes smaller.
Figure 17
Normally the white top margin should be 5 mm on a normal sheet, printed from an almost
empty sheet feeder. Because the real sheet length has a tolerance of ± 0,8 mm with regard to
the nominal sheet length, the adjustment has to be made from the lower edge of the sheet.
Format Nominal length Adjustment distance regarding to the

lower sheet edge [mm] (see figure 9)
14"x17" 17“ ≈ 429.7 mm 424.7 ±0.2
14"x14" 14“ ≈ 354.0 mm 349 ± 0.2
14"x11" 11“ ≈ 278.6 mm 273.6 ± 0.2

The white top margin increases with about ± 0.8 mm between a completely filled sheet feeder
and an almost empty feeder, the proof print has to be made with maximum 5 sheets in the
sheet feeder.
Measure the white top margin on the proof print, as well on the left as on the right side (See
Figure 16)
Calculate the difference between the measured results. E.g.
• Left side 426,6 - 424,7 = 1,9 mm

• Right side 424,5 - 424,7 = -0,2 mm
• The left side must raise over 1,9 mm, so turn the left set screw CW over ± 2,7 turns.
• The right side must lower over 0,2 mm, so turn the right set screw CCW over ± 0,3 turns.
• Make a proof print and check the top margin.
2.6 Changing the film size
• Remove the remaining film.
• Loosen the screw (2) on both sides of the film loading assembly as indicated on Figure 18.
Figure 18
• Slide both sides parallel and smoothly into the new position in order to keep the plastic
hooks (see Figure 19) horizontal. It is possible that the shaft between the stops falls down if
the assembly is not moved horizontally. In that case the cover has to be removed in order
to reinstall the shaft.

Figure 19
• Remove the three screws of the slide bar on the left and right side of the cover. (See 1 on
Figure 18)
• Take care that the film loading assembly doesn’t fall but bring it gently into horizontal
position. Don’t put any weight on the film loading assembly as it is only hold by the hinges.
• Remove the cable to sensor S4.
• Loosen the three screws that fix the 3 pins onto the pressure plate. The position of these
pins depends on the installed film size. (See Figure 21)
• Remove the pressure plate.
• Loosen the two Allen screws (2,5 mm) on each of the positioning brackets and put them in
the new position (Figure 20)
Figure 20
• Position the spring holders, pins and springs for the new film format on the pressure plate
according to Figure 21.

Figure 21

Remarks:
Þ The spring holder can be removed by pushing it from the rear to the front side. On the
rear side 3 clips should be pushed towards the center.
Þ For the 14x14” one small spring is not used and for the 14x11” one small and one large
spring are not used. Keep them in a safe place in case you need them again.
• Install the pressure plate to the rear plate by fixing the three screws in the pins
• Connect the cable sensor S4.
• Fix the sliding bars on each side with the three screws.
• Use the IMOS service software: Install à defaults and click “Client” and the appropriate film
format to install the correct parameters.
• Print a test film and check if the vertical alignment is correct and align it if necessary (See
Horizontal and vertical film alignment).

2.7 Thermal head pressure adjustment
Note: this adjustment has to be carried out after replacement or dismounting the
TH Cam assembly
Before carrying out the pressure adjustment the Drystar must be placed in its start-up
condition:
• acceptor film fed in,
• separation and outlining completed,
• thermal head in home position (completely backwards),
• pressure rollers on the drum in home position (completely backwards).
In order to have easy access to the components, the left and right cover and the rear panel
must be removed.
The following tools and accessories are needed to carry out the adjustment:
• crosshead screwdriver Philips size 2 (length approx. 200 mm),

• spanner size 10,
and the tool kit EB+53611750

• 2 x synthetic ring,
• 2 x bolt with wing nut,
• 2 x pin,
• 2 x steel cable,
• 2 x dynamometer 0 -10 kg,
• 2 x adapter with deep groove ball bearing,
• seal wax
When the machine is in start-up condition and the covers and panels are removed, start
assembling and installing the two measuring tools (one on each side of the machine). Proceed
as follows (see Figure 22):
• place the synthetic ring in the hole on top of the main side plate,
• insert the bolt in the ring and fix it with the wing nut, make sure that the bolt is screwed
down as far as possible,
• fix the dynamometer to the bolt,
• screw the pin into the threaded stud on the aluminum casting element which appears
through the opening in the main side plate,
From now on it is impossible to open the thermal head compartment.
• screw the adapter with the deep groove ball bearing into the threaded hole provided on the
main side plate approx. 4 cm from the threaded stud (to the rear),
• take the steel cable, attach it to the pin, guide it in the deep groove ball bearing and hook it
on the dynamometer,

• install the same measuring tool on the other side of the Drystar.
Bolt
Wing screw
Synthetic ring
Main side panel
Dynamometer
Adapter with deep

groove ball bearing
Steel cable
Pin
Sand casting element
Figure 22
The Drystar is now ready for adjustment, proceed as follows:
• put the thermal head in pre-print position, (refer to the IMOS - menu: Repair -> Printengine -
> Modules -> Printhead)
*In IMOS Drystar 3000 version 2.19 the motor can

not be controlled due to a software error
Cure:
1) Open a terminal window (IMOS à tools à
terminal).
2) As shown in Figure 24 enter the commands
"can", "m3" and "3". Then the motor drives into the
"preprint position".
Figure 23

• check that the thermal head touches the inserted film. Tap with your finger tops on the
aluminum casting element, to check that the aluminum casting element does not move. It is
possible to access the rear of the aluminum casting element when the rear panel of the
Drystar is removed,
• start turning both wing screws alternatively and clockwise so that the dynamometers pull
the thermal head away from the drum. Tap with your finger tops on the rear of the
aluminum casting element to determine the exact point where the thermal head detaches
from the drum. As soon as the thermal head detaches, the casting element will swing
slightly on its springs,
• read the thermal head pressure on the dynamometers. The optimum pressure is 5.3 kg on
each side ± 5%. It is important that both dynamometers read the same value,
adjust and equilibrate the pressure on both sides of the thermal head. Turn the M6 screws
provided under the hand grip at the rear with the cross head screwdriver, clockwise to
increase the pressure, and anti-clockwise to decrease the pressure.
Figure 24

• remove the measuring tools and secure the M6 adjusting screws. Tighten up the lock nut
M6 against the hinge plate and secure it with seal wax.
To avoid the adjusting nut from moving when tightening the lock nut, retain it with the cross
head screwdriver. To do this it is necessary to open first the hinged part of the thermal head
and put the thermal head back in pre-print position. (refer to the IMOS - menu: Repair ->
Printengine -> Modules -> Printhead)*
*In IMOS Drystar 3000 version 2.19 the motor can

not be controlled due to a software error
Cure:
1) Open a terminal window (IMOS à tools à
terminal).
2) As shown in Figure 24 enter the commands
"can", "m3" and "2". Then the motor drives into the
"home position".
Figure 25
Figure 26

3 Calibrations
The calibrations procedures in SW Rel. 1.7X and 1.9X differ in details. The two tables below list these differences. They also show, where to find detailed information to the calibration.
3.1 Overview of calibrations and related procedures SW Rel. 1.7X

PROCEDURE / DESCRIPTION AUTO- DEFAULT CONFIRM START CONFIG BY CONFIG BY DEFAULT MANUAL START MANUAL START BY refer to
CALIBRATION MATIC BY OPERATOR OPERATOR SERVICE via NVE BY OPERATOR SERVICE via IMOS section
TH Profile Correct the thermal head profile No Yes Yes 3.7
Film sensito Correct for the sensitometry of the film No Yes Yes 3.9
Maximum Set the Dmax to default (=3.0) No Yes Yes 3.8
density
Film to film Correct for density drift Yes ON No No ON/OFF (4) Off No No
Registration Reduces mechanical mis-registration of the No Yes Yes 3.4
MDM
Reference film Determines new reference values for the No Yes Yes 3.5
MDM
Density Meter Calibrate MDM sensitivity No Yes Yes 3.6
3.2 Overview of calibrations and related procedures SW Rel. 1.9X

PROCEDURE / DESCRIPTION AUTO- DEFAULT CONFIRM START CONFIG BY CONFIG BY DEFAULT MANUAL START MANUAL START BY refer to
CALIBRATION MATIC BY OPERATOR OPERATOR SERVICE via NVE BY OPERATOR SERVICE via IMOS section
Clean TH * Stop printing to allow cleaning of TH Display 1000 films No ON/OFF/NUM On Yes No
Warning (1)
TH profile Correct the thermal head profile Display 5000 films No ON/OFF/NUM On Yes Yes 3.7
Warning (2)
Film sensito Correct for the sensitometry of the film Yes New film pack No ON/OFF ON/OFF On Yes Yes 3.9
(100 films) (3)
Film to film Correct for density drift Yes OFF No ON/OFF ON/OFF Off No No
(4)
Registration Reduces mechanical mis-registration of the No No Yes 3.4
MDM
Reference Determines new reference values for the No No Yes 3.5
MDM
MDM Calibrate MDM sensitivity No No Yes 3.6
(1) DR3XXX11 parameter 'th_clean_print'. Period for automatic 'TH cleaning' message is expressed in a number of print-outs. Entering zero ('0') disables this message. Default 1000.
(2) DR3XXX11 parameter 'th_profile_prin': Period for automatic 'TH profile calibration' message is expressed in a number of print-outs. Entering zero ('0') disables this (semi-) automatic calibration. Default 5000.
(3) DR3XXX11 parameter 'sensito_mode'. Enables/Disables the automatic sensitometric calibration in case a new film package is inserted after 'empty magazine' message. Entering zero ('0') disables this automatic
calibration. Default 1 (enabled).
(4) DR3XXX11 parameter 'edge_scan': When set to '1', this enables the 'film to film calibration', when set to '0' disables the 'film to film calibration'. Default 1 for SW 1.7X and 0 for SW 1.9X
*When message 'need TH cleaning' appears on the local display after 1000 printed films the customer has to do the TH cleaning procedure via the local keypad (menu 5: calibration - 3: cleaning TH) as described
in reference user manual page 116. Just opening the TH door and clean the TH (without entering the 'clean TH' menu) will not reset the message.

3.3 Overview of keypad and IMOS service software calibration menus in SW Rel. 1.7X and 1.9X
The three figures enclosed show where to find the calibrations on the local keypad and in IMOS Drystar 3000 (rev. ³ 2.19). The table enclosed explains the different calibration sub-menus.
? ESC ? ESC
ERROR ERROR
5x 5x
ENTER ENTER
Status: ?
ERROR
ESC Status: ?
ERROR
ESC
SW Rel. 1.7 SW Rel. 1.9
ENTER ENTER
? ESC ? ESC
ERROR ERROR
ENTER ENTER
? ESC ? ESC
ERROR ERROR
ENTER ENTER
explanation see table 1

536166AQ.CDR explanation see table 1 536166BQ.CDR
Figure 27: Calibrations at local keypad with SW Rel. 1.7X Figure 28: Calibrations at local keypad with SW Rel. 1.9X
Select: REPAIR - PRINTENGINE - MODULES - MDM Calibrations Menu Description

1. Show calibration · Show the status of the current calibration:
"Last calibration okay" or
"Calibration disabled" or
"Default calibration" (= defaults used)
· Date of last calibration
536166AR.CDR
explanation see table 1 · Number of passes since last calibration

2. Calibrate · Carry out the selected calibration.
536166AX.CDR
3. Restore previous · Restore the previous calibration data of the selected calibration. A backup of
these data is always stored on the C: partition of the hard disk.
4. Restore defaults · Restore the default calibration data of the selected calibration. The default
calibration data are always stored on the C: partition of the hard disk.
5. Mode · Change the calibration mode (manual or automatic). Only available as of
SW Rel. 1.9X
6. Exit · Exit this menu
Figure 29: Calibrations via IMOS Drystar 3000 Table 1

3.4 Registration Calibration

In this section the prerequisite, the procedure and the corresponding test image for the function
"registration calibration" is described.
For more information where to find the function at the local keypad or in IMOS refer to page 28.
For more information to the purpose and when to be performed refer to section 5,
Macrodensitometer film calibrations.
With SW Rel. 1.9X the menu 'Registration calibration' is not offered anymore at the
local keypad.
To find out the installed software, select on the local keypad menu
'4. Printer Info - 3. Software Version'.
Prerequisite How to carry out Test image printed

· SW rel. 1.6 or (1) Select "registration
higher has to be calibration" as described
installed. on page 28.
· Blue or clear base (2) Select "Calibrate".
film has to be (3) Wait for approx. 3
inserted. minutes. Now the test film
(see beneath) is printed
and measured by the
MDM.
The calibration data are
automatically processed.
536110AO.CDR
(4) At message "completed"
press "ESC" to get back to
the previous menu.

3.5 Reference Film Calibration

In this section the prerequisite and the procedure for the function "reference film" is described.
With SW Rel. 1.9X the menu 'Reference film' is not offered anymore at the local
keypad.
Prerequisite How to carry out Test image

printed
· SW rel. 1.6. or (1) Measure and note down the density of the 22 none
higher has to be different squares on the MDM calibration film.
installed.
· Blue or clear base
film has to be
536110AK.CDR
inserted.
· An external
densitometer for
(2) Select "reference film" as described on page 28.
measurement is
needed. (3) Select "Calibrate".
· The MDM (4) Select "Change density" (i.e. press ENTER at the
calibration film local keypad).
(inside left printer (5) With the arrow key alter the densities as just
panel) is needed. measured. With the enter key go to next density.
ENTER to go to next density s
to alter the densitie
536166AS.CDR
allowed limits for this step

(6) At message "completed" press "ESC" to get back to
the previous menu.

3.6 Density Meter Calibration

In this section the prerequisite and the procedure for the function "Density meter" is described.
With SW Rel. 1.9X the menu 'Density Meter Calibration ' is not offered anymore at
the local keypad.
Prerequisite How to carry out Test image

printed
· SW rel. 1.6. or (1) Insert the film as described in Figure 30: none
higher has to be Preparations for MDM calibration film insertion and
installed. Figure 31: Correct insertion of MDM calibration film
· Blue or clear base
film has to be
inserted.
536110AK.CDR
· The MDM
calibration film
(inside left printer
(2) Select "density meter" as described on page 28.
panel) is needed.
(3) Select "Calibrate".
(4) At message "completed" press "ESC" to get back to
the previous menu.
(5) Remove the calibration film.
1
Preparations for MDM calibration film
insertion
(1) open top cover
(2) open lid
2 (3) remove left and right panel
(4) get MDM calibration film (located in the
left panel)
536166AV.CDR
Figure 30: Preparations for MDM calibration film insertion

Correct insertion of MDM calibration film:
Sideview
Film-
Carrier
Film
MDM Guide
not okay okay
536110AK.CDR
536166au.cdr
Figure 31: Correct insertion of MDM calibration film
All covers have to be closed before the calibration is started.

Daylight influences the measurement.

3.7 TH profile calibration

In this section the prerequisite and the procedure for the function "TH profile" is described.
It is recommended to clean the TH before this procedure. Refer to section 12,

maintenance instructions.

· SW rel. 1.6. or (1) Select "TH profile" as
higher has to be described on page 28.
installed. (2) Select "Calibrate".
· Blue or clear base (3) Wait for approx. 3
film has to be minutes. Now the test film
inserted. (see beneath) is printed
· Registration and measured by the
calibration has to MDM. The calibration data
be performed are automatically
before (refer to processed.
section 3.4, page (4) Check the printed film for
29).
536110AI.CDR
dust artifacts at the bottom
side (lower 3 cm). In case
of dust artifacts the
measurement was wrong
and has to be repeated.
(5) At message "completed"
press "ESC" a few times
to get out of the user
menu.
(6) Print a flatfield: IMOS
Drystar 3000: "Repair ®
PrintEngine ® Print
Testpage ® flat001.bla
(7) In case the flatfield shows
acceptable uniformity the
calibration is finished.
Otherwise repeat the TH
profile calibration up to 2
times.

3.8 Maximum density calibration
In this section the prerequisite and the procedure for the function "Maximum density" is
described.
For more information to where to find the function at the local keypad or in IMOS refer to page 28.
With SW Rel. 1.9X the menu 'Maximum Density' is not offered anymore at the local
keypad. In SW Rel. 1.9X it is part of the 'Film sensito' calibration.

· SW rel. 1.6. or (1) Select "Maximum density" as
· An external (3) Wait for approx. 1 minute. Now the
densitometer for test film (see beneath) is printed.
measurement is (4) Measure the densities of the 9
needed. squares, and enter the lowest one.
(5) In case the max. density variations
of the test film are > 0.2 O.D.,
536110AF.CDR
perform a TH profile calibration Densities, to be measured
first. Refer to section 3.7 page 33.
Otherwise proceed as described
here.
(6) Select Enter to confirm

(7) At message "completed" press
"ESC" a few times to get out of the
user menu.
(8) Now print a SMPTE test image and
check the image quality. Refer to
3.8.1 next page.

3.8.1 Print SMPTE Testimage

· After Maximum Density Calibration print an SMPTE test image for to check the printer
calibrations:
? ESC
ERROR
1
ENTER
3x
Dmax
Dmin ? ESC
ERROR
2
ENTER
95% ? ESC
100% 3
ERROR
0% ENTER
5%
? ESC
ERROR
4
ENTER
536166AY.CDR
1x
Figure 32: Check SMPTE test image
? ESC
ERROR
· Check Dmax. It has to be 3.0 ± 0.2 O.D. If 5

outside limits, print 4 more films, and ENTER
measure the 5th again. At huge deviations up

to 5 films are necessary to adapt the TH wait ca. 2 minutes
power for Dmax of 3.0 O.D. If still outside 3x
limits refer to section 6.3, Troubleshooting, ?
ERROR
ESC
6
symptom "Dmax too high or too low".
ENTER
· Check Dmin: It has to be 0.2 ± 0.07 O.D. If 536110AB.CDR

outside limits refer to section 6.3
Troubleshooting, symptom "Dmin too high". Figure 33: Print SMPTE testimage at the
local keypad.
· Check fields 5/0% and 95/100%. The
difference must be visible. If not, a sensito
calibration has to be performed. Refer to
section 3.9 page 36.

3.9 Film Sensito Calibration
In this section the prerequisite and the procedure for the function "Film sensito" is described.
For more information to where to find the function at the local keypad or in IMOS refer to page 28.
With SW Rel. 1.9X the function 'Film Sensito Calibration' includes the Dmax
calibration.
Prerequisite How to carry out Testimage printed

· SW rel. 1.6. or (1) Select "Film Sensito" as
· Blue or clear base (3) Wait for approx. 3 minute.
film has to be Now the test film (see
inserted. beneath) is printed and
· Dmax has to be in automatically measured.
the range of 3.0 ± (4) At message "completed"
0.2 O.D. press "ESC" to get back to
the previous menu.
536110AE.CDR
Note for sensito calibration with SW Rel. 1.9X:
In case the reached Dmax level after a film sensito calibration is below the target Dmax
(target Dmax = 3.10), a warning message is displayed 'Dmax= X.YZ'.
In this case a new film sensito calibration is recommended. In case the target Dmax cannot be
reached, printing can continue nevertheless.

DD+DIS084.97E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
Section 7
Table of contents
1 COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................1

1.1 Front view .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Side view, right.................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Side view, left .................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 Back view........................................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Thermal head..................................................................................................................... 5
1.6 VME rack ............................................................................................................................ 6
1.7 CPU..................................................................................................................................... 7
1.8 Designation........................................................................................................................ 8
2 WIRING DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................9

1 COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION
1.1 Front view

Reference and Circuit Diagrams DD+DIS161.98E
1.2 Side view, right

1.3 Side view, left

1.4 Back view

1.5 Thermal head

1.6 VME rack
* Option

1.7 CPU

1.8 Designation
24 MB RAM board page 7 S14 Ambient (drum) temperature page 1
AIC1 AIC1-Board page 5 sensor (DTS board)
AFR2* AFR2-Board page 6 S15 TH temperature sensor (1) page 5
BER BER1 Board page 7 S16 TH temperature sensor (2) page 5
BIO3 BIO3-Board page 6 S17 TH temperature sensor (3) page 5
COS1 COS1-Board page 6 S18 TH temperature sensor (4) page 5
CPU GEMINI CPU page 6 S19 TH temperature sensor (5) page 5
and 7 S20 VME temperature sensor page 6
Decurl fuses page 4 (DTS board)
DSH1 DSH1-Board page 2 S21 Drum speed detection (A) page 1
DTS1 DTS1-Board (S20) page 6 S22 Drum speed detection (B) page 1
DTS1 DTS1-Board (S14) page 1 S23 Decurl speed detection (A) page 3
E1 Locking solenoid page 1 S26 Film speed detection (take page 2
E2 Sheet alignment solenoid page 4 over)
F1 Thermal head fan page 5 S27* Mobile lock detection 1
F2 VME fan page 6 S28* Mobile lock detection 2
F3 Power supply fan page 4 SW1 Safety switch (thermal head) page 4
Floppy disk holder page 1 SW2 Safety switch (stacker) page 2
GEMINI CPU page 6 SW3 Saftey switch (feeder) page 1
and 7 SW4 Decurl overheating protection page 1
KEY3 Key 3 Board page 1 SW5 Decurl jam clearance switch page 3
M1 Drum motor page 3 SWB2* Switch Board page 6
M2 Decurl motor page 3 TH Thermal head (heating line) page 5
M3 TH positioning motor page 5 VSI* Video Synops Interface page 6
M4 Pick up motor page 1
M5 Sheet take over motor page 3 * Option
M6 MDM scan motor page 2
M8 Vertical alignment motor page 2
M9* Mobile locking motor
MAU2 MAU2-Board page 6
MDM1 MDM1-Board page 2
MFRI* MFR1 Interface Board page 6
NIP NIP Board page 7
PMC1 PMC1-Board page 4
S0 Power ON/OFF switch page 3
S1 TH home position sensor page 5
S2 TH pre-print position sensor page 5
S3 TH print position sensor page 5
S4 Empty film magazine detection page 1
S5 MDM home detection page 2
S6 Film detection (29 (take over page 1
entry)
S7 Film detection (4) (decurl exit) page 1
S8 Gear ratio adjustment sensor page 3
S9 Leading edge detection page 4
S10 Film output detection from page 4
drum
S11 Output detection (decurl entry) page 1
S12 Film speed detection (pick up) page 1
S13 Decurl temperature sensor page 1

2 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS405.04M
Drystar 3000
Type Type 5361
Edition 1, Revision 40
3000
TAR
YS
DR
Internal update: 7
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
07-2007 printed in Germany

Document Node ID: 13721874
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS405.04M Spare Parts List
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair
or maintenance task on the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions"
and on the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.

• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com

Edition 1, Revision 40 Drystar 3000 Chapter 8 / 2

07-2007 Type 5361/0999
Type 5361 Agfa Company Confidential
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous version 1.39
Revision Date
1.40 07-2007 Spare Parts List completely revised


07-2007 Type 5361/0999
Contents
VERKLEIDUNG QUERSTROMLÜFTER
COVERS CROSS FAN
COUVERCLE VENTILATEUR TANGENTIEL
PAGES 6 - 9 PAGES 30 - 31
BODENPLATTEN-EINHEIT FILM-ÜBERNAHME-EINHEIT
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY TAKE OVER UNIT
ENSEMBLE PLAQUES POUR LE SOL ENSEMBLE TRANSFERT DU FILM
PAGES 10 - 11 PAGES 32 - 33
FILMEINGABE-EINHEIT ENTKRÜMMUNGSEINHEIT
LOAD ASSEMBLY DECURL ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT DU FILM UNITE DE LISSAGE
PAGES 12 - 13 PAGES 34 - 35
ANTRIEB FILMEINGABE-EINHEIT ANTRIEB ENTKRÜMMUNGSEINHEIT
LOAD DRIVE ASSEMBLY DECURL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
COMMANDE ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT DU FILM UNITE DE LISSAGE DU FILM
PAGES 14 - 15 PAGES 36 - 37
HORIZONTALER FILMAUSRICHTUNG GRUNDGESTELL
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ASSEMBLY BASIC ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE ALIGNEMENT HORIZONTAL CHASSIS
PAGES 16 - 17 PAGES 38 - 41
VERTIKALE FILMAUSRICHTUNG VME-RACK GRUNDEINHEIT
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ASSEMBLY VME RACK BASIS ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE ALIGNEMENT VERTICAL CHASSIS RACK VME
PAGES 18 - 19 PAGES 42 - 45
HAUPTMOTOR-EINHEIT SEITENANSICHT RECHTS
MAIN MOTOR ASSEMBLY RIGHT SIDE VIEW
ENSEMBLE MOTEUR PRINCIPAL VUE LATERALE DROITE
PAGES 20 - 21 PAGES 46 - 47
THERMODRUCKKOPF BAUGRUPPE DENSITOMETEREINHEIT
THERMAL HEAD ASSEMBLY DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY
UNITE DE TETE THERMIQUE ENSEMBLE DENSITOMETRE
PAGES 22 - 23 PAGES 48 - 49
THERMODRUCKKOPF BAUGRUPPE - MOBILE ANWENDUNG
THERMAL HEAD ASSEMBLY - MOBILE-KIT
UNITE DE TETE THERMIQUE - KIT MOBILE
PAGES 24 - 25
THERMODRUCKKOPF EXCENTER-ANTRIEBSEINHEIT
TH CAM ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE COMMANDE DE L'EXENTRIQUE DANS TETE THERMIQUE
PAGES 26 - 27
THERMODRUCKKOPF EXCENTER-ANTRIEBSEINHEIT - MOBILE ANWENDUNG
TH CAM ASSEMBLY - MOBILE KIT
ENSEMBLE COMMANDE DE L'EXENTRIQUE DANS TETE THERMIQUE
PAGES 28 - 29
5361_0999_INHALT_.cdr


07-2007 Type 5361/0999
How to navigate the spare parts list online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1) Open Bookmarks
(2) Click on "CONTENTS"
(3) See overview of the modules

(4) Click on requested module
(5) Appropriate page opens
(6) Click on green arrow to

navigate back to the overview
of the modules


07-2007 Type 5361/0999
08
05
02 *
04
10
COVERS
24
08 09 *
03
06 *
07 *
01 *
5361_0999_8001.cdr
COVERS


07-2007 TYPE 5361 Agfa Company Confidential
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+3098011 * FRONTABDECKUNG (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
FRONT COVER (STERLING)
CACHE AVANT (STERLING)
1 CM+3098711 * FRONTABDECKUNG
FRONT COVER
CACHE AVANT
2 CM+3099531 * ANZEIGE UND TASTATUR
DISPLAY AND KEY KIT
ECRAN ET KIT TOUCHES
2 CM+3098040 * ANZEIGE UND TASTATUR (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
DISPLAY AND KEY KIT (STERLING)
ECRAN ET KIT TOUCHES (STERLING)
3 CM+3098372 GS KEY300A; REV. B - (KEY300 PCB)
KEY300A, PCB, REV. B
TOUCHE 300A, CI, REV.B
4 CM+3099510 STAUBFILTER
DUST PROTECTION FILTER
FILTRE DE PROTECTION POUSSIERE
5 CM+3098451 ACHSE ABDECKUNG OBEN
COVER SHAFT TOP
CAPOT DE L'AXE EN HAUT
6 CM+3097560 * SEITENVERKLEIDUNG LINKS
SIDE COVER LEFT
COUVERCLE LATERAL GAUCHE
6 CM+3097990 * SEITENVERKLEIDUNG LINKS (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
SIDE COVER LEFT (STERLING)
COUVERCLE LATERAL GAUCHE (STERLING)
7 CM+3097600 * SEITENVERKLEIDUNG RECHTS
SIDE COVER RIGHT
COUVERCLE LATERAL DROIT
7 CM+3098000 * SEITENVERKLEIDUNG RECHTS (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
SIDE COVER RIGHT (STERLING)
COUVERCLE LATERAL DROIT STERLING
8 CM+3099620 GASDRUCKFEDER
GAS LIFTERS
RESSORT PNEUMATIQUE
9 CM+3099509 * ABDECKUNG OBEN
COVER TOP
COUVERCLE EN HAUT
9 CM+3098068 * ABDECKUNG OBEN (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
COVER TOP (STERLING)
COUVERCLE EN HAUT (STERLING)
10 CM+3098340 SCHAUMSTOFF-AUSGABEKORB
FOAM OUTPUT TRAY
PLATEAU DE SORTIE EN MOUSSE
99 CM+3098921 TRANSPORTSICHERUNGSSATZ
TRANSPORT SECURITY KIT
JEU SECURITES DE TRANSPORT
99 CM+7999710030 SOFTW. REL. 1.77 UPGRADE KIT
SOFTW. REL. 1.77 UPGRADE KIT
SOFTW. REL. 1.77 UPGRADE KIT
99 CM+3099162 SET VON KLEINTEILEN
SPARE PARTS SMALL COMPONENTS
LOT DE PETITES PIECES
99 CM+3098112 SW UMRÜSTSATZ REL. 1.95
SW UPGRADE KIT, RELEASE 1.95
KIT D’ACTUALISATION LOGICIELS, REL. 1.95
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =Spare part not available from stock. Expect extended delivery time.
COVERS


08
05
02 *
04
10
COVERS
24
08 09 *
03
06 *
07 *
01 *
5361_0999_8001.cdr
COVERS


99 CM+3099390 SAFETY SWITCH ADJUSTMENT KIT
SAFETY SWITCH ADJUSTMENT KIT
SAFETY SWITCH ADJUSTMENT KIT
=Assembly
COVERS


01
02
BOTTOM 01
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3097471 VORDERRAD (ROHS)
FRONT WHEEL (ROHS)
ROUE AVANT (ROHS)
2 CM+3097450 BAUGRUPPE HINTERRAD
REAR WHEEL ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE ROUES ARRIERES
=Assembly
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY


09
LOAD ASSY 3
03
01 04
05 (S4)
02
06
07
02
08
07
04
5361_0999_8003.cdr
LOAD ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3099766 SEPARIEREINHEIT
FILM FEEDING UNIT
ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT DU FILM
2 CM+3098720 SCHARNIER DER FRONTABDECKUNG
FRONT COVER HINGES
CHARNIERES COUVERCLE AVANT
3 CM+3098711 FRONTABDECKUNG
FRONT COVER
CACHE AVANT
3 CM+3098011 FRONTABDECKUNG (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
FRONT COVER (STERLING)
CACHE AVANT (STERLING)
4 CM+3098541 KABELBAUM FILMEINGABE (MAGAZIN)
CABLE HARNESS FILM LOADING ASSEMBLY
HARNAIS DE CABLES ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT
5 CM+3097371 FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S4)
FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S4)
DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S4)
6 CM+3098580 FEDER 1 (FILMEINGABE)
SPRING 1 (FILM LOADING ASSY)
RESSORT 1 (ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT DU FILM)
7 CM+3098530 FEDERHALTER
SPRING HOLDER
SUPPORT A RESSORT
8 CM+3098600 FEDER 2 (FILMEINGABE)
SPRING 2 (FILM LOADING ASSY)
RESSORT 2 (ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT DU FILM)
9 CM+3099731 FILMEINGABE (MAGAZIN)
FILM LOADING ASSEMBLY
9 CM+3098021 FILMEINGABE (MAGAZIN) (STERLING) - TYPE 5361/0101
FILM LOADING ASSEMBLY (STERLING)
ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT DU FILM (STERLING)
=Assembly
LOAD ASSEMBLY


01
LOAD DR
02
03
(S12)
02
04
(M4)
5361_0999_8004.cdr
LOAD DRIVE ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3099766 SEPARIEREINHEIT
FILM FEEDING UNIT
2 CM+3097903 FILMAUFNAHMEWALZE
FILM PICKUP ROLLER
CYLINDRE RECEPTION DU FILM
3 CM+3097911 LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S12)
LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S12)
PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S12)
4 CM+3098782 FILMAUFNAHMEMOTOR - (M4)
FILM PICKUP MOTOR - (M4)
MOTEUR TRANSFERT DU FILM - (M4)
=Assembly
LOAD DRIVE ASSEMBLY


03
02 (E2)
01
5361_0999_8005.cdr
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3097983 ENTLADEBÜRSTE (ROHS)
ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH (ROHS)
BROSSE ELECTROSTATIQUE (ROHS)
2 CM+3097432 ELEKTROMAGNET (ROHS) - (E2)
SOLENOID (ROHS) - (E2)
ELECTROAIMANT (ROHS) - (E2)
3 CM+3099711 BAUGRUPPE HORIZONTALE FILMAUSRICHTUNG
HORIZ. FILM ALIGNMENT UNIT
ENSEMBLE ALIGNEMENT HORIZONTAL FILM
=Assembly
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ASSEMBLY


02 (M8)
01
01
03
04
04
5361_0999_8006.cdr
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3097380 FILMTRANSPORTROLLE - BIS FN8154
FILM FEEDING ROLLER - UP TO SN8154
GALET DE CHARGEMENT DU FILM - JUSQU'AU NS8154
2 CM+3097540 ANTRIEBSMOTOR FILMTRANSPORT - (M8)
MOTOR FILM TRANSPORT - (M8)
MOTEUR TRANSPORT DU FILM - (M8)
3 CM+3097961 UNTERER TRANSPORT - AB FN8155
LOWER TRANSPORT SECTION - FROM SN8155
UNITE DE TRANSPORT INFERIEURE - A PARTIR DE NS8155
4 CM+3099270 GUMMIWALZE (2 STÜCK) - AB FN8155
RUBBER FILM FEEDING ROLLERS (SET OF 2) - FROM SN8155
CYLINDRE EN CAOUTCHOUC (JEU DE 2) - A PARTIR DE NS8155
=Assembly
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ASSEMBLY


12
11
01
11
13
06
(M1)
09
04
11
01 07*
08
(S8)
03
02*
MAINMOTO2
10*
5361_0999_8007.cdr
MAIN MOTOR ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3097681 DRUCKWALZEN-LAGERGEHÄUSE
DRUM BEARING HOUSING
LOGEMENT PALIER TAMBOUR
2 CM+3097811 * ZAHNRIEMENRAD MXL200
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL MXL200
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE MXL200
3 CM+3097831 ZAHNRIEMEN DRUCKWALZE (ROHS)
TOOTHED BELT FOR DRUM (ROHS)
COURROIE CRANTEE POUR TAMBOUR (ROHS)
4 CM+3097821 FLACHRIEMEN DRUCKWALZE (440X15MM) (ROHS)
FLAT BELT (440X15MM) FOR DRUM (ROHS)
COURROIE PLATE POUR TAMBOUR (ROHS)
6 CM+3097781 DRUCKWALZENMOTOR - (M1)
DRUM MOTOR - (M1)
MOTEUR DU TAMBOUR - (M1)
7 CM+3097800 * ZAHNRIEMENRAD FÜR DRUCKWALZENMOTOR
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL FOR DRUM MOTOR
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE POUR MOTEUR DU TAMBOUR
9 CM+3097841 ABTASTUNG WALZENGESCHWINDIGKEIT
ENCODER FOR DRUM SPEED DETECT.
ENCODEUR POUR DETECTION VITESSE DU TAMBOUR
10 CM+3097700 * FLACHRIEMENSCHEIBE
DISK TO DRIVE DRUM
DISQUE COMMANDE COURROIE PLATE
11 CM+3097661 WALZE
DRUM
CYLINDRE
12 CM+3097950 SATZ DRUCKWALZENLAGER
SET DRUM BEARINGS
JEU PALIERS TAMBOUR
13 CM+3099671 DRUCKWALZEN-ANTRIEBSEINHEIT
DRIVING UNIT FOR DRUM
UNITE DE COMMANDE POUR TAMBOUR
=Assembly
MAIN MOTOR ASSEMBLY


03
04
TH ASSY
02*
02*
15
13
(AIC1 BOARD)
08
09
15
01
(F1) 07* 10*
06*
11
12
14
05
5361_0999_8008.cdr
THERMAL HEAD ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3099090 LÜFTEREINHEIT FÜR TH - (F1)
FAN ASSY FOR TH - (F1)
ENSEMBLE VENTILATEUR POUR TT.TH - (F1)
2 CM+3098861 * FEDER
SPRING
RESSORT
3 CM+3097970 TH POSITIONIERUNGSEINHEIT
TH POSITIONING UNIT
UNITE DE POSITIONNEMENT TT.TH.
4 CM+3098901 FILMFÜHRUNG FÜR TH
FILM GUIDING UNIT FOR TH
ENSEMBLE GUIDAGE FILM POUR TT. TH.
5 CM+3098150 FLACHBANDKABEL AIC-COS - (P10)
RIBBON CABLE AIC-COS - (P10)
CABLE RUBAN AIC-COS - (P10)
6 CM+3099061 * KABELBAUM DTS - (P6)
WIRE HARNESS, DTS - (P6)
HARNAIS DE CABLE, DTS - (P6)
7 CM+3099441 * KABELVERBINDUNG RECHTS (GEHÄUSE)
CABLE TRUNK RIGHT (CHASSIS)
LIGNE DE JONCTION A DROITE (CHASSIS)
8 CM+3099030 TH CTRL FLACHBANDKABEL - (P5 - TH)
TH CTRL CABLE - (P5 - TH)
CABLE TH CTRL - (P5 - TH)
9 CM+3099040 TH DATA FLACHBANDKABEL - (P9 - TH)
TH DATA CABLE - (P9 - TH)
CABLE TH DATA - (P9 - TH)
10 CM+3098851 * KABELVERBINDUNG TH
CABLE TREE TH-SUSPENSION
LIGNE DE JONCTION TT.TH.
11 CM+3097621 KABELBAUM NETZTEIL - AIC1 - (P7/P8 - D)
CABLE HARNESS POWER SUPPL. - AIC1 - (P7/P8 - D)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE BLOC SECTEUR - AIC1 - (P7/P8 - D)
12 CM+3098140 FLACHBANDKABEL ROCAN-BUS - (P4)
RIBBON CABLE ROCAN BUS - (P4)
CABLE RUBAN BUS ROCAN - (P4)
13 CM+3099024 AIC1 GS, REV. H - (AIC1 BOARD)
AIC1 PCB, REV. H - (AIC1 BOARD)
AIC1 CI, REV. H - (AIC1 BOARD)
14 CM+3099669 THERMODRUCKKOPF GETESTET
TESTED THERMAL HEAD
TETE THERMIQUE TESTEE
15 CM+3099100 FEDERN (SATZ: 2 STÜCK)
SPRINGS (SET OF 2)
RESSORT (JEU DE 2)
99 CM+3099310 REINIGUNGSTÜCHER
CLEANING TISSUES
DES SERVIETTES DESINTOXIQUES
=Assembly
THERMAL HEAD ASSEMBLY


03
04
TH ASSY MOBI
02*
02*
15
08
09
10*
15
01
(F1) 07*
06*
11
05
14 12
13
(AIC1 BOARD)
5361_0999_8009.cdr
THERMAL HEAD ASSEMBLY - MOBILE-KIT


2 CM+3098861 * FEDER
SPRING
RESSORT
3 CM+3098390 TH POSITIONIERUNGSEINHEIT (MOBIL)
TH POSITIONING UNIT (MOBILE)
ENSEMBLE POSITIONNEMENT TT TH. (MOBILE)
4 CM+3098901 FILMFÜHRUNG FÜR TH
FILM GUIDING UNIT FOR TH
ENSEMBLE GUIDAGE FILM POUR TT. TH.
5 CM+3098150 FLACHBANDKABEL AIC-COS - (P10)
RIBBON CABLE AIC-COS - (P10)
CABLE RUBAN AIC-COS - (P10)
6 CM+3099061 * KABELBAUM DTS - (P6)
WIRE HARNESS, DTS - (P6)
HARNAIS DE CABLE, DTS - (P6)
8 CM+3099030 TH CTRL FLACHBANDKABEL - (P5)
TH CTRL CABLE - (P5)
CABLE TH CTRL - (P5)
9 CM+3099040 TH DATA FLACHBANDKABEL - (P9)
TH DATA CABLE - (P9)
CABLE TH DATA - (P9)
11 CM+3097621 KABELBAUM NETZTEIL - AIC1 - (P7/P8 - D)
CABLE HARNESS POWER SUPPL. - AIC1 - (P7/P8 - D)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE BLOC SECTEUR - AIC1 - (P7/P8 - D)
12 CM+3098140 FLACHBANDKABEL ROCAN-BUS - (P4)
RIBBON CABLE ROCAN BUS - (P4)
CABLE RUBAN BUS ROCAN - (P4)
13 CM+3099024 AIC1 GS, REV. H - (AIC1 BOARD)
AIC1 PCB, REV. H - (AIC1 BOARD)
AIC1 CI, REV. H - (AIC1 BOARD)
14 CM+3099669 THERMODRUCKKOPF GETESTET
TESTED THERMAL HEAD
TETE THERMIQUE TESTEE
15 CM+3099100 FEDERN (SATZ: 2 STÜCK)
SPRINGS (SET OF 2)
RESSORT (JEU DE 2)
=Assembly
THERMAL HEAD ASSEMBLY - MOBIL-KIT


04 *
03 *
(M3)
01 02
(S1, S2, S3)
5361_0999_8010.cdr
TH CAM ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3098090 ZAHNRAD Z=32
GEAR WHEEL T=32
ROUE DENTEE D=32
2 CM+3097911 LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S1, S2, S3)
LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S1, S2, S3)
PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S1, S2, S3)
3 CM+3098782 * FILMAUFNAHMEMOTOR - (M3)
4 CM+3097970 * TH POSITIONIERUNGSEINHEIT
TH POSITIONING UNIT
=Assembly
TH CAM ASSEMBLY


04
02
MOBI
03
01* 02 (S1, S2, S3)
5361_0999_8011.cdr


1 CM+3098090 * ZAHNRAD Z=32
GEAR WHEEL T=32
ROUE DENTEE D=32
2 CM+3097911 LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S1, S2, S3)
LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S1, S2, S3)
PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S1, S2, S3)
3 CM+3098782 FILMAUFNAHMEMOTOR - (M3)
4 CM+3097970 TH POSITIONIERUNGSEINHEIT
TH POSITIONING UNIT
=Assembly


01 (F1)
CROSSFAN
5361_0999_8012.cdr
CROSS FAN


=Assembly
CROSS FAN


04
01
02
03
02
06
01
05
03
05
5361_0999_8013.cdr
TAKE OVER UNIT


1 CM+3097911 LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS)
LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS)
PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS)
2 CM+3097380 FILMTRANSPORTROLLE - BIS FN8154
FILM FEEDING ROLLER - UP TO SN8154
GALET DE CHARGEMENT DU FILM - JUSQU'AU NS8154
3 CM+3097540 ANTRIEBSMOTOR FILMTRANSPORT - (M3)
MOTOR FILM TRANSPORT - (M3)
MOTEUR TRANSPORT DU FILM - (M3)
4 CM+3099690 FILMTRANSPORT OBEN - BIS FN8154
UPPER FILM TRANSPORT UNIT - UP TO SN8154
UNITE DE TRANSPORT SUPERIEUR DU FILM - JUSQU'AU NS8154
5 CM+3099270 GUMMIWALZE (2 STÜCK) - AB FN8155
RUBBER FILM FEEDING ROLLERS (SET OF 2) - FROM SN8155
CYLINDRE EN CAOUTCHOUC (JEU DE 2) - A PARTIR DE NS8155
6 CM+3099691 FILMTRANSPORT OBEN - AB FN8155
UPPER FILM TRANSPORT UNIT - FROM SN8155
UNITE DE TRANSPORT SUPERIEUR DU FILM - A PARTIR DE NS8155
=Assembly
TAKE OVER UNIT


07
01
04 (S11)
08 (S13)
06 (S7)
02* 03 (SW4)
05
5361_0999_8014.cdr
DECURL ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3098431 ABDECKUNG FÜR DECURL UNIT
PROTECTION PLATE FOR DECURL UNIT
NOUVELLE PLAQUE DE PROTECTION UNITE
2 CM+3099370 * HALTERUNG FÜR HEIZELEMENT
HOLDER FOR HEATING ELEMENT
SUPPORT POUR ELEMENT DE CHAUFFAGE
3 CM+3099380 HEIZELEMENT FÜR DECURL UNIT - (SW4)
HEATING ELEMENT FOR DECURL UNIT - (SW4)
ELEMENT DE CHAUFFAGE UNITE LISSAGE - (SW4)
4 CM+3097371 FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S11)
FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S11)
DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S11)
5 CM+3097983 ENTLADEBÜRSTE (ROHS)
ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH (ROHS)
BROSSE ELECTROSTATIQUE (ROHS)
7 CM+3099132 DECURL UNIT KOMPLETT
COMPLETE DECURL UNIT
UNITE DE LISSAGE COMPLETE
8 CM+3098470 IR TEMPERATURSENSOR, DECURL UNIT - (S13)
IR-TEMP. SENSOR, DECURL UNIT - (S13)
TEMP-IR, DECTEUR, UNITE DE LISSAGE - (S13)
=Assembly
DECURL ASSEMBLY


01 DECURL DR
03
02 (M2)
5361_0999_8015.cdr
DECURL DRIVE ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3098070 ZAHNRIEMEN FÜR DECURL UNIT
TOOTHED BELT FOR DECURL UNIT
COURROIE CRANTEE UNITE DE LISSAGE
2 CM+3098083 GLEICHSTROMMOTOR FÜR DECURL UNIT (ROHS) - (M2)
DC MOTOR FOR DECURL UNIT (ROHS) - (M2)
MOTEUR DE L'UNITE DE LISSAGE (ROHS) - (M2)
3 CM+3099720 ANTRIEBSMECHANISMUS DECURL UNIT
DRIVING MECHANISM DECURL UNIT
MECANISME DE COMMANDE UNITE DE LISSAGE
=Assembly
DECURL DRIVE ASSEMBLY


09 (SW2)
15
07
BASIC 06
06 19
07* 05*
09 (SW5)
21
13
14
01
22
16* 04
10* 08
18*
24
12*
09
11* (SW3)
02
17* 20
03
23 *
19 5361_0999_8016.cdr
BASIC ASSEMBLY


1 EB+53580300 SCHALTER - (SW2, SW3, SW5)
SWITCH - (SW2, SW3, SW5)
INTERRUPTEUR - (SW2, SW3, SW5)
2 CM+3097432 ELEKTROMAGNET (ROHS)
SOLENOID (ROHS)
ELECTROAIMANT (ROHS)
3 CM+3097480 WELLE FÜR VERRIEGELUNGSHAKEN
SHAFT FOR LOCKING HOOK
ARBRE POUR CROCHET DE FERMETURE
4 CM+3099150 AUSZUGSCHIENENSET FILMMAGAZIN
SLIDE SYSTEM INPUT TRAY
JEU DE RAILS POUR MAGASIN FILM
5 CM+3097400 * POSITIONIERWELLE FÜR ENTKRÜMMUNG
POSITION SHAFT FOR DECURL UNIT
ARBRE DE POSITIONNEMENT UNITE LISSAGE
6 CM+3097380 FILMTRANSPORTROLLE
FILM FEEDING ROLLER
GALET DE CHARGEMENT DU FILM
7 CM+3097740 * FEDER (SATZ 2 STÜCK)
SPRINGS (SET OF 2)
RESSORT (JEU DE 2)
8 CM+3097650 DTS1 GS, REV. B - (DTS1, S14)
DTS1 PCB, REV. B - (DTS1, S14)
DTS1 CI, REV. B - (DTS1, S14)
9 CM+7042660160 D SCHALTER 200
SWITCH
INTERRUPTEUR
10 CM+3099412 * KABELVERBINDUNG LINKS (GEHÄUSE)
CABLE TRUNK LEFT (CHASSIS)
LIGNE DE JONCTION GAUCHE (CHASSIS)
11 CM+3099061 * KABELBAUM DTS
WIRE HARNESS, DTS
HARNAIS DE CABLE, DTS
13 CM+3097763 PMC1 GS, REV. G
PMC1 PCB, REV. G
PMC1 CI, REV. G
14 CM+3098140 FLACHBANDKABEL ROCAN-BUS
RIBBON CABLE ROCAN BUS
CABLE RUBAN BUS ROCAN
15 CM+3097360 KABELVERBINDUNG FÜR USER-TERMINALS
CABLE TRUNK FOR USER TERMINALS
LIGNE DE JONCTION POUR CONSOLES
16 CM+3097860 * FERRITRING
FERRITE CORE RING
ANNEAU FERRIT
17 CM+3099100 * FEDERN (SATZ: 2 STÜCK)
SPRINGS (SET OF 2)
RESSORT (JEU DE 2)
19 CM+3097720 STAUBSCHUTZBÜRSTEN
DUST PROTECTION BRUSHES
BROSSE DE PROTECTION CONTRE POUSSIERE
=Assembly
BASIC ASSEMBLY


09 (SW2)
15
07
BASIC 06
06 19
07* 05*
09 (SW5)
21
13
14
01
22
16* 04
10* 08
18*
24
12*
09
11* (SW3)
02
17* 20
03
23 *
19 5361_0999_8016.cdr
BASIC ASSEMBLY


20 CM+3097432 ELEKTROMAGNET (ROHS)
SOLENOID (ROHS)
ELECTROAIMANT (ROHS)
21 CM+3097370 FILMSENSOR
FILM SENSOR
DETECTEUR FILM
21 CM+3097371 FILMSENSOR (ROHS)
FILM SENSOR (ROHS)
DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS)
22 CM+3099000 ANSCHLAGSTÜTZE FÜR EINGABEKORB (2X)
STOP SUPPORT FOR INPUT TRAY (2X)
SUPPORT SUPERIEUR POUR PLATEAU DE CHARGEMENT (2X)
23 CM+3097500 * VERRIEGELUNGSHAKEN MIT FEDER
LOCKING HOOK WITH SPRING
CROCHET DE FERMETURE AVE RESSORT
24 CM+3099340 GASDRUCKFEDER EINGABEKORB
GAS LIFTER INPUT TRAY
RESSORT PNEUMATIQUE PLATEAU DE CHARGEMENT
=Assembly
BASIC ASSEMBLY


27
20
05*
16
14
15
24
18
01 13*
(F2) 22
04
17*
21
18 06
09
11* 08
02
20 (DTS2) 10
07
12*
16 VME RACK 12*
26
19*
15 13*
23
25
5361_0999_8017.cdr
VME RACK BASIS ASSEMBLY


1 CM+3098160 LÜFTER FÜR VME-RACK - (F2)
FAN FOR VME-RACK - (F2)
VENTILATEUR POUR VME RACK - (F2)
2 CM+3097650 DTS1 GS, REV. B - (DTS1)
DTS1 PCB, REV. B - (DTS1)
DTS1 CI, REV. B - (DTS1)
3 CM+3060010 VME BACKPLANE
BACKPLANE VME
BACKPLANE VME
4 CM+3098233 BIO3 GS, REV. G - (BIO3)
BIO3 PCB, REV. G - (BIO3)
BIO3 PCB, REV. G - (BIO3)
5 CM+3097860 * FERRITRING
FERRITE CORE RING
ANNEAU FERRIT
6 CM+3098213 COS1 GS, REV. F - (COS1)
COS1 PCB, REV. F - (COS1)
COS1 CI, REV. F - (COS1)
7 EB+53611612 BER1 GS, REV. B - (BER)
BER1 PCB, REV. B - (BER)
BER1 CI, REV. B - (BER)
8 EB+44020069 NIP1 GS, REV. K - (NIP)
NIP1 PCB, REV. K - (NIP)
NIP1 CI, REV. K - (NIP)
9 EB+44020113 MG3 AMD3 MFR2 KARTE REV. B
MG3 AMD3 MFR2 PCB REV. B
MG3 CARTE AMD3 MFR2 REV. B
10 EB+53610731 GS 32 MB RAM
32 MB RAM PCB
CI RAM 32 MB
11 CM+3098260 * FLACHBANDKABEL VME - BIO3 (15)
RIBBON CABLE VME - BIO3 (15)
CABLE PLAT VME - BIO3 (15)
12 CM+3098280 * FLACHBANDKABEL VME - BIO3 (P6)
RIBBON CABLE VME - BIO3 (P6)
CABLE RUBAN VME - BIO3 (P6)
13 CM+3098250 * KABELBAUM CPU - SERVICEPORT
CABLE HARNESS CPU - SERVICE PORT
HARNAIS DE CABLE CPU - PORT SERVICE
14 EB+53581396 FESTPLATTE 73GB
HARD DISK 73GB
DISQUE DUR 73GB
15 CM+3098180 FLACHBANDKABEL FÜR BIO3 - HDD
RIBBON CABLE FOR BIO3 - HDD
CABLE RUBAN POUR BIO3 - HDD
16 CM+3098191 FLACHBANDKABEL BIO3 - FDD
RIBBON CABLE BIO3 - FDD
CABLE RUBAN BIO3 - FDD
17 CM+3098290 * KABELBAUM VME - BIO3 (P10)
CABLE HARNESS VME - BIO3 (P10)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE VME - BIO3 (P10)
18 CM+3099650 FLACHBANDKABEL MAU - BIO3 (P14)
RIBBON CABLE MAU - BIO3 (P14)
CABLE RUBAN MAU - BIO3 (P14)
19 CM+3098240 * KABELBAUM DTS1 - BIO3 (P14)
WIRE HARNESS DTS1 - BIO3 (P14)
HARNAISE DE CABLE DTS1 - BIO3 (P14)
=Assembly


27
20
05*
16
14
15
24
18
01 13*
(F2) 22
04
17*
21
18 06
09
11* 08
02
20 (DTS2) 10
07
12*
16 VME RACK 12*
26
19*
15 13*
23
25
5361_0999_8017.cdr


20 CM+3098140 FLACHBANDKABEL ROCAN-BUS
21 CM+3098150 FLACHBANDKABEL AIC-COS
RIBBON CABLE AIC-COS
CABLE RUBAN AIC-COS
22 EB+8535837000 MAU2 SCHNITTSTELLE - (MAU2)
MAU2 INTERFACE - (MAU2)
INTERFACE MAU2 - (MAU2)
23 CM+3098135 NETZTEIL & BIO3 BOARD
POWER SUPPLY & BIO3 BOARD
ALIMENTATION & BIO3 PCB
24 EB+53610133 SCN2 DTE/MALE PCB REV. G
SCN2 DTE/MALE PCB REV. G
SCN2 DTE/MALE PCB REV. G
25 CM+3097930 KABELBAUM NETZTEIL - VME
CABLE HARNESS POWER SUP. - VME
HARNAIS DE CABLE ALIMENTATION - VME
26 EB+53610667 BAUGRUPPE CPU - (CPU)
CPU ASSEMBLY - (CPU)
ENSEMBLE CPU - (CPU)
26 EB+53610864 POSTSCRIPT CPU-BAUGRUPPE - (CPU)
POSTSCRIPT CPU ASSY - (CPU)
ENSEMBLE CPU POSTSCRIPT - (CPU)
27 CM+3097893 DISKETTENLAUFWERK + FLACHBANDKABEL (ROHS)
FLOPPY DRIVE + RIBBON CABLE (ROHS)
LECTEUR DISQUETTE + CABLE PLAT (ROHS)
=Assembly


RIGHT SIDE VIEW
05*
06*
04*
02*
03*
01*
(MDM1)
5361_0999_8018.cdr
RIGHT SIDE VIEW


1 CM+3099482 * MDM1 GS, REV. C - (MDM1)
MDM1 PCB, REV. C - (MDM1)
MDM1 CI, REV. C - (MDM1)
2 CM+3098140 * FLACHBANDKABEL ROCAN-BUS
3 CM+3097621 * KABELBAUM NETZTEIL - AIC1
CABLE HARNESS POWER SUPPL. - AIC1
FAISCEAU DE CABLE BLOC SECTEUR - AIC1
4 CM+3099430 * KABELVERBINDUNG MDM
CABLE TRUNK MDM
LIGNE DE JONCTION MDM
6 CM+3097641 * FLEXIBLES FLACHBANDKABEL MDM1 - DSH1
FLEXIBLE RIBBON CABLE MDM1 - DSH1
CABLE PLAT FLEXIBLE MDM1 - DSH1
7 CM+3098522 * WELLE FÜR TH POSITIONIERUNGSEINHEIT
SHAFT TH POSIT. UNIT
UNITE DE POSITIONNEMENT ARBRE TT. TH.
99 CM+3098560 * FETT KLUBER 46MR401
GREASE KLUBER 46MR401
GRAISSE KLUBER 46MR401
=Assembly
RIGHT SIDE VIEW


04
03 (DSH1)
02
DENSITO
01
(S5)
5361_0999_8019.cdr
DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY


2 CM+3099451 HALOGENLAMPE (ROHS)
HALOGEN LAMP (ROHS)
LAMPE HALOGENE (ROHS)
3 CM+3591970 DSH2 KARTE
DSH2 PCB
CARTE DSH2
4 CM+3097884 DENSITOMETEREINHEIT
DENSITOMETER ASSY
ENSEMBLE DENSITOMETRE
99 CM+3098960 KALIBRIERKEIL
CALIBRATION WEDGE
COIN DE CALIBRATION
=Assembly
DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY


Spare Parts Kit Categories
R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine

Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
• number of machines
• extension of the service area
• local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
• stockpiling
I 'Installation' Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I`should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance' Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
L 'Local stock' Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers
Order number Spare Part Kit version

CM+053610999731 DRYSTAR 3000 Sortiment R 6
CM+053610999733 DRYSTAR 3000 Sortiment M 4
CM+053610999734 DRYSTAR 3000 Sortiment L 9


07-2007 Type 5361/0999
Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type No. Specification

DI3000 FERANIA LIFELMAGER 5000 5361/0102 -
II LINX CONTACT 400 WITH MOBILE 5361/0105 -
DRYSTAR 3000 NETWORK 5361/0110 -
DRYSTAR 3000 VIDEO 5361/0120 -
DRYSTAR 3000 DIGITAL 5361/0130 -
DS3000 NW PRINTER - LASERHAWK 5361/0997 -
DS3000 PRINTER - LASERHAWK 5361/0998 -
DRYSTAR 3000 PRINTER 5361/0999 -
ii LINX CONTACT 400 5361/0101
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order number

DRYSTAR 3000 POSTSCRIPT
DRYSTAR 3000 DICOM PMS
DRYSTAR 3000 DIGITAL KIT
DRYSTAR 3000 UPGR COLOUR VIDEO KIT #2
DRYSTAR 3000 UPGR COLOUR VIDEO KIT #1
DRYSTAR 3000 UPGR B&W VIDEO KIT #2
DRYSTAR 3000 UPGR B&W VIDEO KIT #1


07-2007 Type 5361/0999
Document No: DD+DIS405.04M
Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical Modifications reserved.
Published by
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
D - 81539 München
Germany
www.agfa.com
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.


DD+DIS084.97E OPTIONS
Section 9
List of contents
1 VSI VIDEO SYNAPSIS INTERFACE IN DRYSTAR ............................................................................................ 1
1.1 Summary and Important Hints....................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Autolocking Hints .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Characteristics of the VSI board.................................................................................................... 8

2 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW OF USED COMPONENTS...................................................................................... 9
3 AUTOLOCKING ................................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Getting started............................................................................................................................. 10
3.2 Operation and implementation .................................................................................................... 10

3.2.1 User selection menu : 10
3.2.2 Main menu : 13
3.3 Some additional guidelines.......................................................................................................... 26

4 VSI EVALUATION FORM .................................................................................................................................. 27
5 INSTALLING VSI1 AT DRYSTAR 3000............................................................................................................. 29
5.1 Restrictions and Recommendations ............................................................................................ 30

5.1.1 Configured INPUT Number must correspond with mounted AFR2-position 30
5.1.2 Connecting different B&W sources to the same VIDCOM III Tx box not allowed. 31
5.1.3 Use 3 different VIDCOM-II transmitter boxes to transfer colour over fiber. 31
5.1.4 Eye Safety 31
6 SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS OF A POSSIBLE CONNECTION ........................................................................... 31

1 VSI VIDEO SYNAPSIS INTERFACE IN DRYSTAR

synapsis = Greek: junction
1.1 Summary and Important Hints

Image quality The best way to make a pass-through connection is to first connect
the video hardcopy output of the scanner console, workstation
tower/desktop etc. with the switch-board. Then connect the loop-
through output of VIDCOM II or III to the monitor or another video
input. Check if the last device connected with this loop-through chain
is really terminated on 75 ohm
Autolock 1 Perform autolock only when the VSI has reached a stable operational
temperature. This is especially important for video signals with high
pixelclock frequencies, where even small deviations from the correct
parameter settings (caused by large temperature differences) may
cause image degradation.
Autolock 2 As the image will be used to find the pixel clock frequency, you need
to provide fast large transients at multiple pixel distances. Text is ideal
for this. Some suggestions to make it easier for the software to find
the right pixelclock frequency:
-generate textlines on the monitor, which are as long as possible.
Longer textlines are better than different short ones.
-avoid that the text changes during autolocking : do not move the
cursor or arrow, freeze the time indication (if possible).
-large brightness contrast between text and background is useful.
-preferably do not have medical image data or other grey areas on the
same scanlines as the text.
-if you can enter text yourself, use different characters, not a row of
XXX’s.
Autolock 3 For finding the active area (horizontal and vertical window), check if
the image covers the complete screen. If possible put the cursor or
arrow on the outer edge(s) of the image before the autolocker starts
finding the windows.
Autolock 4 The autolocker may fail to find the pixelclock frequency when :
-the pixelclock frequency is out of working range
-noise disrupts the sync signal (forcing sync filter can help)
-video undershoots disrupt the sync signal (forcing video filter can
help)
-excessive noise, jitter on text, video bandwidth too low (put more text
on image)
-video signal is not made on a pixel basis (e.g. Philips BV25 - try to fill
in the pixel-clock, found by calculation of the correct pixel aspect ratio -
try to obtain a circle again)
-impossible to provide a good text image (see previous item)

OPTIONS DD+DIS084.97E
Autolock 5: Cannot find pixelclock: Select image with more text. Select image with
Messages max. cotrast text
Cannot find H or V sync: Check Sync connection. Check sync
selection in autolock
SAM full (SAM = Serial Access Memory): Change and try out with
autolock presets:
1. Put PLL on hold 2. set half line on ¾ line time 3. set sync threshold
to value 200 4. activate sync filter
Capture an image If submenu ‘1: Use keypad for making test image’ is selected,
following will be displayed :
press STORE on keypad to capture image
Press return to go back to program after image has been
captured
To send a captured image to a printer, the autolocker will release its
control over the VSI, so that one or more testprints can be made using
the keypad. After the images have been captured, the autolocker can
be entered again by typing return. A special film layout will be
prepared for this print-out, with maximum image dimensions, white
film background, Kanamori LUT, replication, and standard aspect
ratio.
It is important to know that the ‘store’ button on the keypad may
NOT be pressed for capturing a video image on the VSI board, if the
autolocking program is still in use.
However if someone wants to capture an image to check the results,
then he should use main menu ‘3 : Capture image’, submenu ‘1 : Use
keypad for making test image’, because only then the autolocker
releases control over the VSI. Another possibility is exiting the
autolocker.
Help info related to The Autolocker will consult a special file after the user number has
the installed OEM been selected and before the main menu is displayed. This file
modality contains a list of host systems that need extra manual interaction
before and/or during the autolocking sequence. These guidelines are
only related to the locking process and must help the technicians to
calibrate without any problems and to guaranty the best possible
image quality.
First the video identifier number (Input_0x_file) of the selected user
will be read from the configuration file MGA0 and checked if there is
info on this system in the comment file. If so, the info will be displayed.
This info can at any time be redisplayed by typing:
‘7 : Display installation info’ in the Main menu.
Filter Setting The default cut-off frequency of the video filter will be selected as just
above the found pixelclock frequency : e.g. when the frequency is
14.75 Mhz, the 25 Mhz filter will be used.
This will be done automatically, but it could always be modified by
executing main menu ‘5.
Available filters: 0 : 12.5 Mhz 1 : 25 Mhz 2 : 50 Mhz 3 : no filter

Customization It is advisable not to edit the VSI configuration table by using ”nve”,
VSIXXX0? because most of the items will influence each other (e.g. changing the
video filter will need another gain and phase adjustment). Most
parameters can be adjusted by the extra tools, available in the
autolocking menu’s.
Switching systems Some OEM systems provide 2 different video signals over the same
cable (e.g. interlaced and non-interlaced) and switch between the two
when a hardcopy key is pressed on the console. In some cases it is
impossible to keep the video signal we are interested in, stable for
more than a few seconds before the system switches back to the
other signal. When the signal switches between interlaced and non-
interlaced this can be detected by the VSI hardware. If this happens
during autolocking, the software will report the change and resumes
locking till the original signal is provided again. To do this, it must
know which of the signals we are interested in. It assumes that the
signal it digitized at the very start of the autolock is the correct one.
Led indication Green led: lights up as long as the image capturing is active.
Orange led: lights up when no VSYNC is detected during a time
period of minimum 105 msec. Reason :
-the video or sync cable of the selected input is not connected or
wrongly connected
-the host system of the selected input is switched off
-the parameters of the selected input are wrongly set or not loaded
yet.
Red led: lights up when:
the Serial Access Memory of the Video RAM became full.
Reason: unstable PLL, wrong parameter setting, the complete video
ram became full
Reason : more than 2 Mbyte data had to be loaded into VRAM
This led lights up very shortly and is almost not visible, because the
software resets the board immediately after detecting the error. An
error message will be displayed anyway.
1.2 Autolocking Hints
Remark: An up to date list with

autolocking hints you will allways get
together with the interface in the
document „VSI tooling: Autolock“.

Model Type ID Autolocking guidelines
PHILIPS
VS387A (1588 x 1049 / 60 Hz) - VS388A (1920 x 1249 / 50 Hz)
DSI Basic XR 81 The OEM host has a positive and a negative video output. Connect to the
negative video output.
DSI XANGIO XR 82
DSI XRF XR 83
DSI XRF on Integris ... XR 83
DSI XRF on Diagnost ... XR 83
DSI XRF on litho Diagnost XR 83
M
DSI XRF on MFL 5000 XR 83
DSI XRF on multi XR 83
Diagnost ...
DSI XRF on uro Diagnost XR 83
...
VISUB on Integris ... XR 92
VS160A (960 x 625 / 50 Hz)
Tomoscan T300 CT 17 The OEM host switches from Non-Interlaced to Interlaced video output, during a
few seconds after
Tomoscan T305 CT 18 pressing the ‘multi-format’ button on the console. Make sure that the main menu
Tomoscan T310 CT 19 ‘Search video parameters’ started running on the Interlaced video output.
Tomoscan T315 CT 20 See Chapter 3.5 / Note 3 for more information.
Tomoscan T350 CT 21
Tomoscan SAVC CT 9
VS165 (960 x 525 / 60 Hz) - VS450B (960 x 625 / 50 Hz)
Gyroscan S5 MR 30 1. The OEM host switches from Non-Interlaced to Interlaced video output,
during a few seconds
Gyroscan S5/HP MR 31, after pressing the ‘Copy Right’ button on the console. Make sure that the
32 main menu
Gyroscan S15 MR 26 ‘Search video parameters’ started running on the Interlaced video output.
Gyroscan S15/HP MR 28, See Chapter 3.5 / Note 3 for more information.
29
Gyroview S5 WS 68 Tip : Select the option with 4 images on the screen. With this option, the
output remains
Gyroview S15 WS 67 interlaced
IDW/PVS S5 MR 39
IDW/PVS S15 MR 38 2 . Always start autolocking on the video coming from the right monitor
(contains medical image).
Tomoscan SAVS CT 10 If the video on the left needs a different bordersetting, then execute following
menus :
Main menu : ‘Individual video parameter tuning tools’
Sub menu : ‘Recalibrate borders and/or grey levels’
Sub-sub menu : ‘Recalibrate borders (extending current active window)’
VS478B (1200 x 525 / 60 Hz) - VS287A (1200 x 625 / 50 Hz)
BV25 E XR 71 Enter pixelclock value : to be defined
(MDP, MDPM, MSP)
BV25 N XR 73
(MDP, MDPM, MSP)
HR (1049/60 - 1249 / 50) or N (525 / 60 - 625 / 50)
BV25 HR XR 72 Enter pixelclock value : to be defined
BV25 N(TOKO-SN)) XR

SIEMENS
VS2 (1204 x 1023 / 60)
VIDEOMED H CT If a Transicon is used, following is needed for autolocking :
ANGIOTRON XR 783 1. Set Transicon OFF
ANGIOTRON CMP XR 785 2. Only if no external sync is used, then execute following autolock menu :
on Angioskop D33 Main menu : ‘Autolocking presets’
on Angioskop D40 Sub menu : ‘Halfline lockout (now ...)’
on Bicor Sub-sub menu : ‘Delay = linetime - 450 nsec’
3. Start autolocking :
Main menu : ‘Search video parameters’
4. Set Transicon on maximum
5. Then execute following autolock menu :
Main menu : ‘Individual video parameter tuning tools’
Sub menu : ‘Recalibrate borders and/or grey levels’
Sub-sub menu : ‘Recalibrate borders (extending current active window)’
VS5 (1438 x 1249 / 50)
VIDEOMED H CT See above : ‘If Transicon is used’
ANGIOTRON XR 783
ANGIOTRON A33 XR 784
ANGIOTRON CMP XR 785
on Angioskop D33
on Angioskop D40
on Bicor
C ARM HI LINE XR 786
FLUORO
DS-1000 XR 799
MEMOSKOP UM, K, K- XR 804,
H 805,
806
VS6 (525 / 60) - VS7 (1141 x 625 / 50)
DIGITRON 2 XR 787 1. See above : ‘If Transicon is used’
DIGITRON 3 XR 788 2. Different (zoom) modes have different pixelclock frequencies.
DIGITRON 3V XR 789 Autolock on the most used (zoom) mode.
DIGITRON 3VA XR 790
DIGITRON 3VA11 XR 791
DIGITRON 3VAC XR 794
DIGITRON 3VACI XR 795
DIGITRON 3VVA XR 796
DIGITRON PLUS XR 798
DIGITRON CARD XR 797
on Angioskop D33
on Angioskop D40
on Bicor

VS507 (1216 x 1025 / 60) - VS123 (1440 x 1249 / 50)

POLYSPOT (on XR 809 See above : ‘If Transicon is used’
Siregraph)
POLYTRON 1000S XR 810
POLYTRON 1000VR XR 811
POLYTRON PLUS XR 812
POLYTRON S PLUS XR
POLYTRON TOP XR
on Angioskop
on Angioskop Star
on Multiskop
on Siregraph
VS486A (852 x 525 / 60) - VS485C (852 x 625 / 50)
SIREMOBIL 2000 XR 813 The OEM host has a 50 Hz and a 100 Hz video output. Connect to the 100 Hz
video output.
SIREMOBIL 2000-1 XR 814 Use the ‘STORE’ button of your keypad instead of the hardcopy button on the
Siemens
SIREMOBIL 2000-2 XR 815 console for making print-outs.
UROSKOP D2 XR 824
VS unknown
ICON (21”) NM Only if horizontal jitter is visible on the hardcopy, restart autolocking after increasing
the sync threshold to 230. Sequence of operation :
Main menu : ‘Autolocking presets’
Sub menu : ‘Sync threshold (now ...)’
Sub-sub menu : ‘Enter threshold setting’ - ‘Enter choice :’ 230
TOSHIBA
VS 55D (512 x 704 / 50 Hz - 8.99 Mhz)
CTI-03A-1 CT 315 Only if the autolocking fails, restart autolocking after increasing the sync threshold
to 200.
CTI-03A-2 CT 316 Sequence of operation :
TCT-20A CT 317 Main menu : ‘Autolocking presets’
TCT-300 CT 318 Sub menu : ‘Sync threshold (now ...)’
TCT-300S CT 320 Sub-sub menu : ‘Enter threshold setting’ - ‘Enter choice :’ 200
TCT-400 CT 321 Main menu : ‘Search video parameters’
TCT-400S CT 322
TCT-60A CT 329
TCT-60A 10-30 CT 330
TCT-60A 50 CT 331
TCT-70A CT 339
TCT-80A CT 340
TCT-80A 20 CT 341
TCT-80A-X CT 342
TCT-80A-X-SER CT 343

ELSCINT
APEX 409 COMPUTER NM 280 If the autolocking fails, start following sequence :
APEX 409 AG NM 281 Main menu : ’Autolocking presets’
APEX 410 M NM 282 Sub menu : ‘Halfline lockout (now ...)’
APEX HELIX HR NM 286 Sub-sub menu : ‘Delay = 3/4 linetime’
APEX SP-... NM 287 Main menu : ‘Search video parameters’
-292
APEX SPX-4HR NM 295
APEX SPX-4M NM 296
APEX SPX-6HR NM 298
APEX SPX-HELIX HR NM 301
APEXVIEW NM 302
XPERT NM 304 Although sync is available on the Green signal, Hsync and Vsync must be
connected to the VSI too.
PICKER
CS 9100 US Only if the autolocking fails, increment the sync threshold to 200.
CS 9150 640 Sequence of operation : Main menu : ‘Autolocking presets’
CS 9300 641 Sub menu : ‘Sync Threshold (now ... )’
CS 9500 643 Sub-sub menu : ‘Enter threshold setting’ - ‘Enter choice :’
645 200
ARTOSCAN (0.5 T) MR The text-only image available on this system is not suitable for autolocking. Select a
medical image with as much text as possible and maximum contrast.
Then start autolocking.

1.3 Characteristics of the VSI board

• Successor of M6U
• Single VME slot
• Low/Medium/High Line rate
• 1 - 4 inputs per VSI board (1 to 3 B&W or 1 B&W and 1 Colour)
• Single pass
• High quality Image
• Use in Drystar 3000, Drystar 2000 and MG 3000
• Auto video adjustment (video data + filter + offset + gain)
• Number of pixels per line: max. 2048
• Number of lines per frame: max. 2048
• Horizontal frequency: 15 .. 100 kHz
• Adjustable composite sync slicer
• Adjustable backporch pulse delay and pulse width.
• Pixel Clock: internal via on-board PLL. Frequency range : 5... 150 Mhz
• Incrementing in steps of 1 pixel
• Stability: ≤1/4 pixeltime (=jitter + drift after warm-up time ≈ 15’)
• Pixel clock phase increment: 0.5 ns. (min.=0 max.=128 ns)
• Digitizing part 8 bit resolution with SNR ≥ 48 dB
• A/D linearity:± 1 LSB = ± 0.4%
• Bandwidth ≥ 115 Mhz
• Amplitude: 1000mV ± 40 %
• Differential AC coupled with backporch clamping
• Extemal composite sync amplitude 0.3V to TTL (=5V) incl. comp. video.
• Filtering: 3 low pass filters on-board: 12.5 - 25 - 50 Mhz
• 3 connector plates, 3/2 slots
• Sync: 2 external sync inputs per board
• Sync input 1 : HD+VD (composite sync)
• Analog input
• Digital input (TTL)
• Sync input 1: HD
• Sync input 2: VD

2 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW OF USED COMPONENTS
2.1 VSI frame grabber board

This VME-board takes out of the analog video signal an snapshot-image (frame grabbing),
and digitises this image for further processing. The calibration of this board in function of the
delivered video signal, is done full automatically in software (AUTOLOCKING software).
2.2 VIDCOM II - Transmitter box

Adapts the video-signal available on coax-cable, to a signal on fibre cable;
• Can only be used for Composite Monochrome video (B&W with sync on the video) without
separate external sync.
• It has only one fiber output to a AFR2-receiver board.
• Can be used in combination with the current SWB2+AFR2-boards, as well as with the
previous SWB1 + AFR1-boards at receiver side.
2.3 VIDCOM III - Transmitter box

Can be used in following cases :
• Monochrome video (B&W) with or without separate external sync(s).
• Colour systems : RED, GREEN, BLUE and B&W (of same host), with or without separate
external sync(s).
• It has 3 fiber connections : video (output), sync (output) and source selector (input)
• This transmitter can only be used in combination with the SWB2+AFR2 and SSR1- boards
at receiver side.
2.4 Switchboard SWB2 (internal build in on MG3000)

Multiplex the different signals (R,G, B) as one sequential stream to the VSI-video grabber.
Separate AFR2-modules must be placed on it to get external fibre connectors available, on
which the external signals can be connected.
This board can be used in combination with VIDCOM II- or III- transmitters.
2.5 Video and sync Source Selector Requester SSR1

This board is only needed when one of the connected transmitter boxes on SWB2 is of type
VIDCOM III. It is not needed when the three users are VIDCOM II -Tx boxes (pure B&W
video).

3 AUTOLOCKING
Remark: An up to date description of
autolock you will always get
together with the interface in the
document „VSI Tooling: Autolock“.
3.1 Getting started

• It is supposed that all video inputs which are to be autolocked are already installed.
• The autolocking software can be started up in program IMOS : choose Install - Video
alignment for VSI.
• If necessary, the Autolock program can run in parallel with the rest of the Drystar software,
but it will keep the VSI occupied for the whole time. This is not recommended though, as it
will slow down the locking process.
• In case autolock returns „out of memory“ messages make a reset of the printer and try
again.
3.2 Operation and implementation

Note: Type “0” or “q” during autolocking, to escape to main menu or to quit the autolocker.
3.2.1 User selection menu:
E.g. : Autolock software 0.08
Select user
1 : user 1 black & white
2 : user 1 colour
3 : user 2 black & white
4 : user 2 colour
0 : Exit
Enter choice: 2
Select colour to be used for pixelclock search

1 = red
2 = green
3 = blue
Enter choice : (default 2)
Section 9 / 10 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

In case SWB1 was configured :
*****************************
Handling user 1 colour
connect red to VID.1 IN
connect green to VID.2 IN
connect blue to VID.3 IN
Video ID : 1101
Modality :
ATL
US Ultramark 9 HDI
*****************************
In case SWB2 was configured :
*****************************
Handling user 1 colour
on SWB2, connect video to Video 1 in, sync to Sync 1 in (if needed)
on SSR1, connect selector to User 1 (if needed)
Video ID : 1101
Modality :
ATL
US Ultramark 9 HDI
*****************************
This is only an example of how this menu looks like and works.
The number of users, available to be autolocked is depending on the configuration, where a
VSI board was selected as input. Configuration, which includes the selection of the
switchboard, must always be done BEFORE starting the autolocking.
If a colour instance is selected, the software will lock all 3 colours, but start with the selected
one. That colour will be used to determine the pixel clock frequency. So, the provided 'text'
image should have edges in that colour signal !
Typing ‘enter’ will select the default colour, which is „green“.
Most video parameters are identical for the 3 colours, so only a few parameters must be
recalibrated for the other 2 colours.
Before going to the main menu the following data is listed about the system that will be
autolocked :
• User number
• B&W or Colour
• On what connector the video has to be connected at the back of the MG or Drystar
• Unique identification number of this OEM system
• Vender of this OEM system
• Type of this OEM system
Autolocking guidelines related to this modality (not displayed in this example)
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 11

Remark 1 : Changing to another user

From now on, all following tools will keep using the currently selected installation : e.g.
User 1 Black & White or User 2 Colour, which was selected in this ‘User selection
menu’. Switching to another installation will be possible by typing : “0” (Exit) in the Main
menu.
Remark 2 : Help info related to the installed OEM modality

The Autolocker will consult a special file after the user number has been selected and before
the main menu is displayed. This file contains a list of host systems that need extra manual
interaction before and/or during the autolocking sequence. These guidelines are only related
to the locking process and must help the technicians to calibrate without any problems and to
guaranty the best possible image quality.
First the video identifier number (Input_0x_file) of the selected user will be read from the
configuration file MGA0 and checked if there is info on this system in the comment file. If so,
the info will be displayed. This info can at any time be redisplayed by typing
‘7 : Display installation info’ in the Main menu.
Some examples :
Philips Gyroscan S15 (MR) :
“Push Copy button on keypad/console within 5 seconds before running the autolocker”
Elscint APEX SP (NM) :
Following action might be necessary before autolocking:
Select main menu : ‘4: Autolocking presets’
and submenu ‘7: Halfline lockout (now default)’
and item ‘3: delay = 3/4 linetime’
This comment file will always be updated together with the file ‘autolock.prg’.
Therefore it is importance that R&D gets feedback of ANY installation, where
manual interaction was needed during the autolocking procedure, and surely
of those systems that fail.
MED-CSO Munich, will collect all these logfiles + additional information and
make it available to R&D via bulletin board.
Please, read chapter “VSI Evaluation Form” for more info concerning the
needed information.
Remark 3 : Going back from main menu without saving

If you don’t save the new parameters, which were found by using
main menu ‘1 : Search video parameters’ or
‘5 : Individual video parameter tuning tools’
and you ‘Exit’ to the User selection menu”, the software will ask you if you want to save the
new configuration. If you want to save, it will be saved in a .U00 file. If not, it is important to
know that the following captures before a reset, will use the newly found parameters, even
those that weren’t saved, and that only the old parameters can be used after resetting the
system (by typing ‘mon res’, hardware reset or power off/on).
Section 9 / 12 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

3.2.2 Main menu
1 : Search video parameters

2 : Save video parameters in .U00 file
3 : Capture image
4 : Autolocking presets
5 : Individual video parameter tuning tools
6 : Display current video parameters
7 : Display installation info
0 : Exit
Enter choice: _
3.2.2.1 Search video parameters :

The first question is related to the type of sync that will be used :
Which type of sync input ?

1 : Composite video (sync on video signal)
2 : External composite sync
3 : Hdrive and Vdrive (active low)
4 : Sync on green (VID.2 IN on switch board) (*)
Enter choice: _
(*) ‘(VID.2 IN on switch board) is not displayed when SWB2 is used.

In case of a black and white video, the sync could be on the video signal (composite sync), or
as one separate analog video or a separate composite digital sync (external composite sync)
or as two separate digital syncs (Hdrive and Vdrive). In case of colour, the sync could be on
all the three video signals (composite video) or on only the green (sync on green).
***** Connect sync + video source to input *****

***** Select image with high contrast text *****
Press return when done: _
The first image should contain horizontal textlines (patient name, hospital name, ... see
“Some additional guidelines” below). Then, the sync and video signals are analyzed and
video parameters are calculated.
Sometimes the software might display some warnings, which should not be seen as fatal
errors, e.g. :
Warning: detected hsync tip out of bounds (0.4 usec), check sync signal
enter 1 to ignore error or anything else to exit: _
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 13

or
Warning : line rate ( 84.134 Khz ) may be too high

Press return to continue: _
One or more pixelclock frequency’s might be found. Typing ‘enter’ selects the default one
(‘1’). Sometimes one of the others could be the correct one. This will be found when analyzing
the captured image, which has a completely wrong aspect ratio. In that case the other
possible frequency is a multiple of the default one and has almost the same score value. In
those cases the installation info would display a guideline, which helps to select the correct
item.
E.g. :
Possible pix/line :
1. 928 pix/line, freq = 14.500 mhz, score : 90.812500
2. 1392 pix/line, freq = 21.750 mhz, score : 94.604881
Just press return to select best pixelfrequency (nr 1 of list)
Enter choice (or pix/line or pixel freq. in Mhz): _
Remark : When entering a pixelfrequency in Mhz, make sure to type a decimal point.
E.g. : 10 Mhz would be entered 10.0
Then the video filter will be selected. The default cut-off frequency of the video filter will be
selected as just above the found pixelclock frequency : e.g. when the frequency is 14.75 Mhz,
the 25 Mhz filter will be used. This will be done automatically, but it could always be modified
by executing main menu ‘5 : Individual video parameter tuning tools’ and submenu ‘4 :
Recalibrate video filter setting’.
E.g. :
selecting suitable video filter setting

2.0 LSB noise (1 LSB correlated) detected when filter 3 is used
Then, a 'wide' image containing brightest white and darkest black is requested
***** Select wide image with max and min brightness *****
Press return when done
‘Wide’ image = image with data on leftmost and rightmost, on topmost and
bottommost edges.
This image is used to find the active video area and to calibrate video gain and offset.
After the parameters have been found, the autolocker returns to the main menu.
For colour : the 'wide' image should contain areas where EACH of the colour signals attains
maximal and minimal brightness.
Section 9 / 14 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Sometimes it might happen that the autolocker fails. Then it will come up with following
submenu :
Sync analysis aborted

1 : Retry
2 : Enter sync parameters
0 : Exit to main menu
Enter choice: _
The choice is given to retry (‘1’), to manually enter all parameters (‘2’), or to exit to the main
menu (‘0’).
3.2.2.2 Save video parameters in .U00 file

When you are satisfied with the parameter settings, these must be saved before you exit the
autolocker. In case of colour, all parameters of the 3 colours will be saved.
If you don’t save the new parameters, which were found after executing ‘1 : Search video
parameters’ or ‘5 : Individual video parameter tuning tools’ of the main menu, it is important to
know that the following captures will use the newly found parameters, even those that weren’t
saved, and that only the old parameters can be used after resetting the system (by typing
‘mon res’, hardware reset or power off/on).
If someone forgot to save, following warning will be displayed when going back to the user
selection menu :
Warning : current video parameters will be lost after reset

Save video parameters ? 0 = no 1 = yes : 1
3.2.2.3 Capture image
1: Use keypad for making test image

2: Save image as tiff file
3: Send image to display board (if installed)
0: Exit to main menu
Enter choice : _
The parameters found by executing

‘1 : Search video parameters’ or
‘5 : Individual video parameter tuning tools’
of the main menu can be used to capture an image. The image can be sent to the printer, a
tiff file or a monitor.
These parameters don’t have to be saved before capturing ! It might be that the operator
wants to check the new parameters first, and compare the resulting image with an image
taken with previous parameters.
If the result looks better, the operator can still save them with
‘2 : Save video parameters in .U00 file’.
If not, he can go back to the previous parameters, by not saving and resetting the complete
system.
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 15

1. Submenu ‘1 selected: Use keypad for making test image’

The following messages will be displayed:
press STORE on keypad to capture image
Press return to go back to program after image has been captured
To send a captured image to a printer, the autolocker will release its control over the VSI.
Thus, one or more testprints can be made using the keypad.
After the images have been captured, the autolocker can be entered again by typing return.
After typing return the following text is displayed to help the user if there are problems with the
testprint(s).
Hints in case of image problems :

If the aspect ratio of the printed image doesn't correspond to the ratio
of the monitor image, it can be corrected by changing the resolution
settings.
Press 1 if you want to do this.
If the image text is not as bright as parts of the medical image and you
want to change this, don't adjust the VSI parameters but use the MNU window
and level parameters to manipulate the brightness range
Press return (or 1) to continue _
Pressing 1 will call the aspect ratio tool.
Aspect ratio tool :

Differences in aspect ratio between monitor image and printed image can result when the
monitor's pixel shape is not square. This difference can be compensated by rescaling the
image in one dimension.
This has nothing to do with the way VSI captures an image. It only changes the way the
image will be printed.
The scaling can be controlled by the MNU parameter 'resolution', but the VSI now has its own
resolution parameters which will overrule the MNU setting.
Section 9 / 16 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

The aspect ratio tool takes you step by step through the procedure to calculate the resolution
parameters. The following text is displayed when the tool is running :
Method :
Aspect ratio differences are corrected by printing a reference image,
measuring the size of corresponding horizontal and vertical distances
on printed image and monitor, calculating resolution parameters and
printing the image using these parameters.
Step 1: Put a reference image on screen (with large horizontal and vertical
features).
Step 2: For precision, select your layout so that the printed image is as
large as possible.
Step 3: Press STORE on keypad to capture image
Press return after image has been captured _
Step 4 : Select two image features on the same horizontal line which are
far apart and measure the distance (in mm) between them
(don't use the screen borders as image features)
Horiz. distance on MONITOR image : _
Horiz. distance on PRINTED image :
Now measure a vertical distance (in mm)

Vert. distance on MONITOR image :
Vert. distance on PRINTED image :
Calculated settings : horizontal: _ vertical:
Step 5 : press STORE on keypad to print your test image again with
these new settings
Press return after image has been captured _
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 17

Press return if these settings are ok, or 1 to restore the previous ones _
The ‘store’ button on the keypad may NOT be pressed for capturing a video
image on the VSI board, if the autolocking program is still in use !
• To capture an image to check the results, use main menu ‘3 : Capture image’, submenu ‘1
• Use keypad for making test image’, because only then the autolocker releases control
over the VSI. Another possibility is exiting the autolocker.
2. Submenu ‘2 selected: Save image as tiff file’

To save a captured image as a tiff file on disk, a filename can be entered. If the C- partition is
write-protected, specify another partition to save the file : e.g. d:\img.tif.
The default filename is D:\COLnr_ or D:\BW_nr_ .
3. Submenu ‘3 selected:‘3 : Send image to display board (if installed)’

Sub menu (3) can only be used if a video display board is plugged in : Primagraphics or
Virtuoso. This display board may not already been configured as standard output device.
3.2.2.4 Autolocking presets
Preset following parameters before searching video parameters :

1: Sync filter (now default)
2: Video filter (now default)
3: Sync threshold (now default)
4: Clamp delay (now default)
5: Clamp width (now default)
6: PLL on hold during vsync (now default)
7: Halfline lockout (now default)
8: Dual pass selection (now default)
9: High frequency selection (now off)
10: Extended info display selection (now on)
Enter choice : _
These parameters can be preset to a certain value, before the autolocking starts, while
otherwise the locking would fail or result in a bad image quality.
Only preset these parameters, if it is followed by the

Autolock sequence ‘1 : Search video parameters’ .
Changing the clamp width without autolocking e.g. won’t change the nve
configuration file of the selected video input or doesn’t change the current video
parameters when selecting ‘6 : Display current video parameters’.
Section 9 / 18 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Description :
• (1) Sync filter :
Preset sync filter :

0: default (on if linetime > 58 µsec)
1: filter on
2: filter off
Enter choice : _
The default setting is ‘sync filter on’, if the linerate is less than 17 Khz, and ‘sync filter off’ if
line the linerate is higher than 17 Khz.
• (2) Video filter :
Preset sync filter :

0: default (measured optimal setting)
1: 12.5 Mhz
2: 25 Mhz
3: 50 Mhz
4: passthrough
Enter choice : _
The default setting is depending on the found pixelclock frequency. The default cut-off
frequency of the selected video filter will be just above the found pixelclock frequency : e.g.
when the frequency is 14.75 Mhz, the 25 Mhz filter will be used.
In some cases, e.g. in case an analog video fiber is used and certainly, if the system has a
very low analog bandwidth, it might be that a lower cut-off frequency is advised, which is in
our example the 12.5 Mhz video filter.
• (3) Sync Threshold: :
Preset sync threshold :

0: default (96)
1: enter threshold setting
Enter choice: _
Case (1) is selected :
Enter value from 0 (sync tip) to 255 (400 mV above sync tip) :
It controls the threshold level for the sync signal. In case of correlated noise or glitch on the
sync edge, this value should be adjusted. The threshold must be moved away from the noisy
part of the edge. The threshold level is measured as an offset from the sync tip. The typical
sync pulse is 300 mV high. The default threshold is the halfway point at 150 mV, which is the
value ‘96’.
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 19

Values : sync_threshold 0 means threshold at 0 mV (= the sync tip)

sync_threshold 1 means threshold at 1.568 mV ...(steps of 1.568 mV)
...
sync_threshold 96 means threshold at 150 mV above sync tip
...
sync_threshold 255 means threshold at 400 mV
Examples : two cases where the default sync threshold needed to be incremented.
ICON (21”) : falling sync edge with correlated glitch and fall time of upper part that was
steeper than lower part. Putting the sync threshold higher and above the glitch resulted in a
much more stable video image. Sync filtering would also remove the glitch but makes the fall
time much less steep. Because the pixelfrequency was very high (110 Mhz), changing the
sync threshold was the only solution.
Toshiba 80 A : The default sync threshold was relatively low because of the wide glitch. This
resulted in an autolock failure “too few sync pulses”, because the sync was too small for the
autolocking software to be detected as a valid sync. Shifting the threshold from 96 to 150
solved this problem and resulted in a very good image quality.
• (4) Clamp Delay:
Preset clamp delay :

0: default (675 nsec)
1: enter delay
Enter choice: _
Enter delay after rising Hsync (between 75 - 6375 nsec) : _
Default value: 675 nsec (after the rising /HSYNC edge)

Min. value: 75 nsec
Max. value: 6375 nsec in steps of 100 nsec.
The typed value will always be rounded to the nearest possible value.
• (5) Clamp Width : :
Preset clamp width :

0: default (600 nsec)
1: enter clamp width
Enter choice: 1
Section 9 / 20 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Enter value (between 100 - 6400 nsec) : _
Default value: 600 nsec pulse width.

Min. value: 100 nsec
Max. value: 6400 nsec in steps of 100 nsec.
The typed value will always be rounded to the nearest possible value.
The clamp pulse controls which part of the backporch will be used for clamping (DC restore).
The clamp delay specifies the delay between the rising edge of the /HSYNC (active low) and
the start of the clamping. The clamp width specifies the clamping time.
• (6) PLL on hold during vsync: :
Preset PLL on hold :

0: default (on hold if no serrations)
1: PLL on hold
Enter choice: _
The default setting is depending on the serration pulses during the VSYNC tip. If there are no
such pulses, the PLL is automatically set on hold by the autolocker software during the
VSYNC tip, to avoid PLL disturbance. Some video systems however have a shift of one ore
more falling HSYNC edges, which occurs only during the VSYNC tip. The autolocker
recognizes the serrations, but can’t detect this shift. To avoid PLL jumps, the PLL should be
preset on hold before autolocking.
• (7) Halfline lockout : :
Preset halfline lockout :

0: default (linetime - 1 usec)
1: delay = linetime - 1 usec
2: delay = linetime - 450 nsec
3: delay = 3/4 linetime
Enter choice: _
It’s a hardware related parameter. It defines when the hardware should start looking for the
next falling horizontal sync edge, which will be the reference input for the PLL. This start can
be 1 µsec (default and ‘1’) before the next edge is theoretically expected, 450 nsec before the
next edge is theoretically expected (‘2’) or after 3/4 of a line time (‘3’).
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 21

Examples :
1. Siemens systems with very bad Transicon can have negative going glitches, that will be
seen as PLL reference input. This last glitch can occur at 600 nsec before the actual
HSYNC edge. In those cases it is necessary to use the mode where the system starts
looking at 450 nsec before the HSYNC edge. This way an extra sync cable can be omitted.
2. Elscint SP(X) systems have one HSYNC edge just before the vertical blanking that starts
2.5 µsec too late. In this case it is necessary to use the mode where the system starts
looking at 3/4 of a line time. Otherwise the PLL would start locking on the pre- and post
egalization pulses while also the field detection would fail.
• (8) Dual pass selection : :
Preset dual pass selection :

0: default (dual pass if pixelclock > 125 mhz)
1: dual pass
2: no dual pass
Enter choice: _
By default, an image will be captured in dual pass mode if the pixelclock

frequency is higher than 125 mhz. Overruling this setting may compromise
image quality. Not recommended.
• (9) High frequency selection : :
Preset high frequency selection:

0: off
1: on
Enter choice: _
Experimental tool which will make the autolocker try and find pixelclock frequencies up to
200 Mhz. Not recommended.
• (10) Extended info display selection :
Preset extended info display selection :

0 : off
1 : on
Enter choice: _
Controls the amount of info displayed on the screen during autolock.

By default, extended info is on, which means that a lot of extra diagnostic info is displayed,
and that the pixelclock frequency can be selected manually. If extended info is off, only the
most important results will be displayed and user interaction will be minimal.
Section 9 / 22 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

3.2.2.5 Individual video parameter tuning tools

In some cases it can be useful to control certain video parameters without having to go
through the whole locking procedure. These tools provide such control. They assume that
most of the current video parameters are OK and will perform image captures with these
settings in order to tune some parameters. Running them with completely wrong parameter
settings may produce meaningless results and sampling errors.
1: Recalibrate borders and/or grey levels

2: Manual border adjustment
3: Recalibrate phase
4: Recalibrate video filter setting
5: Select other pixel clock setting
Enter choice: _
• (1) Recalibrate borders and/or grey levels :

The active window and / or the gain and set-up calibration will be repeated.
If the image you used during ‘1 : Search video parameters’ session had a too small active
window, this will be noticed as missing pixels or lines at the borders when a larger image is
captured.
Several options can be selected :
1: Recalibrate borders and grey levels

2: Recalibrate grey levels
3: Recalibrate borders
4: Recalibrate borders (extending current active window)
Enter choice: _
Submenu ‘1 : Recalibrate borders and grey levels’

When recalibrating the active area, it is mostly advisable to have the gain and set-up
recalibrated, because the additional found region of interest might contain some pixels which
are whiter (blacker) than the whitest white (blackest black) found in previous area.
Submenu ‘2 : Recalibrate grey levels’

If the user wants to have his active area unaffected, but wants to recalibrate only the gain and
set-up value this submenu should be selected.
Submenu ‘3 : Recalibrate borders’

If the resulting region of interest is too large (too many lines or pixels per line) or is completely
wrong, this submenu should be selected. It only recalculates the borders independent of the
previously found one. The set-up and gain value will remain unaffected.
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 23

Submenu ‘4 : Recalibrate borders (extending current active window)’

When it turns out that the printed image has a few missing pixels and/or lines, this submenu
should be selected. The found set-up and gain value will remain unaffected. Example :
When the selected image on which this submenu will run, has e.g. less lines compared to the
selected image on which the main menu ‘1 : Search video parameters’ has run, but has more
pixels, this tool will add the additional pixels found in the new image, but keep the number of
lines of the previous image.
• (2) Manual border adjustment :

Sometimes the right border settings can only be edited manually.
Example of how this tool works :
---------------------- ---------------------
| 26 | | |
| --------- | | |-------| |
| | 1028 | | | 399 | 1156 | 109 |
| --------- | | |-------| |
| 2 | | |
---------------------- ---------------------
enter top margin (now 26 lines) : 40
enter bottom margin (now 2 lines) : 10
enter left margin (now 399 pixels) : 500
enter right margin (now 109 pixels) : 800
---------------------- ---------------------
| 40 | | |
| --------- | | |-------| |
| | 1006 | | | 500 | 364 | 800 |
| --------- | | |-------| |
| 10 | | |
---------------------- ---------------------
If the number of active pixels per line is not a multiple of 4, some destinations
(like MCL connected with FOI to an MG3000 when “Bit map mode” is not used)
may have problems.
If you change the margins so that the number of active pixels per line is not a
multiple of 4, you’ll get a warning.
Example :
Some ATL Ultramark 9 systems (US-Colour) generate a binary code during the vertical
backporch. The autolocker can’t see the difference between this code and valid image data
and results in vertical stripes on top of the image. In this case it is necessary to manually
lower the top border, so that these stripes disappear in the image.
• (4) Recalibrate phase :
Section 9 / 24 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

The pixel phase is tuned again. This may be necessary if video cables have been changed or
the original lock was performed when the board had not reached a stable operational
temperature yet .
• (5) Recalibrate video filter setting :

In the course of searching the parameters, the optimal video filter is automatically selected. If
you want to experiment with this setting e.g. to reduce noise, this tool enables you to change
the filter setting and will then readjust the parameters that are influenced by this change.
Never change this parameter directly in the nve configuration table, because changing this
parameters also influences the gain, phase, ... .

Press return when done _
selecting suitable video filter setting

2.1 LSB noise ( 1 LSB correlated) detected when filter 3 is used
selected filter setting 1
Select filter to override this choice or just press enter
0: 12.5 Mhz 1 : 25 Mhz 2 : 50 Mhz 3 : no filter
Pixelclock = 14.500 Mhz
Enter filter setting :
Tying ‘enter’ will select the default one. Based on the LSB noise calculations, the operator
could eventually select another one.
• (6) Select other pixelclock setting :

If during the autolock procedure, no pixelclock could be found or if the found result didn’t
satisfy the client, this tool can be used to type in a certain pixelclock. The software then
automatically readjusts all the other parameters like phase shift, active area, ... .
Current setting 1664 pix/line, pixelfreq = 69.998 mhz, linetime = 23.772 usec
Enter number of pixels per line or pixel freq. in Mhz : 1000
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 25

***** Select wide image with max and min brightness *****
3.2.2.6 Display current video parameters

Selecting this submenu, will display a summary of all the video parameters currently in use,
whether they were already saved or not.
Example :
video is non-interlaced with 1056 lines per frame

frame rate: 79.671 hz
line time: 11.886 usec line rate : 84.133 Khz
total pixels per line = 1664 pixelfrequency = 139.997 mhz
vsync serrations present
Hsync tip width: 0.4 usec Vsync tip width : 35.7 usec or 3.0 line(s)
video filter: passthrough sync filter disabled
active window: _
--------------------- ---------------------
| 40 | | |
| --------- | | |-------| |
| | 1006 | | | 500 | 364 | 800 |
| --------- | | |-------| |
| 10 | | |
--------------------- ---------------------
Horizontal window (usec) hsync + backp : 3.57 active : 2.60 frontp

: 5.71
Captured image dimensions : 364 pixels x 1006 lines
Press return to continue _
3.2.2.7 Display installation info

Selecting this submenu will display the same info again, which was automatically generated
when going from User selection menu to Main menu.
3.3 Some additional guidelines

• If the switch board is used, make sure the signalcable between VSI and switchboard is
connected. Otherwise the results can be very misleading.
• Perform autolock only when the VSI has reached a stable operational temperature. This is
especially important for video signals with high pixelclock frequencies, where even small
deviations from the correct parameter settings (caused by large temperature differences)
may cause image degradation.
• As the image will be used to find the pixel clock frequency, you need to provide fast large
transients at multiple pixel distances. Text is ideal for this.
Section 9 / 26 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

• Some suggestions to make it easier for the software to find the right pixelclock frequency :
− generate textlines on the monitor, which are as long as possible. Longer textlines are
better than different short ones.
− avoid that the text changes during autolocking : do not move the cursor or arrow, freeze
the time indication (if possible).
− large brightness contrast between text and background is useful.
− it is preferable not to have medical image data or other grey areas on the same
scanlines as the text.
− if you can enter text yourself, use different characters, not a row of XXX’s.
− For finding the active area (horizontal and vertical window), check if the image covers
the complete screen. If possible put the cursor or arrow on the outer edge(s) of the
image before the autolocker starts finding the windows.
• The autolocker may fail to find the pixelclock frequency when :
− the pixelclock frequency is out of working range
− noise disrupts the sync signal (forcing sync filter can help)
− video undershoots disrupt the sync signal (forcing video filter can help)
− excessive noise, jitter on text, video bandwidth too low (put more text on image)
− video signal is not made on a pixel basis (e.g. Philips BV25 - try to fill in the pixelclock,
found by calculation of the correct pixel aspect ratio - try to obtain a circle again)
− impossible to provide a good text image (see previous item)
4 VSI EVALUATION FORM
For the evaluation of the VSI installation and for updating our OEM-autolock file, following
items are needed :
• A log file, generated during the whole autolocking procedure, using a PC with logging on
and with “Extended info display on”. Use “XT -log=file.log” to start the logging and “ALT
X” to abort the logging.
• The final configuration files VSIXXX0x.U00 for B&W or VSIRED0x.U00, ..., VSIBLU0x.U00
for colour. The easiest way to do, is to type “nve VSIx” or “nve VSIRED0x, nve VSIGRN0x,
nve VSIBLU0x” after exiting the autolocking program and before aborting the logfile.
• One (or more) tiff file(s) of the image :
Use “Capture Image” (Main menu 4) - “Save image as tiff file” (Sub menu 2) of the
autolocker.
Note that if the file is e.g. larger than 1.4 Mbytes (case of colour image), one can use
“SPLIT <filename> [/SIZE] “ to split the tiff file, so that they can be sent on different floppy
disks.
Use “Append [-auto] <source_files> <destination_file>“ to append the files again.
E.g. : split test.tif /SIZE=1000000
append -auto test.tif
Fill in the form added on next page or add it, by editing this information in front of the log file.
These items should be send to MED-CSO Munich, where all data will be taken from bulletin
board for further evaluation and updating the OEM-autolock file. This should be done in case
of problems, but it is also advisable to do when any manual interaction was needed during
autolocking or even when no problems occurred.
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 27

VSI Evaluation Form:
Form sent by:

Division:
Date:
VSI test environment :
• Used in : ❒ MG3000
❒ DRYSTAR
❒ Other:
• Used with Switch Board (SWB)
❒ Yes
❒ No
• Software version of:
❒ AUTOLOCK.PRG
❒ VSI.PRG
❒ MEGA
• Revision of VSI:
SWB board:
• Cable lengths :
• Which SYNC input is used :
Host system environment :

• Hospital name :
• Hospital address:
• Host system specification

Company name:
Type:
Specialties:
(Eventually) problems or general remarks :
Section 9 / 28 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Additional data :
• Log file name(s) :
• Tiff file name(s) :
5 INSTALLING VSI1 AT DRYSTAR 3000
• Before disconnecting the Drystar 3000 from the mains and opening the front panel, touch
the chassis to ground any electrostatic charge which may be present.
Power-off and disconnect the Drystar 3000 from the mains before opening
the VME compartement and starting the installation procedure!
Jumper J1 : CLOSED
Jumper J2 : CLOSED
Jumper J3 : CLOSED
Rotary Switch S1 :
- at 0 for first VSI-board
- at 1 for second VSI-board
- at 2 for thirth VSI-board
• Set the jumpers and rotary switch S1 according the text near the drawing above.
• Remark : the position of rotary switch S1 is independently of the software installation as
USER1, USER2 or USER3 input.
• Locate a free VME-slot (slot 5, 6 or 7) into the VME-rack, and plug the board into the rack.
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 29

• Connecting the Fiber-optic cable

The fiber optic cables are different from the fiber optic cables used for the FOI (digital
fiber optic link). They have a core/cladding of 100/140 µm.
• Connect the cable between the Vidcom II-transmitter box and the SWB2-VIDEO-input
related to the configured input:
The maximum cable length is limited to 350 m, independent of the pixelrate or bandwidth.
Note : In case of high performant workstations, using lots of small characters with e.g. a black
background, some reflections in the cable can be visible (characters have a second border);
These reflections are less visible when shorther cable is used;
Streaking effects are due to temperature effects in the transmitter, and the cable length has
no influence on this (streaking effect = black-level changes in time).
5.1 Restrictions and Recommendations

5.1.1 Configured INPUT Number must correspond with mounted AFR2-position
Verify that the AFR2-board is mounted ON THE POSITION OF THE INPUT NUMBER YOU
HAVE CONFIGURED.
Take the following configuration as an example(see drawing at end):

USER 1 = VSI with single fiber ; Input signal = Video B&W with remote control
USER 2 = MFRI with remote control
USER 3 = VSI with multi-fiber : Video B&W and Colour without remote control
• So input 1 will use a VIDCOM II Tx of which the fiber is connected to the AFR2 board with
the label “VIDEO 1”
• Input 3 will use a VIDCOM III Tx of which the fiber is connected to the AFR2 board with
label “VIDEO 3” for the video and “SYNC 3” for the separate sync link, while also a selector
board is needed (SSR1) of which the connector with label “USER 3” is connected.
• All other AFR2-modules corresponding to “VIDEO 2”, “SYNC 1” and “SYNC 2” may not be
connected (It is not necessary to have AFR2-boards on those not-used positions; If AFR2
is not present, the connector plate hole can be closed with a plastic cap).
• On the SSR1-board, the positions “USER 1” and “USER 2” must be left unconnected.
Note : A USER number is the specified input number assigned to an input or host system
during the configuration procedure. The separate Red, Green, Blue and B&W inputs of
“user 3”, are called channels. So an MG3000 can have maximum 3 “Users” of which
each user can have up to 4 “channels”. -- So maximum 12 video channels can be
connected to the same VSI board.
Section 9 / 30 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

5.1.2 Connecting different B&W sources to the same VIDCOM III Tx box not allowed.
It is not allowed and even impossible to connect different B&W video sources to one VIDCOM
III Tx box.
5.1.3 Use 3 different VIDCOM-II transmitter boxes to transfer colour over fiber.
It is also not allowed and quite costly to use 3 separate VIDCOM-II Tx boxes and connect
them to the three separate video inputs on SWB2 : “VIDEO 1,2 and 3”. It is impossible for the
SW to handle these inputs as the 3 channels of the same user.
5.1.4 Eye Safety
The invisible light beam delivered by the LEDs (Fiber optic transmitters : on VIDCOM II and III
-Tx box) may be harmfull to the eyes if improperly handled. Do not view the LED’s output
aperture through a microscope or other focusing device while the LED is in operation. The
used leds are high power LEDs which fall in Laser Class 3B, meaning that interbeam viewing
is always hazardous.
6 SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS OF A POSSIBLE CONNECTION

see on next page. E.g.: One b/w-only Input and one --- ‘full-colour’ (split or consecutive) Input
01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 9 / 31

Section 9 / 32 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98
DD+DIS235.01E Modifications
List of Contents
Revision Order Number Contents

23 DD+DIS065.00E Installation Instructions SW 1.77
30 DD+DIS235.01E Installation Instructions:
Drystar 3000 SW release 1.95
Edition 1, Revision 30 Drystar 3000 (Type 5363) Chapter 10 / i

Modifications DD+DIS235.01E
Chapter 10 / ii Drystar 3000 (Type 5363) Edition 1, Revision 30

HEALTHCARE Modifications
Imaging >
Order No.: DD+DIS235.01E
Drystar 3000
*1UVGYG1*
1 Piece UVGYG MA1
Type 5361
Installation Instructions:
Drystar 3000 SW release 1.95
This modification instruction is also enclosed to the modification kit.
Reason for the modification:

Drystar 3000 Software 1.95 released
· The DICOM Software is not included in the SW package.
IMOS DCM2.43 is required, in case the printer is installed in combination
with a LINX Multi-Flex.
· The Postscript Software is not included in the SW package.
In case the printer is configured for Postscript the software MPS32493 is
required.
Required time:
Up to 3 hours
Necessary tools:
· Service PC with RS232 cable
· IMOS Start409
printed in Germany 02 / 2002

List of Contents
1 General ...................................................................... 4
1.1 Scope of Delivery .................................................................... 5
1.2 Estimated time......................................................................... 6
1.3 Printer Software Precondition................................................ 6
1.4 Tool Requirements .................................................................. 6
1.5 Task Code ................................................................................ 6
2 Preparation ............................................................... 7
2.1 Service Software Installation.................................................. 7
2.2 Printout of SMPTE Test Image ............................................... 8
2.3 Check and Evaluation of installed Printer Software............. 9
3 Software Upgrade Rel. 1.7X to 1.95 ....................... 10

3.1 Software installation ............................................................. 10
3.2 Monitor Update ...................................................................... 11
3.3 Film Sensitometry ................................................................. 11
3.4 Film Sensitometry mode adjustment (if necessary)........... 12
3.5 Printout and evaluation of SMPTE test image .................... 12
3.6 Eventual conversion of annotations to uncompressed TIF13
3.7 Backup of machine specific data ......................................... 13
3.8 Error Code installation on Service PC................................. 13
3.9 Introduction of the Operator to the new printer functions. 13
4 Installation of DICOM Version DCM32956............. 15
5 Installation of Postscript Version MPS32943 ....... 16
6 Software Upgrade Rel. 1.3, 1.4 or 1.6 to 1.95 ........ 17

6.1 Backup of machine specific data incl..idf and .tif............... 17
6.2 Check of Macrodensitometer lamp...................................... 18
6.3 Software Installation ............................................................. 18
6.4 Monitor Update ...................................................................... 19
6.5 Restore of all device and customer specific data............... 19
6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................ 20
6.6.1 Activate default layouts.................................................................... 20
Chapter 10 / 2 Drystar 3000 Edition 1, Revision 30

(Type 5361)
6.6.2 Site Info Window ..............................................................................20

6.6.3 Device Info Window .........................................................................21
6.6.4 Set the installation date....................................................................21
6.7 Film Sensitometry ................................................................. 22
6.8 Film Sensitometry mode adjustment (if necessary)........... 22
6.9 Printout and evaluation of SMPTE test image .................... 22
6.10 Eventual DICOM software installation ................................. 22
6.11 Eventual Postscript software installation............................ 22
6.12 Eventual conversion of annotations to uncompressed TIF22
6.13 Backup of machine specific data ......................................... 22
6.14 Error Code installation on Service PC................................. 22
6.15 Introduction of Operator to new printer functions ............. 22
7 History of new features, improvements and solved

problems since SW release 1.40 ........................... 23

(Type 5361)
1 General
This document describes the installation of Drystar 3000 SW release 1.95. It
comprises all steps that are necessary for a proper upgrade procedure.
It is recommended to upgrade the printer to SW release 1.95 only

· if the printer shall be used in combination with the LINX Multi-Flex.
®Only with software Rel. 1.95 the required queue management can
be performed.
· In case of high requirements on image quality consistency:
®With SW Rel. 1.95 the film sensitometry (in combination with a
Dmax calibration) is automatically performed by default with every
new film package.
®The customer gets by default reminded every 1000 films to clean
the TH
®The printer initiates a TH profile calibration automatically every
5000 films
Main benefits of SW release 1.9 compared to SW release 1.7 (complete

list see page 23)
· Performance increase: higher network throughput and faster calculation of
LUTs for 12 bit images
· extended DICOM functionality: The requested image density can be used
as selection criteria, as was already the case for film size, type and color
mode.
· Combined sensitometric and Dmax calibration: The sensitometry adjusts
the Dmax automatically to O.D. 3.0.
· Additional user language support: In addition to the English language for
the local display, also the Dutch language is supported. Other languages
can be installed via IMOS (other languages not yet available).
· For a complete list of new features of software release 1.95 refer to
section 7 of this document.
Possible conflicts:
· The print queue of release 1.95 is not compatible to previous ones.
The print queue must be empty before software upgrade.
· Annotations i.e. TIF files that are compressed (LZW or Packbits or FAX)
cannot be read anymore by the printer. In software release 1.95 only
uncompressed TIF files can be read.
· IMOS Drystar 3000 Rel. 2.20 which is part of the software package gives
installation problems with Windows NT. Recommendation: Use IMOS
Drystar 2.19 for Windows NT. It can be obtained via MEDNET (GSO
Library - Hardcopy - General Info - CSO Freeware)

(Type 5361)
Only in case the upgrade is made from a software < Rel. 1.7X:
· At a few printers manufactured before 11/98 it might be necessary to
replace the macrodensitometer (MDM) lamp or the MDM at the next
service intervention / maintenance after upgrade to SW release 1.95.
Reason: MDM lamp does not support required light intensity. See also
section 6.2 page 18.
· At a few early printers, that were originally delivered with SW release 1.3,
1.4 or 1.6 a software installation incl. formatting of the hard disk is
required. This increases the SW upgrade time about 1 h. See also section
6 page 17.
1.1 Scope of Delivery

Part Amount Purpose
Installation Instructions 1 Installation document for rel. 1.95
User Manual 12 User manual in 12 languages
Reference Manual 1 Reference Manual
IMOS Drystar 3000 V 2.20 2 floppies Service Software, to be installed on
the Service PC
Error messages rel. 1.95 1 floppy
BAS32P14 5 floppies Device Software, to be installed on
the Printer
AOS32947
CAD32948
ECU32950
DI30 1 P94
MON4.29 1 floppy Boot software for Gemini CPU
IMOS Drystar 3000

Drystar MG3000
Rel. 1.95
ERROR
2.20 messages
a:\winstall 1/2 a:\install 1/1 AGF
A
0
R 300
STA
DRY
Hard
disk
Drystar 3000
A GFA
Drystar 3000 Drystar 3000

536162BY.CDR
User
A GFA
3000
STA R
D RY
User MG3000 MG3000 MG3000

A GFA
3000
STA R
D RY
User
R 3000
STA
D RY
Release 1.9 Release 1.9 Release 1.9

Manual
Manual
Manual BAS32P14 AOS32947 CAD32948
1/5 2/5 3/5
Reference
Reference
Manual Drystar 3000
Drystar 3000 Drystar 3000
Manual ST AR
DRY
30
0
FA
AG
MG3000 MG3000 MG3000

Release 1.9 Release 1.9 Monitor 4.29
AGFA
00
30
AR
DRYST
ECU32950 DI30 1P95

4/5 5/5 1/1
Figure 1: Scope of delivery SW Upgrade Kit release 1.95 (CM+309811.2)

(Type 5361)
1.2 Estimated time

· 2 h for software upgrade from release 1.7X
· 3 h for software upgrade from release 1.3, 1.4 or 1.6
1.3 Printer Software Precondition

· SW release 1.3X or higher
1.4 Tool Requirements

· Service PC with IMOS Start ³ 4.09 and IMOS Drystar 3000 ³ 2.19
· RS 232 cable
1.5 Task Code

Recommended task code in the repair report:
® PMV Preventive Maintenance Visit

(Type 5361)
2 Preparation
The preparation comprises the following steps:
# Step Refer to section
1 Service Software Installation 2.1
2 Printout of SMPTE Test Image 2.2
3 Check and Evaluation of installed Printer Software 2.3
2.1 Service Software Installation

In case IMOS Drystar 3000 Rel. 2.19 or 2.20 is already installed, this step can
be skipped.
How to check:
(1) Start IMOS Drystar 3000
(2) Select 'Help - About IMOS'
(3) 'Drystar 2.19' has to be displayed
Figure 2:
IMOS Drystar Screen 'About IMOS'
Note: In case IMOS Drystar 3000 rev. 2.20 is installed, also 2.19 is displayed!
Note: In case IMOS Drystar 3000 < 2.19 is installed in combination with
Windows NT refer to the note 'Possible conflicts' on page 4.
In case IMOS Drystar 3000 Rel. 2.19 or 2.20 is not installed yet, proceed as
follows:
(1) Insert the 1st floppy of IMOS Drystar 3000 rel. 2.20 in the PC floppy drive
(2) Open the Windows Explorer
(3) Double-click on File A:\winstall.exe
(4) Follow the instructions

(Type 5361)
2.2 Printout of SMPTE Test Image

Print a SMPTE_V2 (or SMPTE_V1) test pattern as reference film
(1) Press the 'down' key 3

times ?
ERROR
ESC
1
(2) Select '3 Print Testimage' ENTER
by pressing <ENTER> 3x
(3) Select 'Image Selection' ?

by pressing <ENTER>
ESC
ERROR
2
(4) Press the 'down' key 1 ENTER
time
(5) Select 'SMPTE_V2' (or ?
ERROR
ESC
SMPTE_V1 for software 3

version < 1.7X) by ENTER
pressing <ENTER>
(6) Wait about 2 minutes: The ?
ERROR
ESC
test image will be printed. 4

Press 3 times the 1x
ENTER
<ESCAPE> key.
? ESC
ERROR
5
ENTER
wait ca. 2 minutes

3x
? ESC
6
ERROR
ENTER
536110XB.CDR
Figure 3: Print-out of a SMPTE testimage

(7) Keep the SMPTE test
image as reference film
Figure 4: SMPTE test image

(Type 5361)
2.3 Check and Evaluation of installed Printer Software

(2) In IMOS Drystar 3000 go to 'Tools ® Terminal'
(3) Enter 'drystar' at the prompt
(4) Evaluate the displayed software version as described below:
Figure 5: Example for Drystar software versions
Evaluation of the displayed software versions:

# Software Evaluation Refer to
1 · Drystar Software · Upgrade can be performed · section 3
= Rel. 1.7X without any special measures
· Drystar Software · Software Release 1.95 has to · section 6
< Rel. 1.7X be installed incl. formatting of
the hard disk.
2 MPS Software MPS32943 Software has to be section 5
< mps32943 installed, in case the printer is
used as postscript printer.
3 DCM Software DCM32956 has to be installed, in section 4
< dcm32956 case the printer shall be installed
in combination with a
LINX Multi-Flex.

(Type 5361)
3 Software Upgrade Rel. 1.7X to 1.95

The software upgrade comprises the following steps:

1 Software installation 3.1
2 Monitor Update 3.2
3 Film Sensitometry 3.3
4 Film Sensitometry mode adjustment (if necessary) 3.4
5 Printout and evaluation of SMPTE test image 3.5
6 Eventual DICOM software installation 2.3 and 4
7 Eventual Postscript software installation 2.3 and 5
8 Eventual conversion of annotations to 3.6
uncompressed TIF
9 Backup of machine specific data 3.7
10 Error Code installation on Service PC 3.8
11 Introduction of Operator to new printer functions 3.9
3.1 Software installation

By means of this function the new software is copied onto the harddisk of the
Printer and automatically unzipped.
(1) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Install ® Software ® From Printer floppy'
(2) Select the option 'Choose from advanced', select 'Release' and
press <OK>.
(3) Answer the question 'do you want to enter service mode?' with 'yes'.
(4) Follow the instructions of IMOS Drystar 3000.
Figure 6: SW Upgrade screen in IMOS Drystar 3000

(Type 5361)
3.2 Monitor Update

By means of this function the Monitor EEPROM located on the Gemini II CPU
is re-programmed.
Prerequisite:
The update to the Monitor software version MON4.29 has only to be made at
printers with a Gemini II CPU. The version of the CPU is automatically
detected during the Monitor update procedure. It can also be checked in
advance by looking to the infocounter (IMOS Drystar 3000 ® Repair ®
Infocounter ® View Infocounters). Example:
In the case displayed here the Monitor update will not to be carried out.
It will also not be carried out, in case MON4.29 was previously installed
already.
Installation:
(1) Switch the printer OFF
(2) Insert the diskette Monitor 4.29 in the floppy drive of the printer
(3) Switch the printer ON (automatic update)
The printer must not be switched off during the installation.

The update takes approx. 30 seconds.
Local display of a successful update:
'CPU GEMINI2 25MHZ'

'MON 4.29 ! UPDATING!'
After the update an automatic Reset is executed.
(4) Take the diskette out of the floppy drive after the installation.
Display after an incorrect attempt of a software update

(because of Gemini I installed in the printer):
e.g.:
'CPU GEMINI1 25MHZ'
'MON 4.23 ! NO UPDATE!'
3.3 Film Sensitometry

(1) On the local keypad select:
5: Calibration ® 1: Film sensito ® 2: Calibration
(2) Wait for approx. 10 minutes: A sensitometry testfilm will be printed and
measured with the MDM.
®The sensitometric table for this film will be stored on the harddisk.
®The Dmax will be adjusted to O.D. 3.0

(Type 5361)
3.4 Film Sensitometry mode adjustment (if necessary)

· With software release 1.95 by default a film sensitometry will be initiated,
as soon as the input tray was empty and a new film package is inserted.
· In menu '5 Calibration ® 1: Film sensito ® 5: Mode ® Manual' this can be
switched off. Default = automatic.
For image quality constancy purposes it is recommended to leave the Film

Sensitometry mode on 'automatic'
3.5 Printout and evaluation of SMPTE test image

Again, print a SMPTE test image and compare it with the reference image.
Refer to section 2.2 for an instruction how to print the SMPTE test image.
Evaluate the test image as described below:
Examine the test image at the
Examination
lightbox as follows:
1. Fields 1 (4x) must show constant
distance between the horizontal
and vertical lines.
2. Patterns in fields 2 (4x) must be
visible. They have the same
pattern as fields 1, but less
contrast.
3. Fields 3 (3x) must show constant
density. No stripes or other
artifacts.
4. Field 4 must show 2 different
densities, i.e. inside there must be
a smaller square with slightly Figure 7
lower density.
5. Field 5 must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must be a smaller
square with slightly higher density.
6. Field 6 must show Dmax (default: 3.0 O.D.)
7. Fields 7 must show fog level (for clear based film approx. 0.1 O.D., for
blue based film approx. 0.2 O.D.)
A) If item 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, or 7 is not okay, perform a film sensitometry again.
Evaluation
B) If item 3 is not okay, clean the print head.
Refer to documentation section 13 (FSB24)

(Type 5361)
3.6 Eventual conversion of annotations to uncompressed TIF

Annotations i.e. TIF files that are compressed (LZW or Packbits or FAX)
cannot be read anymore by the printer. In software release 1.95 only
uncompressed TIF files can be read.
Proceeding:
(2) Select 'Install- File Transfer'
(3) Change to drive D: on the Drystar 3000
(4) Load all annotations (extension TIF) to the service PC
(5) Open the files in a pixel program (e.g. Adobe Photoshop or Paint Shop
Pro)
(6) Save the files as TIF 'uncompressed'
(7) Load all annotations back to the Drystar 3000
3.7 Backup of machine specific data

(1) Open the top cover and get the backup floppy (see right hand side)
(2) Insert the backup floppy into the printer floppy drive.
(3) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Install ® backup'
(4) Select the option 'Printer' and press <OK>.
(5) When finished, exit IMOS Drystar 3000, remove the floppy and store it
in the floppy holder
Figure 8: Backup screen in IMOS Drystar 3000
3.8 Error Code installation on Service PC

The installation of the error messages floppy is required to have the latest
'reason - meaning - cure' displayed in IMOS Drystar 3000.
Proceeding:
(1) Insert the 'Error messages Drystar 3000' floppy in the PC floppy drive
(2) Open the Windows Explorer
(3) Double-click on file a:\install.bat
A DOS box will open. The installation takes about 10 secs. The DOS box
closes automatically when finished.
3.9 Introduction of the Operator to the new printer functions

(1) Explain the new functions to the customer:

(Type 5361)
· With SW Rel. 1.95 the sensitometry is automatically performed by default

with every new film package (only if the tray was empty before).
® This function can be switched off in menu '5 Calibration -
1 Film sensito - Mode'
· The customer gets by default reminded every 1000 films to clean the TH:
A message will come up on the local display, to clean the TH. After
opening of the TH compartment in the rear (and cleaning the TH with a
piece of cloth lightly soaked in Isopropyl alcohol), the message disappears.
· The printer initiates a TH profile calibration automatically every 5000 films
® This function can be switched off in menu '5 Calibration -
2 TH profile -Mode'
· The film-to-film calibration is switched off by default.
® This function can be switched on in menu '5 Calibration -
4 film-to-film'
· A beep can be switched on, indicating an empty input tray. By default this
beep is switched off.
® This function can be switched on in menu '7 Settings -
1 beep empty tray'
(2) Hand over to the customer the user and reference manuals for
SW rel. 1.95 that are part of the delivery.

(Type 5361)
4 Installation of DICOM Version DCM32956

· The DICOM software installation is only required, in case the printer is
used in combination with a LINX Multi-Flex.
· For DICOM software installation IMOS DCM 2.4.3 or higher has to be
used. IMOS DCM 2.4.3 contains the required DICOM version DCM32956
· The DICOM software can be obtained via MEDNET (GSO Library -
Hardcopy - General Info - CSO Freeware).
· Only install the DICOM software, in case the customer has bought a valid
license
Proceeding:
(1) Install IMOS DCM (a:\winstall)
(2) Start IMOS DCM
(3) Connect the service PC via RS232 cable to the printer
(4) Select 'Install' to download the SW from the PC harddisk to the printer
(5) Select 'cancel' when finished
(configuration and Edit PMS profile is not necessary, as the pms.ini file
and DICOM customization files are not changed during software
upgrade).
Figure 9: Installation of DICOM Software

(Type 5361)
5 Installation of Postscript Version MPS32943

· The PostScript software installation is only required, in case the printer is
used as Postscript printer.
· For Postscript IMOS ³ MPS 2.2.1 in combination with MPS32943 or
higher has to be used.
· The Postscript software can be obtained via MEDNET. (GSO Library -
Hardcopy - General Info - CSO Freeware)
· Only install the Postscript software, in case the customer has bought a
valid license
(1) Install IMOS MPS (a:\winstall)

(2) Start IMOS MPS
(3) Connect the service PC via RS232 cable to the printer
(4) Insert the MPS32943 floppy (or higher) in the printer floppy drive
(5) Select 'Install/Dev' to copy and unzip the SW from the floppy to the printer
(6) Select 'cancel' when finished
(configuration and customization profile is not necessary, as the
configuration and customization files are not changed during software
upgrade).
Figure 10: Installation of Postscript Software

(Type 5361)
6 Software Upgrade Rel. 1.3, 1.4 or 1.6 to 1.95

The software upgrade from release 1.3, 1.4 or 1.6 to 1.95 comprises the
following steps:

1 Backup of machine specific data incl..idf and .tif 6.1
2 Check of Macrodensitometer lamp 6.2
3 Software installation 6.3
4 Monitor Update 6.4
5 Restore of all device and customer specific data 6.5
6 Parameter Settings 6.6
7 Film Sensitometry 6.7
8 Film Sensitometry mode adjustment (if necessary) 6.8
9 Printout and evaluation of SMPTE test image 6.9
10 Eventual DICOM software installation 6.10
11 Eventual Postscript software installation 6.11
12 Eventual conversion of annotations to 6.12
uncompressed TIF
13 Backup of machine specific data 6.13
14 Error Code installation on Service PC 6.14
15 Introduction of Operator to new printer functions 6.15
6.1 Backup of machine specific data incl..idf and .tif

(1) Make a backup. Refer to section 3.7 page 13.
(2) Additionally backup all user specific files, that are not part of the normal
backup:
These file are:
-TIF Files on D:
-.idf Files on C:
Do so by copying the files via terminal emulation to the backup floppy

disk:
2a) Insert the backup floppy disk into the floppy drive
2b) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Tools ® Terminal'
2c) Type: 'copy *.idf a:' <ENTER>
2d) Type: 'D:' >ENTER>
2e) Type: 'copy *.TIF a:' <ENTER>
2f) Type: 'c:' <ENTER>
2g) Exit the terminal

(Type 5361)
6.2 Check of Macrodensitometer lamp

(1) In IMOS Drystar 3000 go to 'Repair - Print Engine - Modules - MDM Test'
(2) Select 'Measure' to measure the light output. Wait approx. 1 min.
· The displayed light output should be > 4500.
Make sure that the all covers are on the unit prior to MDM bulb
measurement.
Figure 11: MDM Test Window
· In case the light output is £ 4000, the MDM will not function properly. The
SW upgrade can be performed, but the MDM will be disabled. The
calibrations cannot be performed. A warning message 'MDM module is
disabled' will be displayed after the MDM check at switch on. Exchange
the MDM bulb (CM+309945.0) e.g. at the next service intervention or
maintenance to get the full benefit of SW release 1.9.
· In case the light output is in between 4000 and 4500 the MDM will work,
but it is possible, that at slight problems (e.g. dirt on the MDM lamp) the
light output gets under the limit '4000'. It is recommended to exchange the
MDM bulb (CM+309945.0) at the next service intervention or
maintenance.
· For more information to warning messages related to the MDM refer to
section 6.3, Troubleshooting.
6.3 Software Installation

(1) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Install' ® 'Software' ® 'From Printer floppy'
(2) Select 'choose from advanced' and deselect 'upgrade' and 'backup.
(3) Insert the floppy BAS32P14 in the printer floppy drive and select 'OK'
(4) Follow the instructions in IMOS Drystar 3000

(Type 5361)
Figure 12: SW installation incl. formatting
6.4 Monitor Update

By means of this function the Monitor EEPROM located on the Gemini II CPU
is re-programmed.
Refer to section 3.2 page 11 for an instruction.
6.5 Restore of all device and customer specific data

The 'normal' restore is already done, as it is part of 'SW installation incl.
formatting of the harddisk'. Only the user specific files, not part of the 'normal
backup' have to be restored:
· Restore all user specific files, that are not part of the normal backup:
· Do so by copying the files via terminal emulation from the backup floppy
disk to the harddisk:
(1) Insert the backup floppy disk into the floppy drive
(2) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Tools ® Terminal'
(3) Type: 'unprotect c:' <ENTER>
(4) Type: 'copy a:*.idf .' <ENTER>
(5) Type: 'D:' <ENTER>
(6) Type: 'copy a:*.TIF .' <ENTER>
(7) Type: 'c:' <ENTER>
(8) Type: 'protect c:' <ENTER>
(9) Exit the terminal

(Type 5361)
6.6 Parameter Settings

SW release 1.7 contains a few new parameters and functions (for a detailed
list refer to section 7). This section treats the adaptation of the printer to those
new functions.
6.6.1 Activate default layouts
With this function Drystar 3000 specific default layouts for the user keypad are
loaded.
(1) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Install ® Defaults'
(2) Select 'Client' for type of menus, and select the film format installed in
the printer.
Figure 13: IMOS Window for default layout activation
6.6.2 Site Info Window
(1) In IMOS Drystar 3000, go to 'Install ® Installation Report'.

(2) Select 'Site Info'
(3) Fill out the site specific information. This will be part of the infocounter
header.
Figure 14: Site info (Example)

(Type 5361)
6.6.3 Device Info Window

(2) Select 'Device Info'
(3) Fill out the device specific information.
Note: All devices with SW release ³ 1.7 installed in the factory have this
window already filled out.
Type 5361 / 999
Nr. 9703 1032 Hz 50/60

03/97 V 100 - 120 / 220 A 12 / 6
1032
MFR ID: S
AGFA - GEVAERT MADE IN BELGIUM
FN.CDR
Figure 15: Device Info (example)
6.6.4 Set the installation date

(2) Select 'date of installation': Now automatically the current date is set as
device installation date.
Note: The date of installation can only be set once. The date of installation
normally is the date of the installation of the printer. As this function is new
since SW release 1.7, perform it here.
Figure 16: Installation Date

(Type 5361)
6.7 Film Sensitometry

Refer to section 3.3
6.8 Film Sensitometry mode adjustment (if necessary)

6.9 Printout and evaluation of SMPTE test image

6.10 Eventual DICOM software installation

Refer to section 2.3 and 4
6.11 Eventual Postscript software installation

Refer to section 2.3 and 5
6.12 Eventual conversion of annotations to uncompressed TIF

6.13 Backup of machine specific data

6.14 Error Code installation on Service PC

6.15 Introduction of Operator to new printer functions


(Type 5361)
7 History of new features, improvements and solved

problems since SW release 1.40
RELEASE 1.41
· 'backside view' printing mode supported (can be customized with: NVE DR3XXX11)
· 'foot print' test pages added for 17 x 14 ', to locate 'mechanical' problems
(can be printed with: Drystar 3000/Repair/PrintEngine/Print test page…ARTIF*.BLA)
· flickering of local keypad solved (new COS firmware)
RELEASE 1.42
· start-up without selftest in service mode (T14)
· finer resolution for production TH position control
· COS temperature problems solved (new COS firmware)
· maximum density + TH profile calibrations enabled
· 'foot print' test pages added for all film formats
RELEASE 1.43
· mobile functionality provided
· locking of thermal head assembly (new KEY board, mechanics, motor + 2 sensors)
· commands provided for service tools
· TH locked when switching power OFF, real power-off delayed
· TH unlocked at power-up
· enable/disable provided via 'nve DR3B'
RELEASE 1.44
· thermal cloudiness problem solved in new firmware for COS-board
RELEASE 1.45
· image-length can be customized (to compensated for drum diameter differences)
· this parameter exists for each format defined (DR3XXX11/dr_14x17…)
· only for printing via 'controller' (not T14, the off-line printing application)
RELEASE 1.46
· new AOS files, solves TCP/IP problems
RELEASE 1.47
· COS upgrade problem in release 1.44-1.46 solved
· automatic update of COS firmware, during SW install
· startup problems on IPT engines solved (release 1.43-1.46)
RELEASE 1.50 (this software was not installed in the field)

· info-counters support
· improved MDM calibration support
· new input sequence reduces film input skew
· local keypad control of backside-view printing
· operational temperature-window for drum and heat-sink TH
· power-up test for
· TH connection
· film input pickup assembly
· default configuration for Sterling CT400
· service tool support for
· drum belt calibration
· Sterling CT400, default configuration
· info-counters readout
· test TH lock mechanism
· automatic update of COS firmware, during SW install
· extra mobile functionality provided

(Type 5361)
· TH locked when selecting SHUTDOWN

· TH unlocked when leaving SHUTDOWN-mode
· auto film-type detection
· fine tuning of image length via customization (fine tuning) of drum speed
· support IP address 0.0.0.0 for BOOTP & RARP protocols
· mobile printer option available (auto TH lock)
· support for improved reference film + MDM floppy
· support for HD up to 16 Gbytes (max. 4Gbyte per partition)
RELEASE 1.60 (this software was only installed in a few fieldtest printers)
· bug solving (release 1.50: memory-link problem during TH-measurement)
· MEGA update
· film to film calibration more robust against film side deficiencies (more representative
Dmax samples are taken, by an extra rotation of drum between printouts) (print-drum
positioning shift 2/5)
· resolution of system sensitometry increased (from 10 to 12 bits)
· improved test image TPB (TPB_V1L.TIF & TPB_V1P.TIF), can be used to verify the
sensitometry
· test image TPA_V1.TIF
· 'unsharp mask' taste tables WGT2_140.TBL & WGT2_150.TBL
· service tool support for
· MDM lamp test
· remove default IP address 0.0.0.0 from release 1.50
· Support of Gemini II CPU
RELEASE 1.70
· bug solving (COS board SW upgrade problems)
RELEASE 1.73
· Variability in image-length, matching the installed drum (compensation of the
differences in diameter. This parameter exists for each format defined.)
· Disabling filtering on Macro calibration
· Support for new MDM calibration wedge
· Modified warning level 'MDM out of range'
· Support for new ROSA material.
· Bug solved for DICOM warning levels.
· PMC Firmware: support for backwards Drum rotation.
· AIC Firmware: support for new powersupply.
RELEASE 1.76
· During printing of images with a maximum density lower than dbmax < 2.50D, there is
no changing to the film type ''clearbase'' now.
· The range of the measuring values for the densitometer calibration has been extended.
· Adaptation of the software to printers with a configuration with more than two Dicom
links.
· The version number of the COS firmware is checked. If the detected version is below
the firmware version in SW Patch 1.76, (e.g. upon replacement of the COS Board), an
automatic update of the COS firmware to the current version will be executed.
· The SW bug which resulted in error message '6C841' during the drum encoder check
has been removed.
· The upper limit value of the temperature range in the decurl unit has been increased
by 3°C.
In case of a nominal temperature of 100°C, the tolerance range is now from 95°C
to 108°C.
· The message 'no film to film calibration' is no longer displayed if images with a density
below dbmax < 2.50D are printed.
RELEASE 1.77

(Type 5361)
· SENSITOMETRIC CALIBRATION Support for DRYSTAR TM1 Clear and Blue based
film Type V2 (commercial filmbox indication 'improved' )
· Support for Toshiba thermal heads
· New testimages : SMPTE_V2.TIF (digitized); FLT1_160; FLT2_229; FLT3_255;
300_TEST (all Tif format)
· Bug solved in Dmax calibration (Correcting large density differences)
· Voltage min.- and max.-limits for MAGNETEK power-supply have been altered.
· Sensitometric results regarding material density-limits are shared with the image-
handling application (so called controller) for taste matching. Changes in 'dmin' are
stored in <D:\DR3XXX11.U00>-file
· Support of harddisks > 2 GB (max 16 GB), but only if installed from scratch, incl.
BAS32P10A floppy.
RELEASE 1.95
MEGA software
· support for harddisks until 16GB
· dicom plug and play via telnet script
· performance increase:
o network throughput
o calculation of LUTs for 12 bit images
· ability in DICOM to use the requested image density as a selection criteria
(exact Dmax), as was already the case for film size, type and color mode.
Queue indication on LCD keypad: ‘HD’
· ability to selectively route jobs to destinations based on the film size they
support; only one filmtype per destination can be used as selection criteria!
· expanded error messages list for various modalities
· solved blinking cursor and block problem on external keypads
Engine Software
· calibration menu of local keypad is adapted:
o ‘Film sensito’
o ‘TH profile’
o ‘TH cleaning’
o ‘Film-to-film’
· ‘combined calibration’ or ‘Film sensito’: this calibration replaces the actual
sensitometry calibration and Dmax calibration with a single calibration for
bluebase and clearbase materials:
o Starts automatically each time a new pack of film is introduced. Even
when configured as automatic the user is still able to start this
calibration manually
o This calibration, together with ‘thermal head profile’ and ‘film to film’
(disabled by default) calibration will be the only remaining calibrations
accessible on the local keypad. All other calibrations (registration,
reference values, mdm calibrations) are only accessible via the IMOS
DI3000 service tool
o The local keypad will indicate that the printer is in ‘sensito calibration’
mode and a realistic progress indication is displayed
o The calibration only takes one film

(Type 5361)
· ‘TH profile’:
o Automatic thermal head calibration is active (by default) and will be
requested every 5000 prints by means of a warning message on the
local display. The user is still able to perform a manual calibration.
· ‘TH cleaning’:
o Automatic thermal head cleaning is active (by default) and will be
requested at the operator every 1000 prints by means of a warning
message. This message will disappear from the moment thermal
head cleaning procedure is done (can be selected from the calibration
menu) and the thermal head door is closed.
· ‘Film-to-film’ calibration is disabled by default.
· ‘Show calibration’ is extended with a counter which displays the number of
films to the ‘Next’ calibration
· a beep for an empty input tray is provided. This is configurable and
verifiable via the local keypad. The default setting is 'off”.
· printing of compressed tiff files (from FD or HD) is not supported anymore.
If tried, error ‘C182’ will be shown on the local keypad. Instead zip files are
supported.
· test images:
o the number of test images on the customers side are restricted
o all tiff files are replaced by uncompressed files

(Type 5361)
DD+DIS286.02E Technical Modifications
Chapter 11
Contents
1 Print drum with adjustable eccentric bearings.......................................................1

2 Modification of the BIO3 Board .............................................................................2
3 Modification of the Key3 Board .............................................................................2
4 Modification of the top cover and the corresponding keys (see also item 15).......2
5 Software Release 1.42..........................................................................................3
6 Software Release 1.45..........................................................................................3
7 Modification of the PMC 1 Board Rev. E...............................................................3
8 Modification of the COS1 Board in Revision D......................................................4
9 Modification of the film transport roller from 8-fold to 1-fold ..................................5
10 Modification of the film transport section...............................................................5
11 AFR2 Board Revision B ........................................................................................5
12 AFR2 Board Revision C ........................................................................................5
13 Modification of the power supply unit ....................................................................6
14 Modification of the NIP Board ...............................................................................6
15 Modification of the top cover .................................................................................7
16 Modifications on the front cover ............................................................................7
17 Extension of the protection hose on the cable harness (right hand machine side)8
18 Layout modification on the KEY3 PCB..................................................................8
19 Modification of the 3.5" disk drive..........................................................................8
20 Modification of the film loading assembly..............................................................9
21 Modification of the MDM1 Board ...........................................................................9
22 Modified manufacturing process for the “Tested Thermal Head” ........................10
23 Modification of the film feeding unit.....................................................................10
24 Modified cable harness TH EB+53611000..........................................................11
25 Modified cable harness, left hand machine side EB+53611370 .........................11
26 Modification of the COS1 Board in Revision E....................................................11
27 Decurl unit ...........................................................................................................12
28 Cover hood of the decurl unit ..............................................................................12
29 IR temperature sensor introduced as spare part.................................................12
30 Tested thermal head ...........................................................................................12
31 Protection hose on the cable harness in the film loading assembly....................13
32 Successor of the Key3 Board..............................................................................13
33 Shaft top cover ....................................................................................................14
34 DRAM PCB (32 Mbytes) .....................................................................................14
35 Thermal head positioning unit .............................................................................14
36 CPU assembly ....................................................................................................14
37 System power supply, Revision E .......................................................................15
38 Shaft of the thermal head positioning unit...........................................................15
39 DICOM Software Version 2.3.5 ...........................................................................16
40 System power supply, Revision F .......................................................................17
Edition 01, Revision 34 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Chapter 11 / I

Technical Modifications DD+DIS286.02E
41 Modification PMC1 Board, Revision F.................................................................17

42 Postscript CPU assembly....................................................................................17
43 Modifications on the SCN2 Board .......................................................................18
44 Alteration of the COS1 Board into Revision F.....................................................18
45 Software Release 1.47........................................................................................19
48 Software Release 1.7X .......................................................................................20
49 Additional shaft included in the shipment of the top cover ..................................21
50 AIC1 Board Revision E with additional THP1 Board ...........................................21
51 Densitometer calibration film introduced as spare part .......................................22
52 BER1 PCB Revision B ........................................................................................22
53 Modifications of the CPU assembly ....................................................................23
54 Modifications of the postscript CPU assembly ....................................................24
55 Transport Protection Kit available as service assembly ......................................24
56 Introduction of plastic stops for the input tray......................................................24
57 KEY300A PCB Revision B ..................................................................................24
58 Modification of CPU assembly ............................................................................25
59 AIC1 Board, revision F with integrated THP1 Board ...........................................25
60 Modified decurl unit, complete assembly ............................................................26
61 Drive motor for the decurl unit.............................................................................26
62 Modified kit of the transport protections ..............................................................27
63 Modifications on the top cover ............................................................................27
64 Modified encoder of the drum speed detection ...................................................28
65 Modification of the AIC1 Board into Revision G ..................................................28
66 Modification of the AIC1 Board into Revision H ..................................................29
67 Modification of the PMC1 Board into Revision G ................................................29
68 Bearing bushes for the decurl unit ......................................................................30
69 Modification of the heat screen on the decurl unit...............................................30
70 Modified drive unit - complete .............................................................................31
71 New spare part: CM+ 3099160 set of small parts for repair and maintenance ...31
72 New spare part: CM+ 3099150 set with hinges for the film feed unit ..................32
73 Film pick-up roller improved ................................................................................32
74 Modified shaft of the top cover............................................................................32
75 Transport protection kit increased.......................................................................33
76 "Floppy drive with data cable" increased.............................................................33
78 Drum motor improved .........................................................................................34
79 Only for type 5361/101: modified top cover ........................................................34
80 Order number of the tested thermal head changed ............................................34
81 Modification of the BIO3 Board Revision E .........................................................35
82 Order number of the thermal head changed .......................................................35
83 Order number of the antistatic discharge brush changed ...................................35
85 Modification of the dc motor for the TH / film pickup ...........................................36
Chapter 11 / II Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Edition 01, Revision 34

86 Order number CM+ 309916.0 set of small parts for repair and maintenance
changed ..............................................................................................................36
87 Order number CM+ 309916.1 set of small parts for repair and maintenance
changed ..............................................................................................................37
88 Modification of the densitometer assembly CM+309788.0 .................................37
91 Modification of the hard disk, pre-formatted EB+53581392 ................................38
92 Modification of the upper transport unit CM+309969.0 .......................................39
93 Modification of the lower transport unit CM+309796.0 ........................................39
94 New spare parts 'Rubber film feeding rollers' CM+309927.0 ..............................40
96 Film pickup rollers improved................................................................................40
97 Modification of the horizontal alignment assembly..............................................41
98 Modification of the solenoid.................................................................................41
Edition 01, Revision 34 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Chapter 11 / III

1 Print drum with adjustable eccentric bearings

1.1 Reason:
Improved height adjustment possibilities of the thermal head with respect to the print drum.
1.2 Standard introduction: SET DRUM BEARINGS EB+53610390

New introduction as spare part
Machine type SN Remarks

5361/999 as of SN 1179 introduced as production standard
1.3 Standard introduction: DRUM EB+53610211

Replaces the DRUM UNIT EB+53610210 and it is not compatible!

1.4 Standard introduction: DRUM BEARING HOUSING EB+53610221

Replaces the DRUM BEARING HOUSING EB+53610220 and it is not compatible!

1.5 Retrofitting possibilities

Modification kit print drum with eccentric bearings, complete CM+7.9997.0970.0 MOD KIT
DRUM UNIT.
The installation instructions are enclosed with the modification kit.
Edition 01, Revision 29 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Chapter 11 / 1

2 Modification of the BIO3 Board
2.1 Reason:
Preventive measure to avoid delayed activation of the VME fan in case of low ambient
temperatures.
2.2 Standard introduction: EB+53610601 BIO3 PCB REV.E

Replaces the EB+53610600 BIO3 Board Rev. D and is compatible with it.

3 Modification of the Key3 Board

3.1 Reason:
Correction of the occasionally occurring flickering of the display illumination (also see Field
Service Bulletin DD+DIS071.98M).
3.2 Standard introduction EB+53611451 KEY3 PCB Rev. E

Replaces the EB+53611450 KEY3 PCB Rev. D and is compatible with it.
4 Modification of the top cover and the corresponding keys (see also
item 15)
4.1 Reason:
Modification of the KEY3 Board, see item 3.
4.2 Standard introduction EB+53611431 TOP COVER
Replaces the EB+53611430 TOP COVER and is compatible!
Chapter 11 / 2 Drystar 3000 (Type 5361) Edition 01, Revision 29

5 Software Release 1.42

5.1 Reason:
Solution for problems and improvement of the function.
• Correction of the occasionally occurring flickering of the display illumination (also see Field
5.2 Standard introduction Software Release 1.42

Succeeding version of the Software Release 1.39 and it is compatible.

5361/999 as of SN 1270 and in 1262, 1267 introduced as production standard

6.1 Standard introduction Software Release 1.45
Succeeding version of the Software Release 1.42 and it is compatible.
This Software Release supports:
• New firmware for the COS Board
• Drum diameter compensation (also see DD+DIS134.98D/E/F).
• Supports the “Mobile Kit“

7 Modification of the PMC 1 Board Rev. E

7.1 Reason:
Reduction of the electromagnetic radiation of the PMC1 Board.
7.2 Standard introduction EB+53610261 PMC1 PCB Rev. E

Replaces the EB+53610260 PMC1 PCB Rev. D and is compatible!

8 Modification of the COS1 Board in Revision D

8.1 Reason:
The COS1 Board Revision D can be differentiated from the previous version, revision C, by a
modified firmware and modified hardware.
If a COS1 Board Revision C is replaced by a board with revision D, the following restrictions
apply always depending on the software in the machine:
Type 5361/999 (up to SN 1068)

These machines were shipped with the COS1 Board Revision C and the Software Release
1.32. Prior to the installation of a COS1 Board Revision D, a Software Release 1.47 or higher
must be installed. This software version is available via MED-CSO upon request.
Type 5361/999 (up to SN 1269 except 1262, 1267)

These machines were shipped with a COS1 Board Revision C and Software Release 1.35,
1.38 or 1.39. The installation of Software Release 1.42, 1.43, or 1.45 will result in error
message 6C466 <-> 60248.
Remedy: In case of this problem the COS1 Board Revision D must be installed.
Note: Prior to the installation of the software release 1.4X (< 1.47) the COS1 Board
Revision D must be installed.
Type 5361/101 (up to SN 1018)

These machines were shipped with a COS1 Board Revision C and Software Release 1.38.
The installation of Software Release 1.42, 1.43, or 1.45 will result in error message 6C466 <->
60248.
Remedy: In case of this problem the COS1 Board Revision D must be installed.
Note: Prior to the installation of the software release 1.4X (< 1.47) the COS1 Board
Revision D must be installed.
Part no: EB+53610591 COS1 Board Revision D successor of

Part no: EB+53610590 COS1 Board Revision C
This Software Release 1.47 is available via MED-CSO upon request.

As of the Software Release 1.41 the version of the firmware on the COS1 Board is checked
upon installation of the software. Thereby the software automatically loads the current
firmware version (here it corresponds to the COS Board Revision D).
In the Software Release 1.41,1.42, 1.43, and 1.45, the update of the firmware is faulty.
This problem results in the failure of the COS1 Board Revision C which cannot start up then.
In this case the board must be replaced by a COS1 Board Revision D.

5361/999 SN ≥ 1289 COS1 Board Revision D introduced as production standard
5361/101 SN ≥ 1046 COS1 Board Revision D introduced as production standard

9 Modification of the film transport roller from 8-fold to 1-fold

9.1 Reason:
Production simplification
9.2 Standard introduction EB+53610361 FILM PICKUP ROLLER
Replaces the EB+53610360 film pickup roller and is compatible!
10 Modification of the film transport section

10.1 Reason:
Modification of the film transport roller, see item 9.
10.2 Standard introduction EB+53611622 FILM FEEDING UNIT
Replaces the EB+53611620 FILM FEEDING UNIT and is compatible! (Also see item 9
“Modification of the film transport rollers from 8-fold to 1-fold”).
11 AFR2 Board Revision B

11.1 Reason:
Correction of problems to avoid undesired effects in the image data signal (also see Field
11.2 Possible interference on the image data signal
Standard introduction MG3 AFR2 PCB Rev. B
EB+44022620 MG3 AFR2 PCB Rev. A by EB+44022621 MG3 AFR2 PCB Rev. B.
Rev. A and Rev. B are compatible with each other!

5361/999 SN ≥1255 introduced as production standard
12 AFR2 Board Revision C

12.1 Reason:
Standard introduction MG3 AFR2 PCB Rev. C
EB+44022621 MG3 AFR2 PCB Rev. B by EB+44022622 MG3 AFR2 PCB Rev. C.
Rev. B and Rev. C are compatible with each other!

5361/999 November 1998 introduced as production standard

13 Modification of the power supply unit

13.1 Reason:
Easier removal of the power supply unit.
13.2 Standard introduction of the new power supply EB+53610531
Replaces the EB+53610530 POWER SUPPLY and is compatible to a certain extent. Upon
modification to the new EB+53610531 POWER SUPPLY the cable harness must be replaced
as well.
The following order number is replaced:
EB+53610530 POWER SUPPLY by EB+53610531 POWER SUPPLY
The following order number is new:
EB+53610380 POWER CABLE VME

5361/101 SN ≥1028 and SN 1021, SN 1026 introduced as production standard
14 Modification of the NIP Board

14.1 Reason:
Modification of Revision I (EB+44020067) to Revision J (EB+44020068)
PAL X05 modified, no functional changes.
Modification of Revision J (EB+44020068) to Revision K (EB+44020069)
PAL X05 no longer available and replaced by PAL X06.
With the new type two pull-up resistors were added.
Part no.: EB+44020067 NIP PCB Revision I
Part no.: EB+44020069 NIP1 PCB Revision K

compatible with previous version EB+44020067
EB+44020068

15 Modification of the top cover

15.1 Reason:
In these machines a cushioning part is now inserted in the film chute in order to reduce the
noises of dropping film. In some machines the handles for opening the top cover became
loose in the past. The fastening of these handles has been modified.
Type: 5361/999
Part no. old: EB+53611431 Top cover
Part no. new: EB+53611434 Top cover: Film chute with foam cushion
Fastening of the handles modified,
compatible with the previous version.
EB+53610680 Foam cushion spare part for retrofitting in already
installed machines.
Type: 5361/101
Part no. old: EB+53610480 Top cover
Part no. new: EB+53610483 Top cover: Film chute with foam cushion
Fastening of the handles modified,
compatible with the previous version.
EB+53610680 Foam cushion spare part for retrofitting in already
installed machines.

5361/999 SN ≥ 1938 and in introduced as production standard
1912,1916,1917,1921,1924,1926
up to 1929, 1931,1932,1936
5361/101 SN ≥ 1264 and in 1241,1244 up to introduced as production standard
1248,1250 up to 1252, 1254 to
1262
16 Modifications on the front cover

16.1 Reason:
In some machines the handles for opening the front cover became loose in the past. The
fastening of these handles has been modified.
Type: 5361/999
Part no.: EB+53610900 Front cover
Part no.: EB+53610901 Front cover: Fastening of the handles has been modified,
compatible with the previous version
Type: 5361/101
Part no.: EB+53610450 Front cover
Part no.: EB+53610451 Front cover: Fastening of the handles has been modified,

17 Extension of the protection hose on the cable harness (right hand

machine side)
17.1 Reason:
The protection hose on the cables has been extended from 150 mm to 250 mm, in order to
avoid damage of the cable during opening or closing of the top cover by the gas spring.
Part no.: EB+53611390* Protection hose with 150 mm
Part no.: EB+53611391* Protection hose with 250 mm,

compatible with previous version
* = Spare part not available from stock. Increased shipping time upon ordering.
18 Layout modification on the KEY3 PCB

18.1 Reason:
Layout of the board was redesigned due to previous modifications. (Rev. D to Rev. E). The
function of the board remained unchanged.
Part no.: EB+53611451 KEY3 PCB Revision E
Part no.: EB+53611452 KEY3 PCB Revision F,

compatible with previous version
Machine type Remarks

5361/999 October 1998 introduced as production standard
5361/101 October 1998 introduced as production standard
19 Modification of the 3.5" disk drive

19.1 Reason:
The 3.5“ disk drive EB+53580520 is no longer available.
The successor type EB+53610350 is compatible regarding the function, however, the
connection of the data cable is on the opposite side of the drive.
For the presently used flat cable EB+53610580 the cable length is therefore no longer
sufficient.
To guarantee compatibility, the new disk drive EB+53610350 is shipped with a longer flat
cable (EB+53610581).
Part no.: EB+53580520 3.5“ disk drive

EB+53610580 Flat cable
Part no.: EB+53610350 3.5“ disk drive

Longer flat cable
EB+53610581 Longer flat cable

20 Modification of the film loading assembly

20.1 Reason:
The fastening of the handles on the front cover has been modified after they became loose on
some machines.
Type: 5361/999
Part no.: EB+53611600* Film loading assembly
Part no.: EB+53611601* Film loading assembly

Fastening of the handles modified
* = Spare part not available from stock. Increased shipping time upon ordering.
Type: 5361/101
Part no.: EB+53610460 Film loading assembly
Part no.: EB+53610461 Film loading assembly

Fastening of the handles modified
21 Modification of the MDM1 Board

21.1 Reason:
Hardware modification of the MDM1 Board.
During the auto-check after the machine has been switched on, error code "6C822->60248"
may be displayed on the local keypad.

5361/999 SN ≤1480 introduced as production standard
5361/101 SN ≤1089 introduced as production standard
Modification of the MDM1 Board from Rev. B to Rev. C.

Part no.: EB+53611420 MDM1 PCB Rev. B
Part no.: EB+53611421 MDM1 PCB Rev. C, compatible with the

previous version

22 Modified manufacturing process for the “Tested Thermal Head”

22.1 Reason:
The manufacturing process for the mounting of the resistors on the PCB has been changed.
If a thermal head EB+53611552, marked with sticker A306147.2 is replaced by a thermal

head EB+53611551, marked with sticker A306147.1,
or
a thermal head EB+53611551, marked with sticker A306147.1 is replaced by a thermal head
EB+53611550, marked with sticker A306147.0,
the following files, if present, must be deleted manually by means of a Service PC (IMOS
<Tools>, <Terminal>) prior to the installation of the thermal head:
d:\engine\previous\macro.sta
d:\engine\status\rth_s_h.sta
Part no. old: EB+53611551, tested thermal head

Part no. new: EB+53611552, tested thermal head, compatible with the previous version
23 Modification of the film feeding unit

23.1 Reason:
Reduction of noises of the drive under load.
The screws by which the motor is mounted to the frame, has now additional washers.
Part no. old: EB+53611622
Part no. new: EB+53611623 compatible with the previous version
The metal frame of the film feeding unit has been modified in order to reduce noises of the
drive under load.
Part no. new: EB+53611624 compatible with the previous version

24 Modified cable harness TH EB+53611000

24.1 Reason:
Due to the introduction of the "mobile kit" option the TH cable harness has been adapted.

Part no. new: EB+53611101, compatible with the previous version
Note: For machines delivered with the option "mobile kit", the successor version EB+53611001
must be ordered!.
25 Modified cable harness, left hand machine side EB+53611370

Due to the introduction of the "mobile kit" option, the cable harness of the left hand machine
side has been adapted.

Part no. new: EB+53611371, compatible with the previous version
Note: For machines delivered with the option "mobile kit", the successor version EB+53611371
must be ordered!.
26 Modification of the COS1 Board in Revision E

26.1 Reason:
The firmware of the COS Board has been changed.
In the firmware version (COS1 PCB, revision E) the problem of the VME bus crash
with low temperatures has been solved.
Also see Chapter 6.3
Part no.: EB+53610591 COS1 Board Revision D
Part no.: EB+53610592 COS1 Board Revision E

5361/101 SN ≥1256 and SN 1252, SN 1253, introduced as production standard
SN 1254

27 Decurl unit
27.1 Reason:
The threaded bushings on which the holding plate with the IR sensor is mounted, have been
extended. The holding plate of the IR sensors has been modified to allow easier mounting.
Part no.: EB+53611160 Decurl unit
Part no.: EB+53611161 Modified decurl unit
28 Cover hood of the decurl unit

28.1 Reason:
New spare part.
Part no.: EB+53610740 Velvet coated cover hood on the decurl unit
29 IR temperature sensor introduced as spare part

29.1 Reason:
Infrared temperature sensor mounted on a holding plate, delivered with adjustment spacer.
Can only be used in the modified decurl unit EB+536111161.
Part no.: EB+53610760 IR temperature sensor
30 Tested thermal head

30.1 Reason:
The heat conductive material at the lower side of the thermal head has been modified
(recognizable by the color pink). This is to avoid fluctuations of the density which may probably
occur at the border of the film left and right.
Part no.: EB+53611552 Tested thermal head
Part no.: EB+53611553 Tested thermal head with changed heat conductive
material

31 Protection hose on the cable harness in the film loading assembly

31.1 Reason:
The protection hose on the cable harness is fixed in position by means of a cable tie. In
addition a grounding cable for the ground connection of the metal parts in the "film loading
assembly“ was introduced.
It is not necessary to replace the cable harness in the installed machines.
Part no.: EB+53610810 Cable harness
Part no.: EB+53610811 Cable harness with fixed protection hose
32 Successor of the Key3 Board

32.1 Reason:
With the introduction of the "mobile kit", the KEY300A Board was introduced as well.
The KEY300A Board can be used in machines with and without the mobile kit.
Part no.: EB+53611451 Key3 Board Revision E

Part no.: EB+53611452 Key3 Board Revision F with new layout,
installed as standard feature in machines without
mobile kit.
EB+53610710 Key300A Board Revision A as spare part for machines
with and without mobile kit.

5361/999 SN ≥1775 Revision F introduced as production
standard
5361/101 SN ≥1175 Revision F introduced as production
standard

33 Shaft top cover

33.1 Reason:
The shaft of the top cover on the chassis has been introduced as a spare part.
Part no.: EB+53610750 Shaft top cover
34 DRAM PCB (32 Mbytes)

34.1 Reason:
In combination with the Gemini2 CPU a new DRAM PCB (32 Mbytes) has been introduced.
The DRAM PCB (32 Mbytes) can be used for Gemini1 CPUs as well as for Gemini2 CPUs
with 25 MHz and 33 MHz clock frequency.
Part no.: EB+53610730
35 Thermal head positioning unit

35.1 Reason:
With the introduction of the mobile kit, the assembly TH positioning unit (mobile) has been
introduced as a new spare part.
Part no.: EB+53610720 TH positioning unit (mobile)
36 CPU assembly
36.1 Reason:
The “CPU assembly“ has been modified. The “CPU assembly Gemini2“ consists of the
Gemini2 Motherboard, the 32 Mbytes DRAM PCB, the NIP1 PCB, and the BER1 PCB.
The “CPU assembly Gemini2“ is supported as of software 1.47 or higher.
Therefore it must be guaranteed prior to the installation of the “CPU
assembly Gemini2“ that at least Software Version 1.47 is installed.
Part no.: EB+53610660 CPU assembly Gemini1

Part no.: EB+53610661 CPU assembly Gemini2
5361/999 SN ≥ 1931 and in SN 1869, 1877, “CPU assembly Gemini2“ and
1878, 1885, 1887, 1888, 1890 to Software Release 1.47
1892, 1895, 1897, 1898, 1900 to have been introduced as production
1904, 1906, 1910, 1912, 1916, to standard
1919, 1921 to 1924, 1926 to 1929
5361/101 SN ≥ 1273 “CPU assembly Gemini2“ and
and in SN 1250, 1254, 1255, 1257, Software Release 1.47
1260, 1267, 1271 have been introduced as production
standard

37 System power supply, Revision E

37.1 Reason:
The system power supply has been modified and changed into Revision E. The modified
power supplies can be recognized by their serial numbers (5th digit: ‘E’ for Revision E).
Part no.: EB+53610531 System power supply
Part no.: EB+53610532 System power supply (Revision E)

5361/999 SN ≥1921 Revision E
has been introduced as production
standard
5361/101 SN ≥ 1287 Revision E
and in SN 1280 to SN 1285 has been introduced as production
standard
38 Shaft of the thermal head positioning unit

38.1 Reason:
The shaft which is the bearing of the “thermal head positioning unit“ has been introduced as a
new spare part. The inside of the bushing is additionally lubricated with grease (Kluber
46MR401) to avoid corrosion problems between bearing and shaft.
Part no.: EB+53610790 Shaft of the thermal head positioning unit
Part no.: EB+53610820 Grease Kluber 46MR401

5361/999 SN ≥ 1916 introduced as production standard
and in SN 1911

39 DICOM Software Version 2.3.5

39.1 Reason:
Problem solution and functional improvement.
New functions:
• PMS uses the value of the perception_lut configuration
(parameter ‘utl_id’ and ‘utl_sudid’ in file PMSXXX22),
in case of incorrect transmission by the host.
• PMS uses the values ‘dbmin’ and ‘dbmax’
(parameter ‘dbmin’ and ‘dbmax’ in file PMSXXX22),
in case of transmission failure by the host.
• PMS uses the value of the cs_table configuration
(parameter ‘cs_table’ in file PMSXXX22)
in case of incorrect transmission by the host.
39.2 Restrictions and remarks:

• If no cs_table value is transmitted (no input in the field), PMS does not use the value of
the cs_table configuration.
This problem will be solved with the next Software Version.
For more details about these parameters see:

file PMS.PDF in directory IMOS\DCM\ENGLISH\DOC\PMS.PDF
on the SERVICE PC.
39.3 Standard introduction:

39.4 Please note:
The DICOM Software Version 2.3.5 is available via DIGIMAIL
HARDCOPY \ INTERFACES/CONNECTIVITY \ DCM235_1.EXE

DCM235_2.EXE
DCM235_3.EXE
The DICOM Software must only be downloaded from DIGIMAIL for the
purpose of an update
(e.g. for curing a problem) of an existing DICOM installation.
In case of new installation of a DICOM Software package a separate DICOM
license for every printer must be obtained.

40 System power supply, Revision F

40.1 Reason:
The system power supply has been modified and changed into Revision F. The modified
power supplies can be recognized by their serial numbers (5th digit: ‘F’ for Revision F).
Part no.: EB+53610532 System power supply (Revision E)
Part no.: CM+3098133 System power supply (Revision F)

5361/999 as of the end of the second quarter introduced as production standard
1999
1999
41 Modification PMC1 Board, Revision F

41.1 Reason:
On the PMC1 Boards Revision F, additional heat sinks have been mounted on some of
the drivers.
41.2 Standard introduction in series production EB+53610262 PMC1 PCB, Revision F

Replaces EB+53610261 PMC1 PCB Rev. E and is compatible with this version!

1999
1999
42 Postscript CPU assembly

42.1 Reason:
The Postscript CPU has been introduced as a spare part for machines with the postscript
configuration.
The Postscript CPU comprises of:

- Gemini2 Motherboard 33 MHz with floating point processor
- 64 Mbytes RAM
- NIP101 PCB
Part no.: EB+53610860 Postscript CPU

43 Modifications on the SCN2 Board

43.1 Reason:
Modification of the SCN2 Board to avoid failure of the voltage regulator in production.
Part no.: EB+53610090 SCN2 DCE/FEM PCB (Revision A)
Part no.: EB+53610130 SCN2 DTE/MALE PCB (Revision A)
Part no.: EB+53610091 SCN2 DCE/FEM PCB (Revision B)

Part no.: EB+53610131 SCN2 DTE/MALE PCB (Revision B)

to SN 2170
Additional modifications (Rev. B to Rev. F) of the voltage regulator on the SCN2 Board to
avoid further occurring failures in the production.
Part no.: EB+53610092 SCN2 DCE/FEM PCB (Revision F)
Part no.: EB+53610132 SCN2 DTE/MALE PCB (Revision F)

44 Alteration of the COS1 Board into Revision F

44.1 Reason:
The firmware of the COS Board has been changed.
The problem in the firmware version (COS1 PBC, Revision F), the possible occurrence of thin
vertical lines, has been solved.
Part no.: EB+53610592 COS1 Board Revision E
Part no.: EB+53610593 COS1 Board Revision F

5361/999 SN ≥2177 and SN 2171 introduced as production standard
to SN 2173


New functions:
• New CAN program file to solve startup problems with pre-production machines
• Automatic update of the COS firmware (bug-fix)

5361/999 SN ≥2082 and SN 2043, 2046 to introduced as production standard
2054, 2056 to 2062, 2064, 2066 to
2076, 2079,
5361/101 SN ≥1393 and SN1371 to 1380, introduced as production standard
1382 to 1389,

• Update of the COS firmware to solve the problem of "light stripes".

5361/999 SN ≥2093 and SN 2065, 2081, introduced as production standard
2084, 2087, 2090

5361/999 SN ≥2153 and SN 2078, 2080, introduced as production standard
2083, 2085, 2086, 2088, 2089,
2091, 2092, 2094 to 2139, 2151
5361/101 SN ≥1404 and SN 1381, 1390 to introduced as production standard
1392

48 Software Release 1.7X

New functions:
• Optimized density stability (automatic film-to-film Dmax calibration)
• Support of all calibrations (Macrodensitometer functionality)
• Support of the infocounters
Support of the Gemini II CPU and hard disks up to 16 GB (max. 4 GB per partition)
48.1 Software Release 1.72:

Problem solution and functional improvement.
New functions:
• AIC1 & PMC1 firmware for adaptation to the Magnetec Power Supply (system power
supply).
• Update of the COS firmware to solve the problem of "light stripes".
Limit values in the software were adapted to the new film material by calibration of the film
sensitometry.
• Instead of "PRINTER FAILURE" a "WARNING" message is now sent to the host,
if the DICOM software task interprets internal messages of the printer software task
as errors.

to SN 2176
48.2 Software Release 1.73
48.3 Reason:
• Adaptation of the AIC1 & PMC1 firmware to the Magnetec Power Supply (system power
supply) has been deactivated due to problems.
Part no.: CM+7.9997.0983.0 (SW Upgrade Kit Release 1.73)

to SN 2173
We recommend to upgrade all Drystar 3000 presently installed in the field to Software
Release 1.73.
Reason: For the new TM1B film material which will be introduced as of May 99, it is
compulsory to install Software 1.73.

49 Additional shaft included in the shipment of the top cover

49.1 Reason:
To avoid fitting problems during the installation of the new top cover in the printer (top cover
fails to close flush), a second shaft is included with every "top cover" spare part. If necessary,
this second shaft must be installed instead of the shaft already mounted in top cover.
Type: 5361/999
Part no. old: EB+53611434 Top cover: Film chute with foam cushion
Part no. new: CM+309950.6 Top cover: with second shaft

(with smaller diameter)
Type: 5361/101
Part no. old: EB+53610483 Top cover: Film chute with foam cushion
Part no. new: CM+309806.5 Top cover: with second shaft

50 AIC1 Board Revision E with additional THP1 Board

50.1 Reason:
Introduction of the AIC1 Board Revision E with additional THP1 Board as standard production
feature.
(For symptoms also refer to Chapter 6.3)
The additional THP1 Board is mounted on the modified data cables between the thermal head
and the AIC1 Board.
Part no. old: EB+53611091 AIC1 Board Revision E

Part no. new: CM+309902.1 AIC1 Board Revision E with additional
THP1 Board mounted on the modified data
cables

5361/999 SN ≤3094, introduced as production standard
SN 3116 to 3119,
SN 3121 to 3122,
SN 3124 to 3126,
SN 3149 to 3150,
SN 3163
SN 3436
SN 3496
SN 3518 to 3519
SN 3521 to 3523
SN 3525 to 3526


SN 3528
SN 3530 to 3531
SN 3534
SN 3540 to 3542
SN 3544 to 3563
SN 3565 to 3572
SN 3582 to 3635
SN 3638
SN 3641 to 3665
SN 3668
SN 3700
SN 3704
5361/101 will follow introduced as production standard
51 Densitometer calibration film introduced as spare part

51.1 Reason:
The calibration film is now available as spare part. This film is required for the calibration of the
internal densitometer as of software version 1.7. The calibration film is generally enclosed with
every machine.
Part no.: CM+309896.0 Calibration wedge
52 BER1 PCB Revision B

52.1 Reason:
The BER1 PCB on the CPU assembly has been modified to revision B, in order to prevent
transmission problems in case of the connection to a fast Ethernet via a switching hub
(10Mbit/s to 100Mbit/s).
Part no.: EB+53611610 BER1 PCB Revision A

Part no.: EB+53611611 BER1 PCB Revision B
Note: The BER1 PCB on stock have all been modified to revision B.
Retrofitting:
We recommend retrofitting in all printers which are integrated in a network, also refer to the
FSB DD+DIS132.99.
Standard introduction:
5361/999 SN ≥ 2477 and 2409, 2425, 2434 to introduced as production standard
2441, 2456 to 2459, 2463,
3464, 2476

53 Modifications of the CPU assembly

53.1 Reason:
1. Introduction of the monitor firmware version 4.29 in the Gemini2 CPU.
By means of this, the performance of the printer is optimized for high capacities.
Part no.: EB+53610661 CPU assembly Gemini2 (25Mhz)

Part no.: EB+53610663 CPU assembly Gemini2 (33 MHz)
with monitor firmware version 4.29
5361/999 SN ≥ 2308 and SN 2280, 2284, CPU assembly Gemini2 (33 MHz)
2289, 2290, 2292, 2293, 2295, with monitor firmware version 4.29
2296, 2302, 2306 introduced as production standard
5361/101 SN ≥ 1477 CPU assembly Gemini2 (33 MHz)
with monitor firmware version 4.29
introduced as production standard
Retrofitting:
"Gemini2 CPU's“ as of software release 1.47 or higher will be supported.
Therefore it must be guaranteed that a software release 1.47 or higher is
installed before the "Gemini2 CPU“ is installed.
Machines with Gemini2 CPUs, which are installed in the field, can be upgraded to
monitor firmware version 4.29 by means of an upgrade floppy.
2. The BER1 PCB on the CPU assembly has been modified to revision B, (also see item 52),
in order to prevent transmission problems in case of a connection to a fast Ethernet via a
switching hub (10Mbit/s to 100Mbit/s).
Part no.: EB+53610664 CPU assembly Gemini2 (33 MHz)

with BER1 PCB Revision B
2441, 2456 to 2459, 2463,
3464, 2476
1513, 1524, 1525, 1541

54 Modifications of the postscript CPU assembly

54.1 Reason:
Also refer to item 53
For machines which have been configured with the postscript option, the following applies:

with monitor firmware
version 4.29
with BER1 PCB revision B
55 Transport Protection Kit available as service assembly

55.1 Reason:
The complete transport protections used in the printer are now available as a service
assembly, which can be ordered by the following number:
Part no. new: CM+309892.0 Transport protection kit
56 Introduction of plastic stops for the input tray

New spare part:
Part no. new: CM+309900.0 Stop support for input tray
57 KEY300A PCB Revision B

57.1 Reason:
Correction of the occasionally occurring flickering of the display illumination
Part no.: EB+53610710 KEY300A PCB Revision A

Part no.: EB+53610711* KEY300A PCB Revision B
*not available as spare part, successor EB+53610712
Layout of the board was redesigned due to previous modifications.

The function of the board remained unchanged.
Part no.: EB+53610711 KEY300A PCB Revision B

Part no.: EB+53610712 KEY300A PCB Revision B

58 Modification of CPU assembly

58.1 Reason:
Modifications of Gemini Boards: Use of a different processor type.
The function of the board remained unchanged.
Part no. new: EB+53610665 CPU assembly

The previous boards (EB+53610664) can still be used.
59 AIC1 Board, revision F with integrated THP1 Board

59.1 Reason:
The THP1 Board on the data cable (ribbon cable) between the AIC1 Board and the
Thermal Head is no longer necessary.
The function of the THP1 Board has been integrated on the AIC1 Board, Rev. F.
Part no. old: CM+309902.1 AIC1 Board Revision E with additional

THP1 Board mounted on the modified data cables
Part no. new: EB+53611092 AIC1 Board, Revision F with integrated function of
the THP1 Board

5361/999 SN 3095 to 3115, introduced as production standard
SN 3123
SN 3127 to 3148
SN 3151 to 3162
SN 3164 to 3462
SN 3464 to 3495
SN 3497 to 3517
SN 3520,
SN 3524
SN 3527
SN 3529
SN 3532 to 3533
SN 3535 to 3539
SN 3543
SN 3564
SN 3573 to 3581
SN 3636 to 3637
SN 3639 to 3640
SN 3666 to 3667
SN 3669 to 3699
SN 3701 to 3703


SN 3705 to 3733
SN 3735 to 3737
SN 3739 to 3745
SN 3748 to 3752
SN 3754 to 3757
60 Modified decurl unit, complete assembly

60.1 Reason:
Due to film jam problems in the decurl unit, the following modifications have been introduced:
1. An additional film guide roller for better film transport has been inserted.
2. The plastic bearing bushings of the pressure rollers have been arranged differently.
The modified decurl unit (CM+309913.0)

replaces the decurl unit (CM+309911.1) and is compatible.
Part no. old: CM+309911.1 Decurl unit complete

Part no. new: CM+309913.0 Decurl unit complete, new

61 Drive motor for the decurl unit

61.1 Reason:
The material of the gear on the motor shaft has been changed from metal into plastic.
The modified drive motor of the decurl unit (CM+309808.1) replaces the drive motor of the
decurl unit (CM+309808.0) and is compatible with it.
Part no. old: CM+309808.0 Dive motor of the decurl unit

Part no. new: CM+309808.1 Dive motor of the decurl unit


62 Modified kit of the transport protections

62.1 Reason:
The transport protection for the densitometer, which has been included in the kit of transport
protections, has been changed.
The modified kit of the transport protections (CM+309892.1)

replaces the kit of the transport protections (CM+309892.0) and is compatible.
Part no. old: CM+309892.0 Kit of the transport protections
Part no. new: CM+309892.1 Kit of the transport protections
63 Modifications on the top cover

63.1 Reason:
1. Additional reinforcement ribs have been installed in the area of the rotary shaft.
2. Use of a Key300A Boards (Revision B) in order to use the top cover for the standard
printer as well as for the for the mobile printer.
Type: 5361/999
Part no. old: CM+309950.6 Top cover: with second shaft

Part no. new: CM+309950.9 Top cover: with additional reinforcement ribs
Type: 5361/101
Part no. old: CM+309806.5 Top cover: with second shaft

Part no. new: CM+309806.7 Top cover: with additional reinforcement ribs


64 Modified encoder of the drum speed detection

64.1 Reason:
The previous encoder of the drum speed detection is no longer available.
Regarding the function, the new encoder type is compatible with the previous version.
Part no. old: CM+309784.0 Encoder of the drum speed detection

Part no. new: CM+309784.1 Encoder of the drum speed detection
(new type)

65 Modification of the AIC1 Board into Revision G

65.1 Reason:
On the AIC1 Boards Revision F a capacitor was soldered in with wrong polarity.
In most cases this resulted in a failure of the capacitor.
Previous experience shows that usually the function of the AIC1 Board Revision F is not
impeded.
Therefore there are no plans for general replacement of the delivered AIC1 Boards Revision F.
Part no. old: EB+53611092 AIC1 Board, Revision F with integrated function of
the THP1 Board
Part no. new: EB+53611093 AIC1 Board Revision G

5361/999 SN 3120, 3734, 3738, introduced as production standard
SN 3746 to 3747, 3753,
SN ≥3758

66 Modification of the AIC1 Board into Revision H

66.1 Reason:
Accidental loosening of the data cable may result in defects on the AIC1 Board and the
thermal print head (TH). On the AIC1 Boards (Revision H), the plug connections for the data
cable (flat cable) have now been equipped with a locking system. This system avoids the
above mentioned defects.
Part no. old: EB+53611093 AIC1 Board Revision G

Part no. new: EB+53611094 AIC1 Board Revision H
The successor EB+53611094 (AIC1 Board Revision H) replaces the previous version
EB+53611093 (AIC1 Board Revision G) and is compatible with this version.

5361/999 SN 5269, 5294, 5302, 5304, 5305, introduced as production standard
5306, 5307, 5308, 5310, 5311,
5312,
SN ≥ 5315 (with the exception of
the following numbers: SN 5760,
5770, 5771, 5772, 5802, 5804,
5808, 5819, 5839, 5843, 5850,
5858, 5859, 5860, 5891)
67 Modification of the PMC1 Board into Revision G

67.1 Reason:
The modifications on the PMC1 Boards have been made to improve the manufacturing
process of the PCB.
Part no. old: EB+53610262 PMC1 Board Revision F

Part no. new: EB+53610263 PMC1 Board Revision G
The successor EB+53610263 (PMC1 Board Revision G) replaces the previous version
EB+53610262 (PMC1 Board Revision F) and is compatible with this version.

5361/999 SN 4661, 4667, introduced as production standard
SN ≥ 4469

68 Bearing bushes for the decurl unit

68.1 Reason:
The plastic bearing bushes on the left and right side of the decurl unit have been modified.

Part no. new: CM+309913.1 Decurl unit complete
The successor CM+309913.1 replaces its predecessor CM+309913.0 and is also compatible
with this version.

5361/999 SN 3327, 3329, 3347, 3349 to introduced as production standard
3351, 3353, 3354, 3356, 3367,
3381, 3395, 3408, 3415 to 3427,
3429 to 3432, 3439, 3441 to 3448,
3450 to 3453, 3455 to 3462, 3464
to 3473,
SN ≥ 3475
69 Modification of the heat screen on the decurl unit

69.1 Reason:
The heat screen is no longer coated.
Individual fibers of the textile coating came loose and ended up in the printer, i.e. resulted in a
poorer quality of the print.
During your next service call the old heat screen must be replaced by its successor.

Part no. new: CM+309913.2 Decurl unit complete, new
Part no. old: CM+309843.0 Heat screen

Part no. new: CM+309843.1 Heat screen, new
The successors CM+309913.2 / CM+309843.1 replace their predecessors CM+309913.1 /

CM+309843.0 and are also compatible.


70 Modified drive unit - complete

70.1 Reason:
Mounting and adjusting the belt tension proves to be too difficult and involves too much work.
To solve the problem a belt tensioner for the toothed belt has been installed and the drive unit
has been mounted completely on a mounting bracket.
Thus an adjustment of the toothed belt is not required.
Part no. old: CM+3099670 Drive unit complete
Part no. new: CM+3099671 Drive unit complete, new
Replacement of the previously delivered drive units is not intended.
5361/999 SN 5750, 5752, 5754 to 5761 introduced as production standard
SN ≥ 5763
71 New spare part: CM+ 3099160 set of small parts for repair and
maintenance
71.1 Reason:
As demanded by the field, a set of small hardware parts has been assembled, this set consists
of wear parts (gears, bearings) and parts which may easily be lost (screws, washers,
mechanical safety devices) etc..
Availability: immediately
The small parts set consist of the following parts:

2x RIGHT GEAR WHEEL 20T 5x E-RING DIN 6799 d=12 / D=23.4,
2x GEAR WHEEL XL 12T phosphate
2x RIGHT GEAR WHEEL 18T 5x STAR LOCK WASHER 6mm
2x WEDGE A3 x 3 x 6 DIN 6885 5x CYL PIN EN 28734-2x10-A-St
2x GEAR WHEEL XL (32T) 5x CYL PIN EN 28734-2x16-A-St
2x RIGHT GEAR WHEEL (12T) 5x CYL PIN EN 28734-3x16-A-St
2x RIGHT GEAR WHEEL (30T) 5x EXPANSION PIN dia. 3x16mm
2x RIGHT GEAR WHEEL 22T WITH PULSE 5x EXPANSION PIN dia. 2x16mm
DISK 50P 5x EXPANSION PIN ISO 8752-2x12-A-St
2x RIGHT GEAR WHEEL 24T 5x PIN (LOAD ASSY)
2x SPUR GEAR 36T (D-6mm) (M1) 5x SPLIT PIN DIN 94-2.5x20-St
2x PLASTIC ROLLER (LOAD ASSY) 10 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M3x6-4.8-H
12 x BEARING 20 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M4x6-4.8-H
2x BEARING (DECURL) 20 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M4x8-4.8-H
2x ROLLER BEARING (DECURL) 20 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M4x12-4.8-H
2x BUSHING 6x10x6mm, bronze 10 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M4x20-4.8-H
5x E-RING DIN 6799 d=5 / D=11.3, phosphate 10 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M3x8-4.8-H
10 x E-RING DIN 6799 d=9 / D=18.8, phosphate 10 x SCREW ISO 7045 -M3x5-4.8-H
5x E-RING DIN 6799 d=1.9 / D=4.8, phosphate 10 x SCREW ISO 1207-M4x12-ELVZ
10 x E-RING DIN 6799 d=7 / D=14.3 10 x NUT DIN 562-M3-04 ELVZ
5x E-RING DIN 6799 d=3.2 / D=7.3, phosphate 10 x CABLE CLAMP 11.0x10.2
10 x MINI CABLE CLAMP 6.6 x 4.8mm
5x BUSHING (DENSITOMETER)
5x EXPANSION RING (DENSITOMETER)

72 New spare part: CM+ 3099150 set with hinges for the film feed unit
72.1 Reason:
As demanded by the field, a set has been assembled which consists of both hinges for the film
feed unit.
Replacement of the hinges is explained in Chapter 6.5.
73 Film pick-up roller improved

73.1 Reason:
The material of the film pick-up roller has been modified to improved its grip.
Part no. old: CM+3097901 Film pick-up roller

Part no. new: CM+3097902 Film pick-up roller
The successor CM+3097902 replaces its predecessor CM+3097901 and is also compatible.

5361/999 SN 3932, 3933, 3934 introduced as production standard
SN ≥ 3939
74 Modified shaft of the top cover

74.1 Reason:
For production reasons the dimensions of the shaft have been changed.
Part no. old: CM+3098450 Shaft of the top cover

Part no. new: CM+3098451 Shaft of the top cover

75 Transport protection kit increased

75.1 Reason:
The contents of the kit have been increased, so it may also be used for the DRYSTAR 4500.
Part no. old: CM+3098920 Transport protection kit

Part no. new: CM+3098921 Transport protection kit
The successor CM+3098921 replaces its predecessor CM+3098920 and is also compatible
for the DRYSTAR 3000.
76 "Floppy drive with data cable" increased

76.1 Reason:
The contents of the kit have been increased with additional screws, so it may also be used for
the DRYSTAR 4500.
Part no. old: CM+3097890 "Floppy drive with data cable"

Part no. new: CM+3097891 "Floppy drive with data cable"
The successor CM+3097891 replaces its predecessor CM+3097890 and is also compatible
for the DRYSTAR 3000.

77.1 Reason:
Order number: CM+799971003.0 Software Upgrade kit
For a description of Software Release 1.77 refer to
- DIS065.00E: Installation Instructions Software Upgrade Release 1.7
- FSB 066.00E: new Software Release 1.77

5361/999 SN 1705, 2043, 3735, 3751, 3752 introduced as production standard
SN 3747, 3748, 3749
SN ≥ 3754

78 Drum motor improved

78.1 Reason:
The new drum motor with its more uniform transport reduces the effect of the "Transport-
Banding", see also Chapter 6.3 / page 11.
Part no. old: CM+3097780 Drum motor

Part no. new: CM+3097781 Drum motor
The successor CM+309778.1 replaces its predecessor CM+309778.0 and is also compatible.

5361/999 SN 3711, 3714 - 3726, 3728 - 3734 introduced as production standard
SN ≥ 3736
79 Only for type 5361/101: modified top cover

79.1 Reason:
The upper cover may be used in the standard printer as well as in the mobile printer.
Part no. old: CM+3098067 Top cover (Sterling)

Part no. new: CM+3098068 Top cover (Sterling)
80 Order number of the tested thermal head changed

80.1 Reason:
Technical documentation of the "Tested Thermal Head" modified.
Part no. old: CM+3099664 Tested thermal head

Part no. new: CM+3099665 Tested thermal head

81 Modification of the BIO3 Board Revision E
81.1 Reason:
The combination BIO3 Board Rev. E and a power supply manufactured by MAGNETEK may
result in stripes on the print. By additional capacitors on the PCB of the successor Rev. F the
problem is solved.
81.2 Replaces the EB+53610602 BIO3 Board Rev. F
Replaces the EB+53610601 BIO3 Board Rev. E and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 4073, SN 4068, SN 4056 introduced as production standard
82 Order number of the thermal head changed

82.1 Reason:
Modifications on the metal housing for protection of the PCB of the Toshiba thermal print
head.
82.2 Successor CM+309966.6 thermal print head, tested
Replaces the CM+30996.5 and is compatible with the predecessor.
Part no. old: CM+309966.5 Tested thermal head

Part no. new: CM+309966.6 Tested thermal head
83 Order number of the antistatic discharge brush changed

83.1 Reason:
The antistatic discharge brush (used twice in the machine) has been adapted so it can be
used in successor devices as well.
83.2 Successor CM+309798.1 discharge brush
Replaces CM+309798.0 and is compatible with the predecessor
Part no. old: CM+309798.0 Discharge brush

Part no. new: CM+309798.1 Discharge brush


84.1 Reason:
The material of the gear (36 teeth) on the drive motor has been changed from plastic to metal.
Reason: The plastic gears used as well in the Drystar 4500 broke with TSI films, therefore they
were replaced by metal gears. This modification also applies to the Drystar 3000.
84.2 Standard introduction CM+309976.5 film feeding unit
Replaces CM+309976.4 film feeding unit and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 7872; SN 7862 - 7870; SN 7855 - introduced as production standard
7860; SN 7852
85 Modification of the dc motor for the TH / film pickup

85.1 Reason:
The material of the gear (36 teeth) on the drive motor has been changed from plastic to metal.
Reason: The plastic gears used as well in the Drystar 4500 broke with TSI films, therefore they
were replaced by metal gears. This modification also applies to the Drystar 3000.
85.2 Standard introduction CM+309878.2 dc motor for TH / film pickup
Replaces CM+309878.1 dc motor for TH / film pickup and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 7872; SN 7862 - 7870; SN 7855 - introduced as production standard
7860; SN 7852
86 Order number CM+ 309916.0 set of small parts for repair and
maintenance changed
86.1 Reason:
The material of the gear (36 teeth) included in the kit has been changed from plastic to metal.
86.2 Successor CM+ 309916.1 set of small parts
Replaces CM+ 309916.0 and compatible with the predecessor
Part no. old: CM+ 309916.0 Set of small parts

Part no. new: CM+ 309916.1 Set of small parts

87 Order number CM+ 309916.1 set of small parts for repair and
maintenance changed
87.1 Reason:
The following parts have been added to the contents of the kit (see paragraph 71):
• Plastic guide in input tray (2x) (see position 18, 'leader' Spare parts list Input Tray)
• Spring for belt tensioner Drystar 3000 (2x)
• Spring for belt tensioner Drystar 4500 (2x)
87.2 Successor CM+ 309916.2 set of small parts
Replaces CM+ 309916.1 and is compatible with the predecessor
Part no. old: CM+ 309916.1 Set of small parts

Part no. new: CM+ 309916.2 Set of small parts
88 Modification of the densitometer assembly CM+309788.0

88.1 Reason:
Changes from CM+309788.0 to CM+309788.1:
Due to complaints about loud running noises of the previously used densitometers a new type
of stepper motor was introduced. At the same time the aperture in front of the measuring
sensor has been changed from 0.4 to 0.6 mm.
Changes from CM+309788.1 to CM+309788.2:
The assembly with index 1 presented problems in the production since the cable for the drive
motor was incorrectly wired. In assemblies with index 2 this problem has been solved.
88.2 Standard introduction CM+309788.2 densitometer assembly
Replaces CM+309788.0 densitometer assembly and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 7357; SN 7324 - 7353 introduced as production standard


89.1 Reason:
The production noticed that with some densitometers CM+309788.2 and the aperture enlarged
to 0.6 mm the DSH Board reached saturation and thus produced incorrect values.
For this reason the aperture in front of the measuring sensor was changed back from 0.6 mm
to 0.4 mm.

90.1 Reason:
Due to fixing problems of the cable for the halogen lamp by means of glue during production a
new plastic cover was designed to hold the cable reliably in the MDM plastic carrier without
using glue.
91 Modification of the hard disk, pre-formatted EB+53581392

91.1 Reason:
A new type of hard disk with 18 Gbyte capacity space has been introduced for the products
Drystar 3000 as well as Drystar 2000 since the predecessor type with 9.1 Gbyte capacity is no
longer available.
91.2 Standard introduction EB+53581393 hard disk, pre-formatted
Replaces EB+53581393 hard disk, pre-formatted, and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 9139; SN 9129 introduced as production standard

92 Modification of the upper transport unit CM+309969.0

92.1 Reason:
To increase the friction between the drive rollers and the film material and to compensate for
differences between the roller pairs left and right, the new film transport rollers are made of
softer rubber material. In addition, a spacer rollers each was mounted on both sides of the
shaft, this is to avoid that the softer drive roller presses into the recess of the film guide plate
and thus gets damaged by the edges of the recess.
With this modification film jam in the transfer from print module to decurl unit should be
avoided.
92.2 Standard introduction CM+309969.1 upper transport unit
Replaces CM+309969.0 upper transport unit and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 8155; SN 8143 - SN 8153 introduced as production standard
93 Modification of the lower transport unit CM+309796.0

93.1 Reason:
To increase the friction between the drive rollers and the film material and to compensate for
differences between the roller pairs left and right, the new film transport rollers are made of
softer rubber material. In addition, a spacer rollers each was mounted on both sides of the
shaft, this is to avoid that the softer drive roller presses into the recess of the film guide plate
and thus gets damaged by the edges of the recess.
With this modification film jam in the transfer from print module to decurl unit should be
avoided.
93.2 Standard introduction CM+309796.1 lower transport unit
Replaces CM+309796.0 lower transport unit and is compatible.

5361/999 SN ≥ 8155; SN 8143 - SN 8153 introduced as production standard

94 New spare parts 'Rubber film feeding rollers' CM+309927.0

94.1 Reason:
Introduction of new film transport rollers, which consist of a softer rubber material, together
with the introduction of the lower and/or upper transport unit (see paragraph 92 and 93). The
driver rollers are shipped as a kit of two rollers and cannot be used with the old version of the
upper and/or lower transport unit (CM+309969.0 and/or CM+309796.0).

Reason:
The material of the film transport rollers (Isoprene A240/01 35SH) presented quality problems
in the production. Therefore we choose a new plastic material for the transport rollers (EPDM
35SH).
Standard introduction CM+309976.6 Film feeding unit
Replaces CM+309976.5 film feeding unit and is compatible.

5361/999 SN will follow introduced as production standard
96 Film pickup rollers improved

Reason:
The material of the film transport rollers (Isoprene A240/01 35SH) presented quality problems
in the production. Therefore we choose a new plastic material for the transport rollers (EPDM
35SH).
The successor CM+309790.3 replaces the predecessor CM+309790.2 and is compatible.


97 Modification of the horizontal alignment assembly

Reason:
We introduced an improved lift solenoid (with coated armature) because there were corrosion
problems on the armature in high humidity and temperatures which then resulted in functional
problems. This problem was only reported for the lift solenoid in the Drystar 4500 which is the
same make. The modification for the Drystar 4500 has also been implemented in the Drystar
3000.
Standard introduction CM+309971.1 horizontal alignment assembly’
Replaces CM+309971.0 ’Horizontal Alignment Assembly’ and is compatible.

98 Modification of the solenoid

Reason:
We introduced an improved lift solenoid (with coated armature) because there were corrosion
problems on the armature in high humidity and temperatures which then resulted in functional
problems. This problem was only reported for the lift solenoid in the Drystar 4500 which is the
same make. The modification for the Drystar 4500 has also been implemented in the Drystar
3000.
Standard introduction CM+309743.1 solenoid
Replaces CM+309743.0 ’Solenoid’ and is compatible.


HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
Order-No.: DD+DIS130.04E
Drystar 3000
Type 5163
Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:
• every 15.000 printed films or

• every 12 month
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions DD+DIS130.04E.
Diagnostics checked checked

and and
OK not OK
Questioning of the • Current problems discussed with the
customer customer
Infocounter Analysis • Infocounter read-out and analysis
Check Print Quality • SMPTE and flatfield test image printed
Maintenance Points – Power off checked checked

and and
OK not OK
Check Cables and • Mains connection, cable connections and
Connections plugs checked for damage.
Film Loading • Film feed cleaned and checked, film feed
Assembly rollers replaced if required
• Tight mounting of light barriers checked
• Cables checked for mechanical damage
• Lower film transport unit checked and

replaced if being an old kind
printed in Germany 12 / 2007

Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS130.04E
Maintenance Points – Power off checked checked

and and
OK not OK
Print Engine • Transport rollers cleaned
• Print drum checked and cleaned
• Metal frame and plastic parts checked
• Transport roller springs checked
• Gears of the drive motor checked and

replaced by a new motor in case of plastic
gears
• Electrostatic brushes checked and
replaced in case of persistent dirt
• Kind of installed rollers checked and
replaced by a complete new upper film
transport unit if being an old one
• Cover of decurl unit checked and replaced
if being old kind
• SMPTE test image checked and thermal
print head cleaned if required
• Cable connections of thermal print head
checked
Decurl Unit / IR • Main drums checked and cleaned or
Temperature Sensor replaced if necessary
• IR temperature sensor cleaned
• Gears on both sides moderately greased
VME Rack • VME rack cleaned from dust

Film Feeding Unit • Gears of the drive motor checked and
replaced in case of being plastic
Check Hinges at Front • Front door cover, clearance and threads of
Door Cover the front door checked
Maintenence Checklist Drystar 3000 Revision 37

Page 2 (Type 5163) Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS130.04E Maintenance Checklist
Maintenance Points – Power on checked checked

and and
OK not OK
Check Function of • Functionality of safety switches SW1, SW2
Safety Switches and SW3 checked and replaced if they did
not work properly
Check Decurl Jam • Functionality of decurl jam clearance
Clearance Switch switch SW5 checked
Electrical Check • Internal circuit of the machine measured
using a multimeter
Completion of the Maintenance checked checked

and and
OK not OK
Calibrations • Density meter calibration carried out
• Registration calibration carried out
• TH profile calibration carried out
• For SW Rel. 1.7 a Dmax calibration and

afterwards a Film sensito calibration
carried out
• For SW Rel. 1.9 a Film sensito calibration
carried out
Print Quality • Flatfield and SMPTE test image compared
Evaluation with the test print
• Measured values for Dmin and Dmax of
the SMPTE test print compared to the
values of the first print
• Generated test image SMPTE checked for
artifacts
Exit from IMOS Drystar • Relative Counters reset and Preventive
Maintenance confirmed
Host Image Quality • Reset executed and diagnostic image
Evaluation printed
Carry out Backup • Backup carried out
Customer • Print Quality discussed with customer
Conversation
• Results of maintainance explained to
customer
• Checklist filled out and handed to the
customer
Revision 37 Drystar 3000 Maintenence Checklist

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5163) Page 3
Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS130.04E
Replaced Part Part Number
Remarks:
.....................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ....................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer
Maintenence Checklist Drystar 3000 Revision 37

Page 4 (Type 5163) Agfa Company Confidential
Technical
Documentation
DD+DIS085.97E DRYSTAR 3000

11NL6C1*
1 Piece 1NL6C MA1
Type 5361
INSTALLATION PLANNING and

Specifications
1st Edition
The Installation Planning Instructions are separately available.

Order number: DD+DIS085.97E
printed in Germany

Note:
Electrical connections and repairs must only be made by authorised

electricians.
Mechanical connections and repairs must only be made by authorised

technicians.
DD+DIS085.97E Installation Planning
LIST OF CONTENTS
SAFETY .............................................................................................................1
PART 1: INSTALLATION PLANNING ...............................................................2
System overview ....................................................................................................................2
Scope of Delivery and Accessories......................................................................................3
Scope of delivery................................................................................................................................. 3
Accessories......................................................................................................................................... 3
Machine Dimensions .............................................................................................................3
Space Requirements..............................................................................................................4
Minimum space requirements ............................................................................................................. 4
Space Requirements..............................................................................................................5
Optimum space requirements ............................................................................................................. 5
Typical network installation ..................................................................................................6
Ambient conditions................................................................................................................7
Transport / storage conditions .............................................................................................7
PART 2: SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................................8
Electrical connections ...........................................................................................................8
Performance Data ..................................................................................................................9
Type overview.........................................................................................................................9
Functional data.......................................................................................................................9
Electrical data.........................................................................................................................9
Climatic data...........................................................................................................................9
Dimensions and weights .......................................................................................................9
Packing dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 9
Weights............................................................................................................................................... 9
Safety Regulations ...............................................................................................................11

SAFETY
English This information is also available in German, English, and French. For further information please contact
your local Agfa office.
Deutsch Diese Information ist auch in englischer und französischer Sprache lieferbar. Falls Sie hierzu noch
Fragen haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre örtliche Agfa-Niederlassung.
Français Cette information est également disponible en englais français et en allemand. Pour toutes questions à
ce sujet, veuillez consulter votre filiale Agfa locale.
Italiano Queste informazioni sono disponibili anche nelle lingue inglese e francese. Per ulteriori informazioni o
chiarimenti in merito. Vi preghiamo di rivolger Vi alla succursale Agfa della Vostra zona.
Nederlands Deze informatie is ook in het Frans en het Engels verkrijgbaar. Voor eventuele verdere vragen wendt u
zich a.u.b. tot uw lokale Agfa vertegenwoordiging.
Español Esta información también es disponible en inglès y en francés. Para consultas pertinentes, diríjase
a su distribuidor AGFA local.
_____________________________________________________________
Always observe the safety instructions listed below:
General Safety Measures

• Consult the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of the chemicals concerned and follow the
safety instructions.
• Follow the instructions on the bottles containing the chemicals.
• Make sure there is adequate air exchange in order to prevent too high a concentration of
chemical fumes building up. An air exchange rate of 10 times the room volume per hour is
required. Consult your local Agfa representative if in doubt.
• Do not disable any built-in safety features.
• Only Agfa certified service engineers should troubleshoot and repair defects.
Safety precautions for cleaning the processors

• Read the safety information in the MSDS before cleaning. Upon request the MSDS are
available for chemicals, i.e. for the solutions in use, and for cleaning. Consider the prescribed
regulations
• Protect your skin: wear disposable rubber or plastic gloves when working with chemicals. In
case of skin contact flush immediately with water, do not use soap.
• Protect your eyes: handle solutions with care; avoid splashing. Wear safety goggles when
necessary. In case of eye contact, flush immediately with plenty of cold water. Get medical
attention.
• Observe the pertaining local regulations for the disposal of chemicals.
Some items of the above mentioned safety instructions may not apply, as there is no chemistry used
in the Drystar 3000.
10/22/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 14 / 1

Installation Planning DD+DIS085.97E
PART 1: INSTALLATION PLANNING
System overview
The following system components should be taken into account in planning.
1 Drystar 3000. Power supply via an all-pole main switch or Connection via plug and socket.
2 Telephone modem for remote diagnostics. The modem should be accessible any time and directly (without
switching) from the outside. Upon installation the connection cable must be connected to the country specific plug for
telephone sockets
3 External keypad with foot switch
Section 14 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 10/29/98

Scope of Delivery and Accessories

Scope of delivery
Device Type ABC Code Explanation
DI 3000 basic 5361/100 346MG • 1 basic DI3000 with GEMINI CPU,

BER module, NIP module and 24
Mbytes RAM module
• Ethernet
• 2 Gbyte hard disk
• 1 foot switch for exposure
• 1 power cord Europe
• 1 power cord USA
• 1 user manual
• 1 packing list
• 1 LCD keypad
• 1 modify kit „Change Film Size“ (only for
11x14" or 14x14" printers)
• 1 screw driver, required for TH
• 100 sheets 14"x17" monomed blue base
(for test purpose)
Accessories
Accessories Type ABC Code Explanation
DT2 B 14x17" 3VN7K Monomed 14x17", blue base (100 sheets)

DT2 B 11x14" 3X3RX Monomed 11x14", blue base (100 sheets)
Digital Interface Upgrade Kit 5361/600 35N9U • 1 MFRI board
• 1 SCN2 board (only if remote control is
required with RS232)
• 1 set installation material and cabling
• A set of isolation material is delivered in
case it is preferred to make an AC
coupling to the host rather than the
(default) DC coupling
Fiber Optic Keypad Extension 38KMV • 1 CLF1 Converter Box (converter 20mA
interface / optical signal)
• 1 FCL1 Converter Box (converter optical
signal / 20mA interface)
• Connection cable between the CLF 1
Converter Box and the Drystar 3000.
The fiber optic cable between the CLF1 and
FCL1 is NOT included in the kit!
10/22/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 14 / 3

B&W Video Interface Kit #1 5361/505 35OD5 • 1 VSI board

Upgr (for first input and only for • 1 SWB2 board
composit video)
• 1 AFR2 board
required, suited for RS422 or RS232
depending on the host)
• 1 LCD keypad with foot switch
• 1 Vidcom II transmitter with power
supply and European and US cable
B&W Video Interface Kit #2 5361/515 35OE7 • 1 AFR2 board
Upgr (for second or third input
and only for composit video)
Color Video Interface Kit #1 5361/525 35OFA • 1 VSI board
Upgr (for first input, also for
• 1 SWB2 board
B&W with external sync)
• 2 AFR2 board
• 1 SSR1 board
• 1 set installation material and cables
• 1 Vidcom III transmitter with power
Color Video Interface Kit #2 5361/535 35OGC • 2 AFR2 board
Upgr (for second or third input,
also for B&W with external sync)
• 1 Vidcom III transmitter with power
Section 14 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 10/29/98

Machine Dimensions
All dimensions in a scale of 1:20 cm
10/22/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 14 / 3

Space Requirements
Minimum space requirements
Note: Not enough free space may increase the repair time.
1 Recommended space for operation and servicing.

2 Free space for cables. Attention: The cables in the rear must be long enough to move the
printer.
Section 14 / 4 DRYSTAR 3000 10/29/98

Space Requirements
Optimum space requirements
Note: Not enough free space may increase the repair time.
We recommend to place a table near the printer for the external keypad and a modem.
1 Recommended space for operation.

2 Space required for servicing. A corner installation is possible, i.e. space 2 is not "essential“. See
previous page for "minimum space requirements“.
10/22/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 14 / 5

Typical network installation
The network must be installed prior to the system installation !
Installation, service and maintenance of the network must be carried out by "third party firms". The
appointment of the "thirt party" should ideally be the decision of the customer themself. In case where
there are already or will be non-agfa components in the network, the customer must carry out the
installation, service and maintenance himself.
However, if the customer has a so-called AGFA-Network or AGFA as a Network Integrator, he must
appoint a "third party" to do the work. In every case mentioned, before Networkplanning occurs,
advice should be sought from OSD / IPO in Mortsel. This group has also the current list of our
networkplanners.
The connection cables of the system components are included in the shipment. They should be
installed in a cable duct on the floor or along the wall.
For further information consult the OEM Connectivity Manual.
Section 14 / 6 DRYSTAR 3000 10/29/98

Ambient conditions
Room temperature: minimum +10 °C, maximum +35 °C, operating
Relative humidity: minimum 10 %, maximum 80 % RH, non-condensing
Noise level: during standby 45 dB(A) maximum

during printing 55 dB(A) maximum
Effects of radiation: If the machine is located in the immediate vicinity of the X-ray room, it is
imperative that the local radiation safety regulations are followed. (Protection
of operative personnel against scattered radiation).
Maximum permissible PRINTER: up to 30 Gauss in any direction in a static magnetic field.

magnetic field in the up to 30 A/m (50/60 Hz) in a dynamic magnetic field
room:
Dust suspension: Max. 0.2 mg/m³

Dust sedimentation: Max. 1.5 mg / (m² x h)
Transport / storage conditions
Ambient temperature storage minimum - 25 ° C

maximum + 55 °C (EN60721-3-1 class 1k4)
transport minimum - 40 ° C
maximum + 70 °C (EN60721-3-2 class 2K4)
Relative humidity storage minimum 10 %, maximum 100 % RH (EN60721-3-1 class 1k4)
transport minimum 10 %, maximum 100 % RH (EN60721-3-1 class 2k4)
10/22/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 14 / 7

PART 2: SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical connections
Installation regulations VDE Electrical installations in installation

room must be in
compliance with the regulations:
IEC 364, VDE 0100 and VDE 0107.
UL Electrical installations in the installation room must be in
compliance with the regulations: “National Electrical Code"
(NEC) (NFPA70).
A ground fault interrupter (IN = 30 mA) according to VDE 664 is
recommended and must be installed at a suitable point in the
circuit.
Mains connection in the VDE Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with DIN 49441 and
installation room CEE 7 standard cover V II, or fixed connection through the
floor.
UL Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 6-15 P plug or fixed
connection through the floor.
Required connection cable Euro version: H05VV - F3G - 3 x 1.5 mm² with earthed pin plug
USA/CAN version: SJT, 3 x AGW 18 with NEMA 6-15P
Main switch Upon machine installation it must be ensured that either the mains
connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the installation on site is
located close to the machine and easily accessible.
Section 14 / 8 DRYSTAR 3000 10/29/98

Performance Data
Type overview
Printer Type Mains connection
Drystar 3000 5361 1N ~100-120V / 220-240V / 50/60 Hz
Functional data
Film size 14 x17 14 x 14 11 x 14
Throughput (sheet/hour) 50 60 70
Access time 1'st film approx. (seconds) 102 100 67
Addressable print area (pixels) 4352 x 5295 4352 x 4358 3426 x 4352
Diagnostic area (pixels) 4256 x 5174 4256 x 4232 3300 x 4256
Electrical data
Nominal voltage [~V] 100-120 / 220-240 AC
Frequency [Hz] 50/60
Maximum power 270 stand by
consumption [W] 700 printing
Fuse protection [A] 100 - 230 V: 2 x 15 AF (not
exchangeable, replaced by
power supply)
Climatic data
Heat dissipation: In standby: 200 W (average)
Printing: 650 W (maximum)
Relative humidity: minimum 20 %, maximum 80 % RH, non-condensing
Room temperature: minimum +10 °C, maximum +30 °C
Dimensions and weights

Packing dimensions
Length (cm) 89,3

Width (cm) 72,4
Height (cm) 160
Weights
printer only (kg) 125

printer packed (kg) 160
(pallet included)
10/22/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 14 / 9

Safety Regulations
The printer has been tested and found to comply with the following international standards and
regulations:
Attention: Safety tests are not completed yet (April 1997)
Safety standards:
• TÜV approval according to: EN60601-1:
Medical electrical equipment - General requirements for safety (Germany)
• UL approval according to: UL 2601-1
Medical electrical equipment (USA)
• C-UL approval according to: UL2601-1
Medical electrical equipment (Canada)
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression):

• FCC rules 47 CFR-part 15-subpart B, class A. (emission rules - USA)
• EN60601-1-2
- EN1000-4-2
- EN1000-4-3
- EN1000-4-4
- EN1000-4-5
- EN55011 class A; emission
• EN61000-3-2; Harmonic class A
• EN61000-3-3; Flicker, short term flicker PST<=1,0; long term flicker PLT<=0,65
USA regulations:
• FDA 510k requirements
• FDA part 820 Good Manufacturing Practice for Medical Devices requirements.
Section 14 / 10 DRYSTAR 3000 10/29/98

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany
Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edité par
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
Printed in Germany / Imprimé en Allemagne

DD+DIS085.97E
DD+DIS084.97E Glossary / Key Word Index
Section 15
List of Contents
1. Key word index ..........................................................................................................1

2. Glossary .....................................................................................................................5

Climatic data Sec 1/ 5

1. Key word index Color Video Interface Kit #1 Sec 14/ 4
Color Video Interface Kit #2 Sec 14/ 4
Compensation Sec 5/ 11
1 COMPONENTS Sec 9/ 9
Components identification Sec 7/ 1
10B2 Sec 2/ 4 composite sync Sec 9/ 8
10B2 Sec 2/ 2 Configuration Sec 3/ 7
Configuration from scratch Sec 6.3/ 10
Connectivity Sec 3/ 10
COS Sec 6.4/ 4
A Covers Sec 8/ 2
Covers and panels Sec 6.5/ 1
ABC-Codes Sec 14/ 3 CPD parameters Sec 3/ 24
Access time Sec 14/ 11 CPU Sec 7/ 7
Accessories Sec 14/ 3 Cross fan Sec 8/ 24
ACQ parameters Sec 3/ 20 Customization Sec 3/ 12
Addressable print area Sec 14/ 11 Customization VSIXXX0? Sec 9/ 3
ADJUSTMENTS Sec 6.6/ 1
Agency approvals SEC 1/ 7
AGFA printers in comparison Sec 5/ 3 D
AIC1 Sec 6.4/ 3
AIC1 PCB Sec 6.5/ 11
Ambient conditions Sec 14/ 9 Decurl unit Sec 6.1/ 1
Annotation Sec 3/ 17 Decurl unit Sec 6.5/ 15
AOS shell Sec 5/ 27 Decurl Unit Sec 5/ 19
AOS shell commands Sec 6.2/ 6 Decurling assembly Sec 8/ 28; 30
APIP Sec 5/ 36 Decurling drive assembly Sec 8/ 32
APP Sec 3 2 Defective resistor of TH Sec 6.3/ 6
Application Sec 3/ 22 Densitometer assembly Sec 6.5/ 16
Application Sec 5/ 29 Densitometer assembly Sec 8/ 44; 46
ART parameters Sec 3/ 19 Densitometer calibration Sec 6.6/ 2
Destination/Network Sec 3/ 18
Aspect ratio tool Sec 9/ 16
Diagnostic area Sec 14/ 11
AUI Sec 2/ 4
DICOM Sec 5/ 36
Autolock Sec 9/ 1
digital chain Sec 3/ 10
Autolock additional guidelines Sec 9/ 26
Digital Interface Upgrade Kit Sec 14/ 3
Autolock recommendations Sec 9/ 30
Dimensions Sec 14/ 11
Autolock restrictions Sec 9/ 30
Dimensions Sec 1/ 5
Autolocking Sec 9/ 10
Disk Space Quotas Sec 3/ 14
Drum Sec 6.5/ 8
Drum motor Sec 6.5/ 8
B DSP parameters Sec 3/ 19
Dual pass Sec 9/ 22
B&W Video Interface Kit #1 Sec 14/ 4 Dust Sec 6.3/ 6
B&W Video Interface Kit #2 Sec 14/ 4
Back view Sec 7/ 4
Backup Sec 3/ 25 E
Basic assembly Sec 8/ 34; 36
Belt tension Sec 6.6/ 2
Edit keypads Sec 3/ 22
BIO PCB Sec 6.5/ 6
Electrical codings Sec 6.4/ 1
BMD parameters Sec 3/ 24
Electrical connections Sec 14/ 10
Bottom assembly Sec 8/ 4
Electrical data 11
bus error Sec 6.3/ 8
ELSCINT Sec 9/ 7
EMI/EMC measures Sec 6.1/ 3
Environmental requirements Sec 1/ 5
C Error message Sec 6.3/ 1
Error message Sec 6.3/ 3
Cabling Sec 3/ 10 Error message as text Sec 6.3/ 1
CALIBRATIONS Sec 6.6/ 1 Error message as text Sec 6.3/ 3
Cannot find H or V sync Sec 9/ 2 Ethernet failures Sec 6.3/ 8
Cannot find pixelclock Sec 9/ 2 Extemal composite sync Sec 9/ 8
Capture an image Sec 9/ 2 Extended info display selection Sec 9/ 22
Changing the film size Sec 6.6/ 10 External keypad Sec 2/ 5
characters Sec 9/ 1 External Sync Sec 2/ 2
Clamp delay Sec 9/ 20
Clamp width Sec 9/ 20
Cleaning material Sec 12/ 2
Climatic data Sec 14/ 11
03/17/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 15 / 1

Glossary / Key Word Index DD+DIS084.97E
Interground bolt Sec 2/ 2

F Intergrounding Sec 6.1/ 4
Intergrounding cable Sec 6.1/ 4
File structure Sec 5/ 27 intergrounding cable Sec 6.1/ 3
Film feeding unit Sec 6.5/ 2 interlaced Sec 9/ 3
Film formats Sec 1/ 5 INTERPOLATION Sec 5/ 31
Film Loading Assembly Sec 5/ 14
Film loading assembly Sec 6.5/ 1
Film loading assembly capacity Sec 1/ 5
film loading compartment Sec 3/ 3 J
Film material 3
Film positioning unit assembly Sec 6.5/ 12 Jam clearAnce button Sec 2/ 6
Film size Sec 14/ 11 Jumper setting Sec 6.4/ 1
Filter Setting Sec 9/ 2
flat belt Sec 6.6/ 4
Floppy drive Sec 2/ 2 K
Foot switch Sec 2/ 5
Frequency Sec 14/ 11 Keypads Sec 3/ 20
Frequency Sec 1/ 6
Friction clutches Sec 5/ 15
Front view Sec 7/ 1
Functional block diagram Sec 5/ 5 L
Functional data Sec 14/ 11
Functional sequence Sec 5/ 4 Language Sec 3/ 13
Fuses Sec 1/ 6 Led indication Sec 9/ 3
Fuses Sec 6.4/ 2 LED's Sec 6.4/ 2
Load assembly Sec 8/ 6; 8
Load drive assembly Sec 8/ 10
Local keypad Sec 2/ 1
G Log files Sec 5/ 28
Ground potential differences Sec 6.1/ 4

M
H Machine Dimensions Sec 14/ 5
Macrodensitometer Sec 5/ 18
Halfline lockout Sec 9/ 21 Main Drive Sec 5/ 17
Hard disk Sec 6.5/ 7 main drive assembly Sec 6.6/ 2
Hard disk doesn’t work Sec 6.3/ 7 Main driving assembly Sec 6.5/ 9
Harddisk Sec 5/ 24 Main motor assembly Sec 8/ 16
Hardware Model Sec 5/ 20 Mains connector Sec 2/ 2
Heat dissipation Sec 14/ 11 Maintenance Checklist Sec 7/ 1
Heat emission Sec 1/ 5 Maintenance cycle Sec 12/ 1
Heating element Sec 6.5/ 14 Maintenance parts Sec 12/ 2
High frequency selection Sec 9/ 22 Maintenance tools Sec 12/ 2
Horizontal alignement assembly Sec 8/ 12 MAU Sec 2/ 2
Horizontal alignment assembly Sec 6.5/ 3 MAU Sec 6.4/ 1
Horizontal film alignment Sec 6.6/ 6 Maximum density calibration Sec 3/ 8
Horizontal Film Alignment Sec 5/ 16 MDM Sec 5/ 18
MDM1 Sec 6.4/ 3
Mechanical codings Sec 6.4/ 1
I Mechanical film transport problem Sec 6.3/ 6
Messages Sec 9/ 2
Illegal instruction Sec 6.3/ 9 MFRI Sec 2/ 2
Image Data Flow Sec 5/ 6 MNU parameters Sec 3/ 15
Image fault Sec 6.3/ 1 Monomed films Sec 5/ 12
Image fault Sec 6.3/ 6
Image processing Sec 5/ 29
IMOS Sec 3/ 6 N
IMOS Sec 6.2/ 4
INS Sec 3/ 1 Name/Value Edit Sec 3/ 14
INSPECTION OF PACKING SEC 1/ 1 Network connection Sec 2/ 4
Install service program Sec 6.2/ 4 Network installation Sec 14/ 8
Installation Sec 3/ 3 Networking Sec 5/ 34
Installation checklist Sec 3/ 1 No printing/no error message Sec 6.3/ 1
Installation regulations Sec 14/ 10 No printing/no error message Sec 6.3/ 4
Interface requirements Sec 1/ 6 noise Sec 9/ 1
Interfaces Sec 5/ 2 Noise level Sec 14/ 9
Section 15 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 03/17/98

Noise level Sec 1/ 5 Side view, left Sec 7/ 3

Nominal voltage Sec 14/ 11 SIEMENS Sec 9/ 5
Nominal voltage Sec 1/ 6 Site inspection Sec 3/ 1
non IEC 601 conforming equipment Sec 3/ 3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE Sec 5/ 26
non-interlaced Sec 9/ 3 Space requierements SEC 1/ 3
NVF parameter Sec 3/ 15 Space requirements Sec 14/ 6
Specifications SEC 1/ 5
Spurious Interrupt Sec 6.3/ 9
O SSR1 Sec 9/ 9
standard delivery Sec 3/ 3
OSD Sec 3/ 7 Start service program Sec 6.2/ 4
OTR Sec 3 2 Storage conditions Sec 14/ 9
Supplementary earth connector Sec 2/ 2
Supplementary protective earth cable Sec 3/ 3
Supplementary protective earth connector Sec 6.1/ 3
P SW component startup Sec 5/ 4
Switch setting Sec 6.4/ 1
PHILIPS Sec 9/ 4 Switchboard SWB2 Sec 9/ 9
PICKER Sec 9/ 7 Switching systems Sec 9/ 3
Pickup motor Sec 6.5/ 3 Sync filter Sec 9/ 19
Pixel Clock Sec 9/ 8 Sync threshold Sec 9/ 19
PLL on hold during vsync Sec 9/ 21 System integration Sec 3/ 18
PMC1 Sec 6.4/ 2 System overview Sec 14/ 2
Postscript Sec 5/ 39 System Overview Sec 5/ 1
Power consumption Sec 1/ 6
Power input Sec 1/ 6
Power requirements Sec 1/ 6 T
Power supply Sec 6.5/ 16
Print cycle Sec 5/ 7
Take over unit Sec 8/ 26
Print queue Sec 5/ 24
Task Code Sec 3/ 1
Printer does not start up Sec 6.3/ 1; 2 Taste LUT Sec 5/ 29
printer software Sec 6.2/ 3 Test image Sec 3/ 4
Printing Areas Sec 5/ 33 TH 10
Thermal Head Sec 6.5/ 10
Thermal head Sec 6.6/ 1
R Thermal head Sec 7/ 5
Thermal head Sec 5/ 8
Radio-interference regulations Sec 14/ 12 Thermal head assembly Sec 8/ 18; 20
Radio-interference regulations Sec 1/ 7 Thermal Head Assembly Sec 5/ 13
Rear panel Sec 2/ 2 Thermal head banding Sec 6.3/ 7
Rear section Sec 6.5/ 4 Thermal head CAM assembly Sec 8/ 22
Remote service Sec 6.2/ 11 Thermal head fan assembly Sec 6.5/ 12
Right side view Sec 8/ 42 Thermal head pressure adjustment Sec 6.6/ 12
ROCAN bus Sec 5/ 23 Thermal head profile calibration Sec 6.6/ 1
Room temperature Sec 14/ 9 Thermographic printing principle Sec 5/ 8
TH-position adjustment Sec 5/ 9
TH-pressure adjustment Sec 5/ 10
S Throughput Sec 14/ 11
Throughput Sec 1/ 5
Tiltwatch Sec 1/ 1
Safety Instructions Sec 6.1/ 1 Time and Date Sec 3/ 13
Safety Regulations Sec 14/ 12 TOOLS. Sec 6.2/ 1
Safety standards Sec 14/ 12 toothed belt Sec 6.6/ 3
Safety standards Sec 1/ 7 TOSHIBA Sec 9/ 6
Safety switch Sec 6.1/ 2 TP Sec 2/ 4
SAFTEy Sec 14/ 1 Transport conditions Sec 14/ 9
SAM full Sec 9/ 2 Transport damage Sec 1/ 1
SCN2 Sec 6.4/ 1; 2 transport protection Sec 3/ 2; 26
Scope of Delivery Sec 14/ 3 Tread of flat belt Sec 6.6/ 5
Sensors Sec 6.5/ 9; 13 Twisted pair Sec 2/ 2
SENSORS Sec 7/ 1 Type overview Sec 14/ 11
Sensors Sec 6.5/ 2
Service PC requirements Sec 6.2/ 1; 2
SERVICE SOFTWARE Sec 6.2/ 3
Service software Sec 3/ 6
U
Shockwatch Sec 1/ 1
SIC Sec 3 2 Unpacking instructions Sec 1/ 2
SIC Sec 3/ 18 USA regulations Sec 14/ 12
03/17/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 15 / 3

USA regulations Sec 1/ 7 VME fan Sec 6.5/ 5

VME rack Sec 6.5/ 4; 7
VME rack Sec 7/ 6
V VME rack basic assembly Sec 8/ 38; 40
VSI Sec 9/ 1
VSI board Sec 3/ 11
Vertical alignement assembly Sec 8/ 14 VSI board characteristics Sec 9/ 8
Vertical alignment Sec 6.3/ 7 VSI EVALUATION FORM Sec 9/ 27
Vertical alignment assembly motor Sec 6.5/ 3 VSI frame grabber board Sec 9/ 9
Vertical film alignment Sec 6.6/ 6 VSI1 Sec 9/ 29
VIDCOM Sec 3/ 10
VIDCOM II - Transmitter box Sec 9/ 9
VIDCOM III - Transmitter box Sec 9/ 9
VIDCOM SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS Sec 9/ 31 W
video chain Sec 3/ 10
VIDEO CONNECTION Sec 2/ 2 Weight Sec 14/ 11
Video filter Sec 9/ 19 Weight Sec 1/ 5
VIDEO SYNAPSIS INTERFACE Sec 9/ 1 Window level Sec 5/ 30
video undershoots Sec 9/ 1 WIRING DIAGRAMS Sec 7/ 9
VME Bus Sec 5/ 21
Section 15 / 4 DRYSTAR 3000 03/17/98

2. Glossary
A
AIC1 Analog Input with CAN. Controls the TH voltage. Data interface between COS
and TH.
ADC Analog to digital converter.
AFR2 Analog Fibre Receiver. Piggyback board on SWB2 to receive optical analogue
data.
ASYNC Asynchrone serial communication.
B
B/W Black and white.
BER board One of the three circuit boards which are plugged on the CPU board GEMINI.
The BES board controls the Ethernet and SCSI interface, two serial ports and
the communication with the floppy drive. ROCAN interface to VME.
BIO3 board Internal basic input/output board which serves as a crossroad between the
different components of the printer.
C
CAN bus Controlled Area Network
COS Compensation and Superslicing. Performs the compensation for the thermal
head.
CPU GEMINI board Board which controls the main functions of the printer; central processing unit.
D
De-curl unit Assembly in the printer which is responsible for de-curling the films before they
leave the printer.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine
DRA Direct Remote Access
Drum A rubber roller in the printer that guides the film along the print head.
DSH1 Density Sensor head
DTS1 Temperature sensor
E
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMI Electromagnetic Interference.
EPLD Erasable, programmable logic device.
EPROM Erasable, programmable read only memory.
Ethernet Embedded spread technologies for LANs (Local Aera networks)
03/17/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 15 / 5

F
FIFO First in, first out principle which can be used for instructions and for data
processing.
Film type The type of films the image has to be printed on: transparent clear base,
transparent blue base or opaque.
Friction coefficient Resistance coefficient an objet encounters when moving over another one.
G
Guide rollers Rollers which press the film against the drum during the printing.
H
Heat sink Thermal radiator, mounted on the thermal head to remove excessive or
unwanted heat.
I
ICM Image Composition Map. Image Data for on film in a controller or printer.
IMOS Image Monitor Software
K
KEY3 Circuit board which controls the local keypad of the printer. Part of ROCAN bus.
Keypad (external) Control panel, used in the point-to-point configuration of the printer.
Keypad (local) Control panel, located at the front of the printer. By means of the keypad, the
operator can activate various functions.
L
LCD Liquid Crystal Display.
LUT Look-up table, e.g. Kanamori LUT.
M
MAU2 Media Access Unit, Ethernet interface.
MDM1 Macro Densitometer Board. Part of ROCAN bus. Controls DSH1.
MFRI Multi Format Receiver, digital interface.
Microcontroller Electronic component which carries out an input/output and a microprocessor
function.
N
NIP Neuron image processor module. One of the three circuit boards which are
plugged on the CPU board GEMINI. The NIP board controls the image
processing.
NVF Name Value File.
Section 15 / 6 DRYSTAR 3000 03/17/98

Optical isolation Electrical separation of two circuits by means of optoelectric components. Often
done for the connection of external modules, to protect the internal electronics.
P
PCB Printed circuit board.
Pixel One small printing point on the film.
PMC1 Precision Motor Control: Part of ROCAN bus.
Point to point Communication configuration which consists of a direct link between two units.
configuration
Print engine That part of the printer which takes care of the film transport through the printer,
the ribbon winding up and rewinding and the thermal head movement. It can be
split up into following sections: input section, drum section, thermal head
section, ribbon section, output section and de-curl section.
PSU Power supply unit. Supplies different voltage levels to the printer modules.
R
RAM Random access memory. One of the three circuit boards which are plugged on
the CPU board GEMINI. The RAM board is used for temporary storage of data.
RDS Removable Disk System used for storage of images on removable disk
cartridge.
ROCAN bus Controlled Area Network
S
SCSI Small computer systems interface.
SWB2 Switch board: The circuit board at the rear side of the printer, which provides
several video input and output connectors, and external sync input connectors.
T
Terminating resistor Resistor of 75Ω, used for termination of videosignals, i.e. to adjust the
impedance at the end of the videoline.
Thermal head Resistor line that transfers the image to the film
V
VME bus Versatile Module Europe bus. Bus for the parallel image data transmission (16
bit bus).
VSI board Video Synapse Interface. This board captures and digitizes the incoming analog
video signal.
03/17/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 15 / 7

AGFA - Drystar 3000 (Service Manual) PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AGFA - Drystar 3000 (Service Manual) PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Technical

To order spare parts: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3760

To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

Agfa Company Confidential

0. Order list Caution:

5. Theory of operation Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a

7. Reference and Circuit Diagrams

8. Spare Parts List

11. Technical Modifications

13. Fieldservice Bulletins

14. Installation Planning

1 INSPECTION OF PACKING .......................................................................... 1

6 AGENCY APPROVALS ................................................................................. 7

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / I

During formal inspection, you should:

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / 1

For unpacking refer to the unpacking instructions, enclosed inside the

Section 1 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Minimum space requirements for operation and servicing

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / 3

Optimum space requirements for servicing

4 CHECKING THE ACCESSORY KIT

Section 1 / 4 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

5.1 Environmental requirements

Conditions Temperature Relative Humidity Air Pressure

Working-Mode Noise level Heat emission Max. permissible magn.

Throughput Film formats Film loading assembly

Dust (suspension) 0,2 mg/m³

Dust (sedimentation) 1,5 mg/(m²h)

5.2 Dimensions and weight

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / 5

5.3 Power requirements

Printer Drystar 3000 5361/100 Tolerance

5.4 Interface requirements

Signal Printer configuration

Section 1 / 6 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 1 / 7

1 LOCAL KEYPAD ........................................................................................... 1

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 2 / I

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 2 / 1

Section 2 / 2 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 2 / 3

1 AUI Ethernet (Sub-D 15 pin female) connection to an external transceiver.*

Section 2 / 4 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

Item Keyname Screen Function of the key

01/28/98 DRYSTAR 3000 Section 2 / 5

6 JAM CLEARANCE BUTTON

Section 2 / 6 DRYSTAR 3000 01/28/98

5 KICK OFF ..................................................................................................................... 18

6 ADDENDUM A: REMOVING THE TRANSPORT PROTECTION ............................................... 19

09.01.00 Type 5361 Section 3 / I

1.2 Installation checklist

The following order of listed tasks is mandatory !

The following order of listed tasks is not mandatory !

Connectivity INS 2.2

Section 3 / 2 5361 09.01.00

1.3 Scope of delivery

1.4 Removing the transport protection

1.5 Mounting the flat belt of the main drive

2.1 Technical installation

default language is: - English

2.1.2 Mains connection

2.1.3 Switch on device